Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) User's Guide Version 6 February 2022


ELECTRONIC REPORTING TOOL (ERT)

USER'S GUIDE

Version 6
February 2022

Developed by AMEC
For U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

-------
3 EKT

~ X

Welcome to the
ELECTRONIC REPORTING TOOL
(ERT)

Developed for
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Sector Policies and Programs
Division Measurement Policy Group, D243-05 RTP NC 27711 Tel.
919.541.4786 E-mall Lowe.theresaicbepa.gov

Developed by
AMEC E&l
Paul Bakef

Continue

Welcome Page

Setup / Test Plan

Process Info

Locations/Methods

ERT - Main Menu

Tester DQ Assessment

Attachments

Completeness Check

Report Verification

Regulatory Agency
Review

Test Plan Review

Regulatory Field
Observation Documentation

Regulatory Assessment of
Supporting Documentation

Emissions Results

Comprehensive Regulatory
Test Assessment

I

Printed Reports

Select Report / Data
Table

Administration

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Select Project Data Set

Create New Project Data Set

Save Project Data Set As

Compact Project Data Set



Current Project
Data Set:

C: \Users\tlowepesktopVHG Mercury EXAMPLE_08-17-2020_12-54.accdb - Date Created: 10/9/2017

Create ERT Submission Package File



Action

~w

SubmitDate T SubmittedTo T

SubmittedFr ~

Comment

Pkg Name ~ 1



Submit Test Report

0

8/17/2020





C:\Users\tlowe\Desktop\HG Mercury
EXAM PLE_08-17-2020_12-54_pkg. zip

*



















II Record: H 1 of 1

~

~I ~ Search

IM



• 1

-------
Table of Contents Part 1 Electronic Reporting Tool User Manual

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION	1

What is the ERT?	1

ERT Main Parts	1

ERT Application	1

Project Data Set	1

Excel Spreadsheets	2

Basic Workflow	2

CHAPTER 2: BEFORE YOU BEGIN	3

Test Plan	3

Entering Sampling Data	3

CHAPTER 3: GETTING STARTED	5

Verify that you have a Version of Microsoft Access that will Run the ERT	5

Downloading and Installing theERT	5

Example Data	6

Starting the ERT	6

Project Data Sets	7

Create New Project Data Set	8

Select Project Data Set	8

Save Project Data Set As	8

CHAPTER 4: CREATE TEST PLAN	10

Navigating and Using the Tool	11

Data Entry Process	11

Requested Information	12

Screen Navigation	12

Screen Help Tips	12

Test Plan Tabs	12

Facility/Tester Tab	12

Locations/Methods Tab	18

Regulations Tab	26

Process/APCD Tab	28

Methods Continued Tab	34

Audit/Calibrations Tab	36

Schedule Tab	37

Reviewers Tab	38

Attachments Tab	39

Adding an Attachment	39

11

-------
CHAPTER 5: TEST DATA	42

Run Data	42

Add New Run Data - Spreadsheet Import	42

Add New Run Data - Directly	44

Select Run Data	45

Correcting Run Data Entry Information	45

Delete Run Data	46

Change Run Number	46

Change Run Date	48

Isokinetic/ Measured Method Test Data	48

Method SetupTab	50

Header Data Tab	51

Point Data Tab	61

Lab Data Tab	64

Sample Data Tab	65

Sampling/Stack Data Results Tab	68

Cyclone Cut Size Tab	72

Emissions Tab	73

Paired Train QA/QC Tab	74

Instrumental Method Test Data	76

Method Setup Tab	76

Calibrations Tab	78

ITM Run Results Tab	79

Emissions Tab	84

Performance Specification Data	85

CEMS Information and Run Data	86

CEMS Calibration Drift Data	88

Relative Accuracy Results	89

Calibration DriftResults	90

Process Data	91

Process Run Data Tab	91

APCD Run Data Tab	92

Lab Data Tab	93

Tester DQ Assessment	94

Attachments	95

Completeness Check	95

Report Verification	97

Creating an ERT Submission Package File	98

Compacting a Project Data Set	98

Compacting the ERT	98

Project Submittal History/Creating the ERT Package for Regulatory Agency Submittal	99

CHAPTER 6: ACCESSING TEST PLANS AND DATA FORREVIEW	104

Obtaining Test data for Review	104

How to Obtain and View ERT Submissions from WebFIRE	104

iii

-------
CHAPTER 7: REGULATORY AGENCY REVIEW	106

Test Plan Review	106

Test Plan Review Locations/Methods	107

QA Information	107

Testing Observation and Report Review	112

Regulatory Field Observation Documentation	113

Regulatory Assessment of Supporting Documentation	113

Emissions Results	117

Comprehensive Regulatory Test Assessment	118

CHAPTER 8: PRINTED REPORTS	120

Test Plan	122

Test Plan Review	123

Full Test Report (excludes RATAs and 201A ISO's and excludes RATAs)	124

Sampling Location Table	124

Test Parameters Table	124

Sampling/Stack Data Results SummaryTable	124

Method 201A Point to Point Isokinetic Calcs Table	124

Sampling/Stack Data Results DetailTable	125

Emissions SummaryTable	126

Emissions Summary Table withLimits	126

Process Run Data Table	126

APCD Run Data Table	126

Process Lab Run Data Table	126

Attachments	126

Completeness Questions	126

Regulatory Review Questions	126

Relative Accuracy Results	126

Method 30BQA/QC	127

CHAPTER 9: ADMINISTRATION	128

Help/ System Reports	128

iv

-------
APPENDIX A: CALCULATIONS	130

Calculations and Decision Criteria Determination for RAT As	130

ERT Emission/Concentration Calculations	130

Instrumental Test Method (ITM) Run Results	133

Method 3OB Sample Data	134

RATA Results	136

Sample Train Parameters	136

Stack Gas	138

APPENDIX B: METHODS	140

APPENDIX C: FREQUENTLY ASKEDQUESTIONS	142

APPENDIX D: SCC TREE	142

v

-------
ERT User Manual Stack Testing List of Figures

Figure 1 - Security Warning	6

Figure 2 - ERT Main Menu	7

Figure 3 - Project Data Set of the ERT Main Menu	7

Figure 4 - Creating a Project Data Set	8

Figure 5 - Select Project Data Set Browse Window	9

Figure 6 - Save Project Data Set as Template	9

Figure 7 - ERT Main Menu	10

Figure 8 - Test Plan Facility/Tester Tab	11

Figure 9 - Test Plan Permit/SCC Tab	14

Figure 10 - Selecting SCC	16

Figure 11 - SCC selection menu with no established process units	16

Figure 12 - Source Classification Code information when no units are available	17

Figure 13 - Test Plan Location/Methods Tab	18

Figure 14 - Test Location Information Panel	19

Figure 15 - Add Target Parameters	21

Figure 16 - Select Location, Method and Compounds	21

Figure 17 - Deternine Method by Selecting Compound	22

Figure 18 - Custom Method Information	23

Figure 19 - Add Emissions/Concentrations	24

Figure 20 - Select Emissions/Concentrations	24

Figure 21 - Test Plan Regulation Tab	26

Figure 22 - Regulation Limits	27

Figure 23 - Test Plan Process/APCD Tab	28

Figure 24 - Add Process Information	30

Figure 25 - Process Lab Information	31

Figure 26 - Attachments - Source/Process Flow Diagram	32

Figure 27 - Control Devices	33

Figure 28 - Test Plan Methods cont. Tab	34

Figure 29 - Test Plan Audit/Calibrations Tab	36

Figure 30 - Test Plan Schedule Tab	37

Figure 31 - Test Plan Reviewers Tab	38

Figure 32 - Test Plan Attachments Tab	39

Figure 33 - Attachments Options	40

Figure 34 - Run Data Details	42

Figure 35 - Import from Spreadsheet Option Dialog	42

Figure 36- Import Field Run Data Window	43

Figure 37- View Imported Data Windows	43

Figure 38 - Enter New Run Key Data Window	44

Figure 39 - Select Run Data	45

Figure 40- Delete Run Window	46

Figure 41 - Rename Run Number	47

Figure 42 - Confirmation for renaming run number	47

Figure 43 - Run Data Details Screen for Isokinetic/Manual Methods	48

Figure 44 - Isokinetic Method: Method Setup Tab	50

Figure 45 - Single Train Isokinetic Method: Header Data	51

Figure 46- Paired Train Manual Method: Header Data	52

Figure 47- Mass of liquid collucted sub menu	59

Figure 48 - Isokinetic Method: Point Data Tab	61

-------
Figure 49- Paired Sample Train Point Data Tab	61

Figure 50- Isokinetic Method: Lab Data Tab	64

Figure 51 - Paired Sample Train: Sample Data Screen	65

Figure 52- Isokinetic Method: Sampling/Stack Data Results Tab	68

Figure 53- Paired Sampling Trains: Stack Data Results Tab	69

Figure 54 - Cylcone Cut Size Tab	72

Figure 55 - Emissions Tab	73

Figure 56- QA/QC Tab	74

Figure 57 - Run Data Details for Instrumental Methods- Method Setup Tab	76

Figure 58 - Calibrations Tab	78

Figure 59 - ITM Run Results Tab	80

Figure 60 - ITM Run Results, stack Parameters and Calibration Set selection	81

Figure 61 - Emissions Tab	84

Figure 62 - Performance Specification Run Data Details	85

Figure 63 - CEMS Calibration and Drift Data Entry	88

Figure 64 - RATA results report	89

Figure 65 - Calibration Drift Results Report	90

Figure 66 - Process Run Data Tab	91

Figure 67 - Run Navigation Bar	92

Figure 68 - APCD Run Data Tab	92

Figure 69 - Lab Data Tab	93

Figure 70 - Tester Comments window	94

Figure 71 - Attachment Tab	95

Figure 72 - Completeness Check: Quality Assessment Questions	96

Figure 73 - Final Test Report Verification Window	97

Figure 74 - Access 2007 Compacting of ERT	98

Figure 75 - Project Submittal History Area of the ERT Main Menu	99

Figure 76 - Missing Items List in ERT	100

Figure 77 - Create ERT Submission Package File Menu	100

Figure 78 - Associate Reference Method Data Runs with Process Runs	101

Figure 79 - Blank Associate Data Runs with Process Runs	101

Figure 80 - PDS Submittal Data	102

Figure 81 - Notice of Creation of ERT file	103

Figure 82 - WebFIRE Seach Engine	104

Figure 83 - WebFIRE Search Results	105

Figure 84 - Test Plan Review Facility /Permit Information	106

Figure 85 - Test Plan Review Locations/Methods Tab	107

Figure 86 - Location, Stack and Flow Rate Information and Traverse Details	107

Figure 87 - Complete Protocol Evaluation Calculations Screen Shot	109

Figure 88 - Regulatory Field Observation Documentation Window	113

Figure 89 - Regulatory Review of Quality Assessment Questions	113

Figure 90 - Completeness and Regulatory Review Quality Assessment Questions	114

Figure 91 - QAQ's Show Data	115

Figure 92 - Cascading Multiple Windows	116

Figure 93 - Test Report Review - Average Emissions	117

Figure 94 - Test Reviewer Comments	118

Figure 95- Report Selection Menu	121

Figure 96 - Test Plan Report Print Preview Screen	122

Figure 97 - Test Plan Review Comments	123

-------
Figure 98 - The ERT Help/Administration Screen	128

IN ! ! il ! i! I II 2 \ I I ! t !! !! t!!!- ill-M i 1^1 1 -Ml i|.'ll .1i' T

Application and Laboratory Test Data

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION	1

What is the ERT?	1

ERT MainParts	1

ERT Application	1

Project Data Set	1

Excel Spreadsheet	2

Basic Workflow	2

CHAPTER 2: GETTING STARTED	3

Verify that you have a Version of Microsoft Access that will Run the ERT	3

Downloading and Installing theERT	3

Example Data	4

Starting the ERT	4

Project Data Sets	5

Create New Project Data Set	5

Select Project Data Set	6

Save Project Data Set As	6

CHAPTER 3: CREATING A WOOD HEATER APPLICATION	8

Navigating and Using the Tool	9

Data Entry Process	9

Screen Navigation	9

Screen Help Tips	9

General Information	10

Manufacturer's Information	11

EPA-Approved Test Laboratory	12

EPA-Approved Third-Party Certifier	13

Compliance Statements Acknowledgements	14

Compliance Statements Cont	14

Signatures	16

CHAPTER4: WOOD HEATER LAB DATA ENTRY	17

-------
Run Data	17

Add New Run Data	17

Add New Run Data - Spreadsheet Import	19

Delete Run Data	21

Efficiency Data (B415.1-10)	22

Header Data	22

Point Data	24

Show Calculations	25

Show Results	26

PM Data (E2515-11)	27

Preburn	27

Box A, Box B and Box C	28

Box B	29

Box C - 1 -hour Option	31

Hydronic Heater	31

Ambient	32

Results / Efficiency	34

Show Results	35

Show Efficiency Calcs	36

CHAPTER 5: WOOD HEATER SUMMARY TABLES	37

Hydronic Heaters	37

Data Summary Part A	37

Data Summary Part B	38

Additional Information	38

Annual Weighting	38

Adjustable Burn Rate	39

Data Summary	39

Annual Weighting	39

Additional Information	40

Single Burn Rate	41

Data Summary	41

Annual Weighting	41

Additional Information	41

Pellet Stove	42

Summary Results - Pellet Stoves	42

Summary Results - CSA B415.1	42

Summary Results - Totals	42

Forced Air Furnace	43

Data Summary	43

Data Summary Part B	43

Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage	44

Data Summary Part A	44

Data Summary Part B	44

Data Summary Part C	45

Data Summary Part D	45

Additional Summary Information Part E	45

Annual Weighting	46

-------
CHAPTER 6: WOOD HEATER CHECKLIST	47

General and General Information	47

Checklist	47

CHAPTER 7: WOOD HEATER ATTACHMENTS	48

CHAPTER 8: ADMINISTRATION	50

Help/ SystemReports	50

-------
ERT User Manual for Wood Heater Certification List of Figures

Security Warning	4

ERT Main Menu	5

Project Data Set of the ERT Main Menu	5

Creating a Project Data Set	6

Select Project Data Set Browse Window	7

Save Project Data Set as Template	7

-	ERT Main Menu, Wood Heater Section	8
Wood Heater Module on Main Menu	8
General Information	9
Wood Heater Application Manufacturer's Information	11
Wood Heater Application EPA-Approved Test Laboratory	12
Wood Heater Application EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier	13
Wood Heater Application Compliance Statement Acknowledgements	14
Wood Heater Application Compliance Statements Cont.	15

-	Attach documents related to each compliance statement.	16
Wood Heater Application Signatures	16

-	Wood Heater Lab Data Entry on ERT Main Menu	17
Run Data Detail s	17
Add New Run Data	17

-	Add New Run for Efficiency Data (B415.1-10)	18
Select Run Added	18

-Method B415.1-10 tabs to be completed.	19

-	Add New Run for PM Data (E2515-11)	19

-	Import Spreadsheet	20

-	Linking Data From Different Worksheets in a Workbook	20

-	Import Successful	21

-	Select Run Data	21

-	Delete Run Data Menu	21
Delete Run	22

-	Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Header Data	24

-	Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Point Data	25

-	Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Show Calculations and Show Results Buttons	25

-	Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Show Calculations	26

-	Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Show Results	26

-	Particulate Matter Data (E2515-11) Preburn	28
Particulate Matter Data (E2515-ll)BoxA	29
Particulate Matter Data (E2515 -11) Box B	30
PM Data (E2515-11) Box C - 1 Hour Option	31
Temperature Data (E2515-11) Hydronic Heater	32
PM Data (E2515-11) Ambient	33
PM Data (E2515-11) Results / Efficiency	34

-	Particulate Matter Data (E2515-11) Show Results	3 5
PM Data (E2515-11) Show Efficiency Calculations	36

-	Wood Heater Summary Table Menu	37
Hydronic Heaters - Data Summary Part A	37
Hydronic Heaters - Data Summary Part B	38
Hydronic Heaters - Additional Information	38
Hydronic Heaters - Annual Weighting	38

Figure

99 -

Figure

00 -

Figure

01 -

Figure

02 -

Figure

03 -

Figure

04 -

Figure

05 -

Figure

06 -

Figure

07 -

Figure

08 -

Figure

09 -

Figure

10 -

Figure

11 -

Figure

12 -

Figure

13 -

Figure

14 -

Figure

15 -

Figure

16-

Figure

17-

Figure

18-

Figure

19 -

Figure

20-

Figure

21 -

Figure

22-

Figure

23 -

Figure

24-

Figure

25 -

Figure

26-

Figure

27 -

Figure

28-

Figure

29-

Figure

30-

Figure

31 -

Figure

32-

Figure

33 -

Figure

34 -

Figure

35 -

Figure

36 -

Figure

37 -

Figure

38 -

Figure

39 -

Figure

40-

Figure

41 -

Figure

42-

Figure

43 -

Figure

44 -

Figure

45 -

Figure

46 -

-------
Figure 147 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Data Summary	39

Figure 148 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Annual Weighting	39

Figure 149 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Additional Information	40

Figure 150 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Data Summary	41

Figure 151 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Annual Weighting	41

Figure 152 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Additional Information	41

Figure 153 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results	42

Figure 154 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results (CSA B415.1)	42

Figure 155 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results - Totals	42

Figure 156 - Forced Air Furnace - Data Summary	43

Figure 157 - Forced Air Furnace - Data Summary Part B	43

Figure 158 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part A	44

Figure 159 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part B	44

Figure 160 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part C	45

Figure 161 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part D	45
Figure 162 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage - Additional Summary Information 45

Figure 163 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage - Annual Weighting	46

Figure 164 - Wood Heater Checklist Menu	47

Figure 165 - Wood Heater Checklist - General Information	47

Figure 166 - Wood Heater Checklist	48

Figure 167 - Heater Attachment Menu	48

Figure 168 - Wood Heater Attachments list	49

Figure 169 - The ERT Help/Adminstration Screen	50

-------
Chapter 1: Introduction

Thank you for using this version of EPA's Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT). Please keep checking
Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) Webpcige for the latest version of ERT and the user's manual.

What is the ERT?

The ERT is used to electronically create stationary source sampling test plans and reports
which are submitted to regulatory agencies, provide a means for regulatory agencies to give
comments on a test plan, to document the test program, to calculate results and to submit (or
resubmit) the test results as an electronic report to the regulatory agency. Additionally, the
ERT provides a means for individuals to review and comment on the submitted test report.
Certain EPA regulatory programs require the use of the ERT or compatible XML schema to
submit compliance tests reports. The ERT allows one to create a compressed submittal
package, which consists of the test data and an XML export file. Users can then upload the
submission package file to the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX)/CEDRI: Compliance
and Emissions Data Reporting Interface. After a processing period, the test reports will be
stored in the EPA's WebFIRE database accessible through the WebFIRE Webpage.

ERT Main Parts

When you open the ERT for the first time, you will see the Microsoft Access Application.
The application, which consists of the main screen, internal screens and menu buttons,
allows one to create a Project Data Set (PDS). The PDS contains all information required,
plus any attachments. The Microsoft Excel import spreadsheet is an optional part of the
ERT. You can use it to enter manual source test data and subsequently import that data into
the ERT.

ERT Application

The ERT Application is a Microsoft Access Database. To run the ERT, you must have
Microsoft Access 2010, 2013, 2016 or the runtime version of Microsoft Access. The runtime
version is available for free from the Microsoft Access Download Center. Before running
the ERT for the first time, please refer to Chapter 3: Getting Started for instructions.

Project Data Set

The Project Data Set (PDS) is a Microsoft Access Database file generated by the ERT
Application which, depending on the stage of completion, may contain the Test Plan, Test
Plan Review (by the Regulatory Agency), Test Report Data and/or Test Report Assessment
(by the Regulatory Agency). This is the file that will be exchanged between the source test
contractor, the client and the state agency, and the EPA. Each PDS contains information for
test reports from one emissions source. When you create a new PDS, you are prompted for a
file name for the PDS that is created. The file is created automatically in a "ProjectData"
directory by the ERT. You may change the location of the "ProjectData" directory if you
wish. The last PDS used is remembered by the ERT when restarted. There is no limit on the
number of PDS files, but only one PDS can be opened at a time.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-1

-------
Excel Spreadsheets

The Excel spreadsheet can be used as an option for entering test data into the ERT. There
are three template spreadsheets available that are prepared for import. Manual and
isokinetic test run data, Method 30B data and instrumental data can be added to the
appropriate spreadsheet and then imported into the ERT. Users have the option of
incorporating these spreadsheets into their legacy spreadsheets and then importing the data
into the ERT.

Basic Workflow

The basic work flow is as follows (though other work flows are possible):

• Source Test Owner

Creates a partial test plan with basic information on facility and process requiring

testing and target analytes to be included.

Emails the ERT PDS to source Test Company for completion.

• Source or Testing Company

Creates the test plan/report [Note: The test plan is part of the test report. You have
the option to submit a test plan electronically to the regulatory agency before
testing].

Creates the ERT Submission Package File.

Submits the ERT Submission Package File to regulatory agency.

• Regulatory Agency

Reviews test plan, if submitted, communicates with source/testing company, as
necessary.

Approves test plan or marks areas where more information is needed.

• Source or Testing Company

Updates the test plan, if requested by the regulatory agency, creates new ERT
Submission Package File, and resubmits to the agency.

If approved by regulatory agency, performs testing.

Enters run data into spreadsheet and imports into the ERT or directly enters data
into the ERT.

Enters lab data into the ERT.

QA check data entered into the ERT.

Attaches supporting documentation.

Creates the "ERT Submission Package" file.

Submits the "ERT Submission Package" file to Regulatory Agency or EPA.

• Regulatory Agency

Reviews test report.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-2

-------
Chapter 2: Before You Begin

Here are some tips to help complete each section of the ERT.

Test Plan

Completing the test plan accomplishes two interrelated processes in the ERT. First, it is the
vehicle used to inform all the parties associated with the planned test program of the needed
details about the specific process unit to be tested, the test matrix (test methods, number of
runs, duration of runs, analytical finish, etc.), the process information to be collected, the
QA/QC activities, and the safety requirements. Second, the test plan provides the
foundation for the test report since the information that is in the test plan is used in some
aspect of a comprehensive test report.

Although, the operating permit is not needed to input the minimum information required to
complete a test plan in the ERT, it is recommended that a copy of the operating permit for
the affected source be available. The permit will provide most of the site identification
information needed for the ERT.

Test location information, process descriptions, air pollution control device information and
parameter monitoring information are the same as normally required for test plans (see EPA
Emissions Measurement Center Guideline Document 42, Preparation and Review of Site
Specific Test Plans).

The ERT requires detailed process information. This information is important in properly
characterizing the emission process and is necessary for EPA to develop and update its
emissions factors (EF) database. EF data is typically represented as a mass rate of emissions
per process parameter (i.e. lb pollutant/ton of product made). The process data are needed to
determine the value of the denominator.

Required facility and process information includes, but is not limited to:

• Process rate information,

• Source Classification Code (SCC) Facility Registration Number, and,

• Air Pollution Control Device (APCD) operating parameters.

Entering Sampling Data

The ERT allows entering run field data two ways:

1. Entering data into the ERT spreadsheet and then importing the data into the ERT.

2. Entering the data directly into the ERT.

The spreadsheet option is provided for users that are more comfortable using spreadsheets.
The three ERT spreadsheet templates provided on the ERT website may also be incorporated
into users' proprietary field data spreadsheets. Users can link cells from their spreadsheets to

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-3

-------
the cells in the ERT spreadsheet templates. This allows for quicker data entry into the ERT
and reduces the likelihood of key punch errors. There are 3 import spreadsheets available:

1.	ERT_Manual_Methods_DE_Template-Empty.xltm (Isokinetic or manual methods)

2.	ERT_Manual_Methods_DE_30B_Template-Empty.xltm (Method 30B data)

3.	ERTInstrumentalTemplate-Empty.xltm (Instrumental methods-Method 3 A, 6C, 7E, 10 or
25A.)

The ERT has been designed to accept data for most of the individual test methods
commonly used today. Although we recognize that some test methods may be combined to
minimize the number of sample trains in operation (Method 5/26A, Method 29 and Method
5/202), ERT has not been set up to include all possible combinations. Therefore, if a single
train is used for multiple methods which the ERT is not currently capable of combining
(example: Method 5 and Method 8), data for each method must be added to the ERT
separately.

To avoid the need to enter the same run data multiple times, we recommend the use of the
included Excel spreadsheet and importing the data into each method, as appropriate.

At this time, the instrumental test data can be entered by hand or by import of the
spreadsheet. If the Instrumental Template is used, the gas cylinder information tab will import
the information into the ERT under item 16 of the 'Test Plan" tab.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-4

-------
Chapter 3: Getting Started

Verify that you have a Version of Microsoft Access that will Run the ERT

If you have Microsoft Access version 2007:

Verify that you have at least Service Pack 2 installed. Open Microsoft Access, click on
the MS circle in the upper left corner of the Access window, click on "Access Options''
at the bottom of the window, click on "Resources" in the left column. At the bottom of
the window just below the text "about Microsoft Office Access 2007" the software
(Microsoft Office Access 2007) and the Service Pack level is identified. If Service
Pack 2 is installed, the text "SP2 MSO" will be between two sets of numbers that are in
parentheses. If you do not have Service Pack 2 installed, click on "Check for Updates"
and follow the directions to install the updates from Microsoft. Many corporate
computers do not allow users to install software and you will need to contact your
information technology center and have them update your software.

If you have Microsoft Access version 2010, 2013, or 2016: Any Service Pack level is
acceptable in order to run the ERT Application.

If you do NOT have Microsoft Access:

You will need to download and install the runtime version of Microsoft Access from
the Microsoft Access Download Center. A link to the download center is provided on
the EPA ERT website. Please download a version that is the version of office you
have installed on your computer.

MS Access 2010 Runtime.

MS Access 2013 Runtime.

MS Access 2016 Runtime.

After installing the Runtime version of Microsoft Access, follow the instructions below
to install and run the ERT.

If you have Windows 10, only 1 Office version can be on the computer. The operating
system is incompatible with two versions of the same program. For instance, if a computer
has Access 2010 and 2013 on it, they will not work and one will need to be removed.

Downloading and Installing the ERT

The EPA Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) Webpase contains the latest versions of the ERT,
the spreadsheet templates, the user's guide, and example data sets.

Once you've determined that you are running a version of MS Access which is capable of
running the ERT Application, follow these two steps.

1. Download the latest version of the program application. This file includes the latest
version of the ERT and the user's guide.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-5

-------
2. To run the ERT, right click on the downloaded zip file and select "Open". Select a
destination for the extracted files. Go to the destination folder and double click on
ERTv6.accdb file. It is recommended that the ERT program file and the data set files
be located on a local drive (ie. C: or desktop). Some functionality of the ERT is lost
across servers or external drivers.

Example Data

The EPA's website also contains example data for use with the ERT. Download the files
from the ERT Project Data Set example link. This file includes an example Project Data Set
(PDS) and the associated spreadsheet. Unzip the files to your hard drive and use the ERT to
select the ERTTEST-PDS.accdb file. See the Selecting a Project Data Set section for more
information on selecting a PDS.

Starting the ERT

To start the ERT, double click ERTv6.accdb file from the location where you've installed
the ERT application.

Depending on how your version of Access is configured, you may see a "Security Warning"
window (as shown below) when you try to start the ERT.

When the ERT is first opened, the following screenshot may be seen (Figure 1):

l»

3M£ CREATE EXTERNAL DATA DATABASE TOOLS
&Cut W ASoenOidQ T: Seteeacw-

%jCopjr iiDesrcndmg TjAefcanced"

I SECURITY WARNING Some Active content rus been dnabted 4

"'-i •—

« u* ¦ ° --;!1I33I

Figure 1 - Security Warning

Select "Stop all Macros" and the red X in the upper right-hand comer of the Macro Single
Step box. Once the Macro box is closed, enable all macros in the yellow Security Warning
banner. This should enable the program to run. Once continue is selected, the ERT - Main
Menu will be displayed (Figure 2).

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-6

-------
File

Home Create

3® D Ed

View

Views Clipboard fyl

|=H frmMainMenu

ERTv6 3/24/2021

Lowe, Theresa LT

Fitter

External Data

zi Ascending

Database Tools

Help p Tell me what you want to do
v n

Refresh
All-

Find

B I U *= «e | nr - §§ -
A - >y - - | =: p ® | 0
Text Formatting

ERT - Main Menu

Setup / Test Plan

Test Plan

ProcessInfb

Locations/Methods

Tester DQ Assessment

Attachments

Completeness Check

Report Verification

Regulatory Agency
Review

Test Plan Review

Regulatory Field
Observation Documentation

Regulatory Assessment of
Supporting Documentation

Emissions Results

Comprehensive Regulatory
Test Assessment

Printed Reports

Select Report / Data
Table

Administration

Wood Heaters

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Select Project Data Set

Create New Project Data Set

Save Project Data Set As

Compact Project Data Set

Current Project
Data Set:

CiVJsers^owe^esktop^rojectDatatetack test.accdb - Date Created: 2/11/2020

Project Submittal History:

Create ERT Submission Package File

-------
ERT's file can be emailed through many corporate, commercial, state and Federal email
systems.

You can select, create, save as, or compact a PDS from the "ERTMain Menu" (Figure 3).
The first time you create a PDS, you will select "Create New Project Data Set" (Figure 4)
Thereafter, you can select the project data set and click on "Save Project Data Set As" to
save the entire PDS with another name or to save only the test plan part of the first data set
as a template.

Create New Project Data Set

[ m Mew Project Data Set Information - = x 1

Project Data Set Folder:

| C: \D e vapps\E R T \ProjectD ata\

Project Data Set File Name:

Create New Project Data Set

| Close without creating Project Data Set ]

Figure 4 - Creating a Project Data Set

• Click "Create New Project Data Set" from the "Project Data Set" area of the ERT

main menu.

• Browse for the location of the folder to store the PDS or let it stay in the default folder.

• Enter a name for the PDS file in the "Project Data Set File Name"box.

• Click "Create New Project Data Set" to create a PDS with the name you entered in the
folder you created.

Select Project Data Set

• Click "Select Project Data Set" from the project data set area of the ERT Main Menu.
A "Browse" menu like shown in Figure 5 will appear.

• Select the PDS from the default folder (ProjectData) or browse to the folder containing
the desired PDS and select the file and click "Open".

Save Project Data Set As

Source tests for similar sources may contain some of the same information. To keep from
having to enter the same information for similar tests, the ERT can save the currently
selected PDS as a template. When this happens, a new PDS is created with the current test
plan information saved and all the other data deleted. However, the attachments are not deleted
and will need to be removed. The new template PDS can then is used as a starting point for a
similar source test. The ERT also can save all of current PDS data into a new PDS.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-8

-------
Ql S'O-.SC

UtgmoE 1

Hr* FFT > ?rnjp.rin^»

V Cj

Sfvitrh PVnj*rlD«M

New/tocer

TMrirg
l|cFPA
3 Mm
[» Wrfe!)!

a -Ms k

4 3UOtj*rti
¦ Dafctop

[FT initTjue
Ftf c«i an ;l<
j Nr> EHT

:'Tsi«tDttl
[_, PrcjerlOala

Kami

~ tsstaicdb

Q- Wri RATA ddn 12-21.^l!±j

JatemsdCiK

f/P<

ii'iii'jli." 4>iS PM Microsoft Access .
i^fSEI J: M PU Mkrouifi Aituv,.

v <

Fik iirnii':

V | PlUjKil Prlrf 5vl dl

Circei

Oper

Scfcscl Prcf-i:: Cutu £ct

G:ulc New Project Cola fc:

iuc Prejac. Duta £ei Aj

Gju-oJ 1b(eci CtUi Set

Ojrtrt Pf Hect

Chita "f 1:

tal Pllipwi HuU **: 1 E« l" J -1H H r HY. '*1 U i1- ! f L-» ¦*' 1 bf »kll^ ttlP bjllOtlH (fixilV

Project Sutnntttal IfcUiry:

CntSK 3iX iter ss cr 3sas#: Us

Figure 5 - Select Project Data Set Browse Window

Click "Save Project Data Set As" from the ERT main menu. The window shown
in Figure 6 will appear.

Click "Yes" to save the current PDS as a Template (saving test plan data only).
Click "No" to save the current PDS (saving all data).

Click "Cancel" to cancel the operation.

Microsoft Office Access

Save this Project Data 5et as a Template? A Template saves only the Test Plan information.

Yes

][

Cancel

Figure 6 - Save Project Data Set as Template

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-9

-------
Chapter 4: Create Test Plan

ERTv6 3/24/2021

Lowe, Theresa LT

File Home Create

1A1 X

View
Views

Clipboard rsl

["§] frmMainMenu X

External Data Database Tools

Ji Ascending Tf -
^ lending Tg-

g.temoveSort T

Sort & Filter

Refresh
All" X I

i=i New
J! Save

Help p Tell me what you want to do
ab

HI-

Find

ERT - Main Menu

B I U

A - *y -

~ ¦

Text Formatting

Setup / Test Plan

Test Plan

Quick Jumps

see

Process Info

Locations/Methods

Completeness Check

Report Verificatit

Regulatory Agency
Review

Regulatory Field
Observation Documentatji

Regulatory Assessment of
Supporting Documentation

Comprehensive Regulatory
Test Assessment

Printed Reports

: Report f
Table

Administration

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Select Project Data Set Create New Project Data Set

Save Project Data Set As

Compact Project Data Set

Current Project
Data Set:

C:\jJsers\tiowepesktopV^Jew ERT\projectData\test.accdb - Date Created: 3/17/2021

Project Submittal History:

Create ERT Submission Package File

SubmitDate ^ SubmittedTo ~ SubmittedFr

Record: M « |1 of 1 Hi Search

Pkg Name

Figure 7 - ERT Main Menu

The ERT Main Menu shows the functional areas (Figure 7).

Test plan data needs to be entered before the rest of the ERT can be accessed

• "Setup / Test Plan" with "Quick Jumps"

• "Test Data"

• "Regulatory Agency Review"

• "Printed Reports"

• "Administration"

• "Project Data Set"

• "Project Submittal History"

If you are working with a new (empty) project data set (PDS) you will only be able to access
the "Setup /Test Plan" functions of the ERT. After you have completed entering the setup
information, you will be able to access the other menu items. If you have already entered

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-10

-------
data into a PDS (or will be working with the example dataset provided on the website) and it
has not already loaded, click the "Select Project Data Set" button and follow the file select
dialog instructions.

Navigating and Using the Tool

Pal Test Plan — ~ X

Open Expanded

8/24/2020

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.

rQ) Facility Name:

|facility name

Address: *

address

City: *

City

State/Zip:"

AL [v] 36446-

County: »¦

Clarke Co

Contact:
Phone: *
Fax:

email: *

contact name

(555) 555-5555

email@email.com

AFS Number:

Industry
NAICS:

FRS: *

State ID:

©Latitude:
Longitude:

321113

111111111111

Search on the Web

Search on the Web i

102-S003

31.790587

-87.724537

) Testing Company:* [Testing Company
Address:*

City: *
State/Zip:

Contact: *
Phone: *
Fax:
email:

Address

City

AL [£] J36575-

tester

(222) 222-2222

(333) 333-3333

email@email.com

Testing Company Project Number:

[222222

Attach Field documentation of
competence as an AETB and QI for
stationary source testing,

(* required fields)

Figure 8 - Test Plan Facility/Tester Tab

Data Entry Process

To begin the data entry process, click "Test Plan" in the "Setup / Test Plan" column on the
ERT main menu. The screen shown in Figure 8 will appear. This screen contains a series of
data entry tabs that cover the information required for a test plan/test report. [Recall a test plan
is not required by the EPA to be submitted. However, a state air agency may require/request
that it be sent to them. Keep in mind, these fields should be filled in before starting to enter
field data collected by stack testing.]

There are 10 tabs or sections in the test plan module: "Facility/Tester," "Permit/SCC,"
"Regulations," "Process/APCD," "Locations/Methods," "Methods cont.,"
"Audit/Calibrations," "Schedule," "Signatures," and "Attachments."

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-11

-------
Requested Information

The information requested has been selected to adequately characterize a facility, the
regulatory use of the data, and what tests are to be performed. In general, providing this
information will give the test plan reviewer enough information to evaluate the test plan
without needing additional information. However, it is not possible to create a generic list of
information that includes all the information for all test plan scenarios. Use comments and
attachments to provide information in the test plan to facilitate review whenever possible.
Complete all sections to speed up the test plan review and approval process. You may access
specific sections of the test plan data entry form by clicking the other control buttons on the
ERT main menu (e.g. "Locations/Methods").

You must complete the red asterisk data fields in the test plan to be able to submit the ERT
file through CDX/CEDRI.

Screen Navigation

Move from one section to the next by clicking the "Next Page" button located in the bottom
right corner of the screen or by clicking on the desired tab of the data entry form. You will
generally have two options for entering data in the form, either typing in the spaces provided
or using the copy and paste method to extract information from other electronic documents.

Screen Help Tips

Moving the cursor over the blue circled question mark displays a "pop up" help tip window
that provides a detailed description of what is needed for that field.

Enter information about the facility and the testing company. The fields are as follows:

Test Plan Tabs

Facility/Tester Tab

Facility Name:*

The public or commercial name of the facility site (i.e., the full name
that commonly appears on invoices, signs, or other business
documents).

Address: *

The address that describes the physical (geographical) location of the
front door or main entrance of a facility site, including urban-style
street address or rural address.

City: *

The city in which the facility resides.

State/Zip: *

The two-letter state and mailing zip code in which the facility resides.
Use the drop-down menu to select the two-letter postal code for the
State.

County: *

The county or parish in which the facility is located. Use the drop-
down menu to select the county. These will be available after the
postal code for the State is selected. One use of this information is a
search criterion to identify a facility which is in the regulatory
jurisdiction of a local or tribal agency.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-12

-------
Contact: * The person with knowledge of the facility's operations during the test

program who can assist reviewers of the test plan or test report if they
have questions.

Phone: * The phone number of the contact or the facility.

Fax: The facsimile number of the facility through which the contact can

assist the reviewers (optional).

Email: * A working email address of the contact which can be used to assist

the reviewers.

AFS Number: EPA AIRS Facility System (AFS) number.

Industry NAICS: North American Industry Classification System.

FRS: * EPA Facility Registry System number (FRS). A web link to

EPA's Envirofacts web page is provided should you not know the
FRS number. Several search methods are available to locate the
facility and obtain the FRS number and other information on the
facility.

State ID: The state identification number as provided by a state air pollution

control agency.

Latitude: Latitude of emission release point (typically the stack), with a

minimum of 5 decimal places.

Longitude: Longitude of emission release point (typically the stack), with a

minimum of 5 decimal places.

Testing Company: * The public or commercial name that commonly appears on invoices,

signs or other business documents. A button is adjacent to the data
entry field to attach a copy of certification documentation including
that the testing firm qualifies as an AETB as described in ASTM
D7036-12 Standard Practicefor Competence of Air Emission Testing
Bodies.

The standard address used to send mail to an individual with the
source test company.

The state in which the source test company resides.

The two-letter state and mailing zip code of the source test
company.

The person with knowledge of the design and conduct of the source
test program. A button is adjacent to the data entry field to attach a
copy of certification documentation including that the test team

Address: *

City: *
State/Zip: *

Contact: *

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-13

-------
lead is a Qualified Individual as described in ASTM D7036-12
Standard Practice for Competence of Air Emission Testing Bodies.

Phone:

The phone number of the source test company through which the
contact can assist thereviewers.

Fax:

Email:

The facsimile number of the source test company through which
the contact can assist the reviewers (optional).

A working email address through which the contact can assist the
reviewers.

Project Number:

The assigned project number for the testing project by the test
company (optional).

indicate required fields

Note: If you have access to the Internet, clicking on "Search on the Web" link will connect to a
website that allow you to search for your NAICS or FRS number.

Permit/SCC Tab

F-g] Test Plan

ERT Package
Name:

Icompany

Test Plan Date:

8/24/2020

- ~
Open Expanded

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC LocationsyMethods Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.

Air Permit Number:

111111

Permitted State Source ID/Name: |
Permitted Maximum Process Rate:
Maximum Normal Operation Process Rate:
Target Process Rate for Testing:
Operational Hours Per Year:

Source Classification Code:

|98.5 MMBtu/hr Wood-fired Boiler
|98.5 mmbtu/hr
||98.5 mmbtu/hr
[|98.5 mmbtu/hr
8760

Select SCC from list
SCC/Desc.: * 110200901

External Combustion - Industrial: Boilers - Wood/Bark Waste - Bark-fired
Boiler

Target Parameter: |Heat Input

Process Rate: |Million Btus/million BTU i
Pollutant Unit of Measure: |Lb/million BTU using 02

Target Parameter
Description (if
needed ):

Previous Page Next Page

(* required fields)

Figure 9 - Test Plan Permit/SCC Tab
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-14

-------
The "Permit/SCC tab screen (Figure 9) is where permit information is inputted, including
process rate information. Also, this is where the Source Classification Code (SCC) is
selected by clicking on the "Select SCC from list" button. SCCs are 8-digit codes that
represent a specific emission process, oftentimes for a specific industry. If you do not know
the correct SCC, source descriptions in the relevant section of AP-42 may provide you the
code or part of the code otherwise you should contact the facility. It is very important to
select the proper SCC for the emission process you've tested.

The fields on this tab are described as follows:
Air Permit Number:

Permitted State Source ID/ Name:

Permitted Maximum Process Rate:

State or Federal Permit Number.

Many state and local agencies have alphanumeric
identifiers for individual process operating units with
an associated name describing the unit. If the
regulatory agency to which this test will be sent has a
specific identifier for the unit tested, enter it in this
location.

Rate as listed in Title V or state permit.

Maximum Normal Operation Process Rate: Rate as listed in Title V or state permit.

Target Process Rate for Testing: Value of the target process rate for the test program.

Operational Hours Per Year:
SCC/Desc:

Target Parameter:

Process Rate:

Pollutant Unit of Measure:

Normal hours the facility operates in a year.

The Source Classification Code (SCC) is selected
through the use of the "Select SCC from list" button.
Yellow fields are copied from another form (Figure
10 - Selecting SCC) and cannot be edited from the
yellow highlighted field.

For most SCC's, this field is automatically filled
based on the SCC selected. For those SCC's without
an established target process parameter, this will be a
user established parameter.

The rate units used to quantify the feed or output
level of the target parameter for the source process

The unit of measure for the target pollutants
measured during the test. The time units in the
denominator for the process rate and the pollutant
unit of measure must be the same. Additional
pollutant units of measure may be selected in
"Locations/Methods" tab.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-15

-------
Target Parameter Description:

Description of the identified target parameter and
associated process rate and pollutant unit of
measure if the text used in the fields requires
clarification.

3 Select SCC

SCC | Units | Measure | Materials | Action

10200104 | Lb | Tons | Anthracite ] Burned

Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4

External Combustion Boilers

Industrial

Anthracite Coal

Traveling Grate (Overfeed) Stoker

v Select Time Unit (will be the same for
Process Rate and Compound Units)

Figure 10 - Selecting SCC

Note: The fields with yellow background are filled in automatically when the SCC is selected from
the series of dropdown lists.

While many SCCs have one or more established sets of emissions units and units for
quantifying the process rate, there are also many which do not have a set of units for process
rates. Figure 11 shows a short list of SCCs where there are four SCCs with established units
for the process rate and four SCCs where there are no established units to measure the
process rate.

Description

SCCS

UNrr

MEASURE

MATERIAL

ACTION H

Bleaching

30504160

Caldning, calciner NEC

30504149

Calcining, flash calciner

30504142

Tons

Clay

Produced

Calcining, multiple hearth furnace

30504141

Tons

Clay

Produced

Calcining, rotary calciner

30504140

Tons

Clay

Produced

Drying, apron dryer

30504132

Tons

Clay

Produced

Drying, dryer NEC

30504139

Drying, rotary dryer

30504130

Figure 11 - SCC selection menu with no established process units

When a user selects one of the SCCs where there is no established set of units for the
process rate, the selection of one of these SCCs will initiate a sub menu shown in Figure 12
which allows the user to establish a set of units for documenting the process rate variable to
associate with the measured emissions.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-16

-------
Eg] Source Classification Code Information

The SCC you selected does not have default values for the Emission Factor. Please select
from the pick lists or enter this information below.

Pollutant Unit: Lb

Emission factor unit numerator; units associated with pollutant emitted (as in "LB" in "LB of NOx
per tons of coal burned")

Measure: jTons

Emission factor unit denominator; units associated with material processed (as in "TONS" in "Lb
of NOx per TONS of coal burned")

Material: v

Material processed (as in "COAL" in "Lb of NOx per tons of COAL burned")

Action:

Action performed on the material (as in "BURNED" in "Lb of NOx per tons of coal BURNED")
NOTE: The Material and the Action become the Target Parameter (as in "Coal Burned")

OK I f Cancel I

Figure 12 - Source Classification Code information when no units are available

The process variable is divided into four parameters.

• The first parameter is the units used to measure the pollutants. A default of pounds
(Lb) is pre-populated in the ' Pollutant Unit" field. Other units may be selected
either from the dro- down list or users may add emissions units. Users should limit
their selection to units which are available as a rate (i.e. /hr or /minute) in the "Add
Emissions/Concentrations" area of the "Locations/Methods" tab (Item 2b).

• The second parameter is "Measure" which is the units used to measure the
process rate. Several existing units for measurement are available and include but
not limited to tons, megawatt-hour, and pounds. Additional units of measurement
may be added should the required measurement units not be in the list.

• The third parameter is "Material" The parameter material is the designation of
what material is measured as an indicator of the process rate. As with "Measure"
many items are available in the drop-down list of existing materials. Also, the user
may add a parameter describing the material used to describe the process rate.

• Lastly, "Action" is used to describe what action is used to describe the measured
material. The drop-down list includes many existing actions that have been used to
describe other process rates. If the user cannot find a suitable action to describe the
process rate measurement, an additional action may be added.

Upon completion of the selection of the pollutant unit, measure, material and action,
clicking on "OK" will return you to the SCC selection list where the time unit for measuring
the process rate should be selected. The default time unit is hour but others may be selected
from the drop-down list. The time unit must be the same as the time unit used to measure the
pollutant. Clicking on "OK" will return you to the tab for the entry of "Permit/SCC
information. You will notice that the fields ' Target Parameter," ' Process Rate" and
"Pollutant Unit of Measure" will have the items that were selected in the emissions factor
selection screen. You may provide more detail on the target parameter used to describe the
process rate if needed .

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-17

-------
Locations/Methods Tab

£§] Test Plan

Test Plan Title: ^Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2

Test Plan Date:

| Add Location | [ Attach File |

} 1. Please enter sampling location information, (all dimensions in inches)

(Required before test data entry)

»(Note: UpStreamDist = Distance from upstream disturbance; DwnStreamDist = Distance from downstream disturbance) , —

Add Target

2a. Please provide the following information for each test parameter. (Required before test data entry] | Parameters

stack
1 stack
1 stack
1 stack
1 stack
1 stack
1 stack
stack

Target Parameter

Cadmium

Chromium

Lead

Manganese

Nickel
Silver
Zinc

Test Method
Method 29

Method 29
Method 29
Method 29
Method 29
Method 29
Method 29
Method 29

NumTest Runs » Test Run Duration -

Total organic compounds (T Method 25A
I Mercury I Method 30B

I Mercury | Method 30B

Record: H 1 of 11 ~ M | , | Search

2b. Please select the Emissions Units of Measure for each location.

Add Emissions/Concentrations

Local - Method
stack Method 25A

| stack j Method 25A

Units of Measure - Corrected Analyte . Corrected % . Process Rate, Parameter

| Previous Page | | Next Page |

Figure 13 - Test Plan Location Methods Tab

You can input sampling locations and sampling methods using this screen (Figure 13).

1. Please enter sampling location information (all dimensions in inches): Section 1 is where
sampling locationinformation is entered. For existing test locations, you can click in the
Location column which will open the "Test Location Information " screen. You must click on
the "Add Location" for a new location. The different locations must have a unique name
which must be entered before the remaining fields become activated. Multiple sampling
locations may be provided for emissions sources requiring inlet and outlet testing, for
different operating conditions or with multiple emissions locations. The ERT does not
currently sum or average emissions from multiple locations. As a result, for sources with
multiple inlets or outlet locations, testers are required to calculate the sum or average of these
multiple stacks and provide the resulting information in the "Tester DQ Assessment" section.

When you click "Add Location," you'll see a window like that shown in Figure 14 - Test
Location Information. Enter a unique location name. Then select either inlet or outlet. All
dimensions should be entered in inches. If a "Round Duct Diam" is entered, the "Duct
Length" and "Duct Width" fields will be inactivated. If "Duct Length" and "Duct Width"
values are entered, the"Equivalent Diameter" will be calculated automatically.

Enter the "Up Stream Distance from Disturbance" (Distance A- Fig 1-1, Reference Method
1 (RM1)) and "Down Stream Distance fromDisturbance" (Distance B -Fig 1-1, RM1) and
click on the "Calc Points" button. The number of " Total Traverse Points" required by RM 1
will be automatically calculated. You may change the number in the"Total Traverse Points"
field to reflect the proposed or actual number of traverse points.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-18

-------
^g| Test Plan

Open Expandei

ERT Package 1 Example
Name: ^

Test Plan Date: 12/28/2015

Facility/Tester | Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations ! Process/APCD

J Methods cont. j Audit/Calibrations | Schedule j Reviewers j

Attach.

@1. Please enter sampling location information, (all dimensions in inches)

(Required before test data entry)

Location: (click to view/edit)

lnlet/0utl w Total Trave » Ports » Round Duct Diam » Duct Le » DuctWid » Equivalent I »¦ Do*

Boiler 1

Outlet 8 24

((Note: UpStreamDist = Distance from up
(Distance B - Fig 1-1, RM1))
2a. Please provide the followi

Location -,\

Test I

Boiler 1

Method

Boiler 1

Method

Boiler 1

Method

Boiler 1

Method

Boiler 1

Method

Boiler 1

PSTCO

Boiler 1

PSTNO

Boiler 1

PST02

Boiler 1

PSTSO

Record: H 1 of 9 ~

Please select the E

missioi

Local Method

Unit

Boiler 1 Method 10

Ib/hr

Boiler 1 Method 10

Ib/milli

Boiler 1 Method 10

ppm

Boiler 1 Method 3A 02

perce

Boiler 1 Method 6C

Ib/milli

Boiler 1 Method 6C

ppm

Rnfler 1 Method. ZF

Ih/milli

Record: H 1 of 14 ~ M

Test Location Information

(all dimensions are in inches]

Location: Boiler 1

Inlet/Outlet: Outlet [T]

Round Duct Diam.:
Duct Length:
Duct Width:
Equivalent Diameter.:

DownStream Distance from
Disturbance (Distance B):
UpStream Distance from Disturbance):
Total Traverse Points: 8
Ports:

For Method 1a
Up Stream Pt. Loc. (MIA):
Dwn Stream Pt. Loc. (M1A):

Assumed Stack 02 X
Assumed Moisture X
Temp (F)
ACFM

I 347]

I 61

Calc. Points |

NonTsokinetic NoQ iQt
T raverse:

Emissions are
Controlled **

"arget
neters

Figure 14 - Test Location Information Panel

Enter the values for percent oxygen, percent moisture, stack temperature and gas flow that
you expect to exist during the emissions test in the far-right data fields. Select "Fes" in the
LNon-Isokinetic Traverse" field if this is an instrumental test method (such as Method 10,
7E, 6C or 25A). Select "No" if this is an isokinetic or manual extractive test method which
Particulate Traverse or a traverse which requires i sokinetic sampling. Check the box if a
control device is present prior to the test location.

If Method la is being used, enter the port location measured in inches for Up Stream Pt. Loc.
(MIA)" and Down Stream Pt. Loc. (MIA)".

The fields are described as follows:

Location:

Enter a unique sampling location name, such as
inlet stack, ESP inlet, scrubber outlet, etc.

Inlet/Outlet:

Round Duct Diam.:

Duct Length:

Inlet or outlet flow direction.

Round duct diameter (in inches). The diameter of the
sampling location, cross-section if round. Use/leave as
zero (0) if the location is rectangular.

Duct length or depth measured in inches. If the
sampling location is rectangular, input the length or

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-19

-------
Duct Width:

Equivalent Diameter:

Up Stream Distance from Disturbance:
Down StreamDistance from Disturbance:
Total Traverse Points:

Ports:

Assumed Stack O2 %:

Assumed Moisture %:

Temp (F):

ACFM:

Non- Particulate Traverse:

Emissions are Controlled:

Up Stream Port Location:

Down Stream Port Location

depth of the duct. Use/leave as zero (0) if the
location is circular or round.

Duct width measured in inches. If the sampling
location is rectangular, input the width of the duct.
Use/leave as zero (0) if the location is circular or
round.

Equivalent diameter of a rectangular duct as
calculated per Method 1. This value is calculated
from the duct dimensions.

Measurement site is upstream from flow disturbance
(Distance A).

Measurement site is downstream from flow
disturbance (Distance B).

Total number of sampling or traverse points. This
value is calculated.

Number of access or sampling ports used for testing.

Anticipated oxygen content of the stack gas in
percent

Anticipated moisture content of the stack gas in
percent

Anticipated temperature of the stack gas in degrees
Fahrenheit

Anticipated flow rate of the stack gas in actual cubic
feet per minute

Selection of Yes/No of whether method is a
particulate or non-particulate traverse.

Check box for Controlled device was present.

For Method la only. Location of disturbance
upstream measured in inches.

or Method la only. Location of disturbance
downstream measured in inches.

2a. Please provide the following information for each test parameter: Section 2a is where the
test methods, target pollutants and test parameters for each test location. To add test methods

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-20

-------
and target parameters to a test location, click the "Add Target Parameters" button to select a
location, method and compound, as seen in Figure 15 - Add Target Parameters. Once there,
you'll see Figure 16 - Select Method and Compounds for Location. You can either select a
method directly from the drop-down list or click "[select method by compound]".

OfNote: UpStreamDist = Distance from upstream disturbance; DwnStreamDist = Distance from downstream disturbance) , —

Add Target

2a. Please provide the following information for each test parameter. (Required before test data entry] | Parameters

Location

Target Parameter

Test Method

Num Test Runs »

Test Run Duration »

Comments

Inlet

Arsenic

Method 29

Inlet

Cadmium

Method 29

stack

Chromium

Method 29

stack

Lead

Method 29

stack

Manganese

Method 29

stack

Nickel

Method 29

stack

Silver

Method 29

stack

Zinc

Method 29

stack

Total organic compounds (T

Method 25A

stack

Mercury

Method 30B

Inlet

Mercury

Method 30B

Figure 15 - Add Target Parameters

l=H Select Method and Compounds for Location

Select Location:

Select Location. Method, and Compounds

Number of Test Runs: Test Run Duration (rnins):

Inlet

Select Method:
[Method 29

(select method
by compound)

I | Select from All Compounds
Available Compounds: 17

Antimony

Cobalt

Filterable Particulate

Selenium

Silver

Phosphorus [yellow or white)

Zinc

Copper

Chromium 1

Mercury

Barium

Lead

Thallium

Magnesium

Nickel

Hold Ctrl or Shift to select
multiple records

Selected Compounds:

Exit

Save Selected Items

Figure 16 - Select Location, Method and Compounds

Once the method has been selected11 Available Compounds'' box will automatically
populate, as in screen. You must move the compounds you are measuring to the "Selected
Compounds" window on the right. To do so use the arrow buttons:

o Select one or more of the available compounds or selected compounds. To select

multiple compounds, hold the "CtrF key and click other compounds,
o Available or selected compounds are moved using one of the four buttons between
the two windows.

¦ The ">" arrow shifts the selected compound(s) to the right.

¦ The "»" arrow shifts all the compounds to the right.

* The "«:" shifts all the compounds listed in the "Selected Compounds" box to
the left.

¦ The "<" shifts only selected compounds to the left.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-21

-------
You must enter the number of test runs and the duration of the test runs. If you have selected
one of the Performance Specifications, you can enter a "1" into the number of runs and the
total duration of the tests in the test run duration. In addition, you must also create an entry
for the reference test method(s) at the same location which will be used to evaluate relative
accuracy of the CEM by the performance specification. You should enter the expected total
test runs required for the RATA and the individual run durations.

3 Select Method and Compounds for Location

Select Location. Method, and Compounds

Select Location:
Main Stack v

Select Method:
Method 29

(select method
by compound)

Number of Test Runs:

Run Duration (rnins):

I | Select from All Compounds

F§l Determine Method by Selecting Compound

Select Compound to Determine Method: Method Selected:

Copper
Custom
DeCB

Dibenzo(a,h) Anthracene"
Filterable Particulate
Filterable Particulate
Filterable Particulate
Filterable Particulate
Filterable Particulate
Filterable Particulate
Filterable PM10

7440-50-8 Method 29 Metals Emissions from Stationary Sources

Custom Custom Select to enter custom method

2051-24-3 Method 23 Dioxin and Furan (02/91FR Copy).

53-70-3 Method 23 Dioxin and Furan (02/91 FR Copy).

Filterable Part Method 26 Hydrogen Chloride, Halides, Halogens

Filterable Part Method 29 Metals Emissions from Stationary Sources

Filterable Part Method 17/202 Combination of Methods 17 and 202

Filterable Part Method 5 Particulate Matter(PM)

Filterable Part Method 17 In-Stack Particulate (PM)

Filterable Part Method 5/202 Combination of Methods 5 and 202

Filterable PM 1 Method 201A PM 10 (In-stack, CRS)

Figure 17 - Deternine Method by Selecting Compound

Rather than selecting the test method as described above, you may select the method from a
list of compounds. By clicking the button "(select method by compound)," a window like
the one shown in Figure 17 - Determine Method by Selecting Compound is available.
Scrolling down this list presents in alphabetical order all of the available pollutants, the test
methods which may be used to measure these pollutants and a short descriptor of the test
method. Selecting the pollutant and test method line will populate the method in the
"Method Selected' field. Clicking in the "'Use Selected Method' block will place the test
method in the "Select Method' field. You will need to reselect the compound and any
additional compounds from the available list as described above.

To complete the addition of a test method for the test location, you must enter the number of
test runs which you propose and the proposed duration of the test runs. Clicking on "Save
Selected Items" will populate the fields in item 2a. Clicking on "Exit" will return to item 2a
without populating the fields. Once you have returned to item 2a with the populated method
and pollutants, you can review, add or edit the fields LLLb/Hr Limit," "Sum Test Runs,"

Test Run Duration" and "Comments" without returning to the selection screen. You can
revise the number of test runs, test run duration and comments directly in the form.

Revisions of the Location, Target parameter and Test Method require deleting the row and
reentering the information with one of the "Add Target Parameters" procedures described
above. If you have already identified Emissions/Concentrations for the Location/Target
Parameter/Test Method combination, you should delete these before deleting the row(s). To
delete a row, move the cursor across the row until the cursor changes from a white arrow

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-22

-------
pointing up and to the left to a smaller black arrow pointing directly right across the row
which you wish to delete. Select the whole row by clicking the left mouse button, and then
either depress the delete key, backspace key or select delete after depressing the right mouse
button.

Select Location:

Select Location. Method, and Compounds

Select Method:

(select method
by compound]

N urnber of T est R uns: T est R un D uration (mins):

P§1 Custom Method Information

Custom Method Name: |Method 320
Custom Method Description:

|CO- Instrumental

Is this an Isokinetic or Manual I

Close and Save

Hold Ctrl or Shift to select
multiple records

Exit

Save Selected Items

Figure 18 - Custom Method Information

If the method you used is not listed in the drop-down menu, you may be able to choose
"Custom. " When the selection is made, the "Custom Method Information" window, Figure 18
- Custom Method Information, will open. When you choose a custom method, you must enter
a unique "Custom Method Name". The "Custom Method Description" is optional. Select
" Yes/No" to the required question of "is this an Isokinetic or Manual Method." Click on
"Close and Save" to save the new method and return to the Parameter form, or "Exit without
Saving" to return to the "Parameter" form without saving changes.

If you choose custom pollutant, you will be asked to enter the CAS number. The ERT
provides a link to the National Institute of Standards and Technologies (NIST) Material
Measurement Laboratory (MML) website where you may search for a CAS number and
molecular weight. You should enter the CAS number including hyphens, a unique custom
compound name (preferably one of the names listed on the NIST site) and molecular weight.
Clicking on "Close and Save" will enter the custom pollutant in the "Selected Compounds"
column. Clicking on "Save Selected Items" will cause the test location, test method and
custom pollutant to populate one of the lines in item 2a. While the custom pollutant
compound will be saved as one of the test parameters, it will not be saved as one of the
available compounds in the "Select Method and Compounds for Location" menu. To use
this custom compound at another location or with another method, you will have to complete
the custom pollutant menu again.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-23

-------
2b. Please select the Emissions Units of Measure for each location.

Add Emissions/Concentrations

Local w\ Method T| Units of Measure » Corre T Corrected % T
stack M eth od 10 ppm

Process Rate, Parameter

stack

Method S

grains/dscf

stack

Method 5

lb/hr

Pounds/hr of Steam Produced

Record: M - |l of 3 | ~ M Search

Figure 19 - Add Emissions Concentrations

• 2b. Please select the Emissions Units of Measure for each location: Section 2b is for
entering the units for reporting of the emissions. After adding one or more test locations in
item 1 and adding the test methods and target analytes in item 2a you can enter the units for
reporting the emissions in item 2b, shown in Figure 19 - Add Emissions/Concentrations.
Emissions units which include process information are not available in this area, although this
area allows you to pair the emission rate and the process rate parameter which are used to
calculate a process rate-based emissions value. Begin by clicking on "Add
Emissions/Concentrations Units" and the window in Emissions/Concentrations Screen will
populate. The process rate parameter should only be associated with an emission rate (i.e.
lb/hr, lb/min, lb/sec) and the time units (i.e. hr, min, sec) should be the same for both the
emissions rate and the process rate. The process rate will need to be added to Section 6a
before being able to select it in 2b.

W Select Method and Compounds for Location

Select Location. Method, and Emissions I Concentrations

Select Location - Method:

Available:

Selected:

Corrected %

grains/dscf corrected
grams/hr
grams/minute
Ib/cf NG

lb/million BTU using C02
Ib/rninute

rng/dscm corrected
ng/dscm

ng/dscm corrected
percent(%)
percent(%) corrected
pg/dscm

pg/dscm corrected
ppb

ppb corrected
pprn corrected
ppt

ppt corrected
ug/dscm

ug/dscm corrected

Jll

JLl

Hold Ctrl or Shift to select
multiple records

grains/dscf
lb/hr

lb/million BTU using 02

mg/dscm

ppm

ILL

Exit

Save Selected Items

Figure 20 - Select Emissions Concentrations

Select a combination of test location and method in the "Location —Methodfield which
combines values from numbers 1 and 2a above. Be sure to move the units you are using

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-24

-------
from the "Available" box to the "Selected' box on the right as in Figure 20 - Select
Emissions/Concentrations. If the selected emission concentration in the "Available" box
has the word "corrected" on the end of it, two prompts will occur in succession. To the first
prompt, "Enter Corrected Analyte (Oior CO2)" for the concentration. To the second
prompt, "Enter Corrected Percentage (i.e. 7)" for the concentration being corrected.

If you are correcting to O2 or CO2 you must include the uncorrected concentration. Once
you entered all of the information, the only three columns that can be edited directly in the
table are "Corrected Analyte," "Corrected %" and "Process Rate Parameter." If one of the
"Units of Measure" chosen is a pollutant emission rate, you may pair this emission unit with
a "Process Rate Parameter" which has been entered in 6a of the '' Process/A PC IT' tab. You
must use one of the available parameters that are available on the drop-down list and that
have the same time units as the emission rate. If the correct parameter is not available, you
should go to the "Process/APCD" tab to add the information required to create the correct
parameter rate. For more detail on the creation of a process rate parameter, see the directions
for Process/APCD Screen. section 6a p29.

The following is a description of the fields:

Location:

Method:

Emi ssi on/C oncentrati on:

Correcting Diluent:
Correction %:

Process Rate Parameter:

The choices which are available were those location names
which were entered in Item 6. If the required location is
missing, return to item 1 to add the location name required.
This is required and will be used by the ERT during the
process of entering test run data.

The choices which are available were those test methods
which were entered in Item 2a. The field identifies the
method used to measure the analyte emissions. This is also
required by the ERT and will be used during the process of
entering test run data.

The emission concentration or mass rate unit of measure
that is being calculated.

O2 or CO2.

The percentage of the analyte is corrected.

One of the items from items from section 6a of the
"Process/APCD" tab which includes a time unit. This
parameter should be selected to pair with a test method
having a unit of measure which includes the same time unit.
Typically, the first listed parameter in section 6a is paired
with a test method having lb/hr emission units. Process
parameters other than listed in the first line of section 6 may
be created if the emission limit has a unit of measure
different from the default emission factor unit of measure.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-25

-------
Regulations Tab

1=11 Test Plan

ERT Package
Name: @

company

Test Plan Date:

8/24/2020

~ X

Open Expanded

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.

@ 3. What is the specific purpose, Data Quality Objectives and Data Quality Indicators for the proposed testing?

~ Part 60 (NSPS)

~ Part 61 (NESHAP)

~ Part 63 (MACT)

~ Part 65 (HACT)

~ RATA

~ nsr/psd

~ Section 114

~ State Rule

~ other (describe:)

) 4. List all state and federal regulations that apply to the proposed testing:

Add Regulation

Part-SubPart T

Non Part 60/63 Rule Description: (click to edit) ~

Compound: ~

Unit of Measure ~

Limit

Part 63 Subpart, v

Major Source Boilers

Filterable Particulate

lb/million BTU using

0.4

Part 63 Subpart DD

Major Source Boilers

Carbon Monoxide

ppm@3%02

350

Part 63 Subpart DD

Major Source Boilers

Hydrogen Chloride

lb/million BTU using

0.02

Part 63 Subpart DD

Major Source Boilers

Mercury

lb/million BTU using

0.000005

5. Will the test results be used for other regulatory purposes (e.g., emission inventories,
permit applications, etc.) beyond that stated above? If yes, explain.

Previous Page Next Page

Figure 21 - Test Plan Regulation Tab

The Regulations screen shown in Figure 21 - Test Plan Regulations Tab has three sets of
fields describing the purpose for the tests. Check all boxes that apply to the tests which are to
be performed to identify the general regulatory purpose for which the test will be used. Use
the text boxes to input detailed information on the test purpose, data quality requirements
and regulations pertaining to the test.

• 3. What is the specific purpose, Data Quality Objectives and Data Quality Indicators for
the proposed testing? Ten check boxes are available to identify the general regulatory
programs which form the primary reason(s) for performing the emissions test (Part 60
NSPS, Part 61 NESHAP, Part 63 MACT, Part 65 MACT, RATA, NSR/PSD, SIP, Section
114, State Rule, and Other - describe). Check all that apply. Use the text box to the right of
the check boxes to provide additional information. This information would include details
describing the purpose when the "Other" box is checked. The text box may also contain
additional detail such as those pollutants that are of primary interest. This text box may
also be used to identify the ''Data Quality Objectives" (DQO's) for the test, ''Data Quality
Indicators" (DQI's) which will be collected, and the criteria which the DQI's will be used
to determine whether the test program met the DQO's.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-26

-------
4. List all state andfederal regulations that apply to the proposed testing: The majority of
source tests are conducted to demonstrate compliance with a Federal, State or local
emission limit. These emission limits are typically codified in a regulation or permit. The
"Add Regulation" button is available to identify any state and federal regulations that
apply to the emissions test. Click on the "Add Regulation" button to open the form
shown in Figure 21 - Test Plan Regulation Tab for entering a new regulation data.
The Regulation Screen will open as in Figure 22. Double click on a Non Part 60-63 Rule
Description to edit the contents of an existing entry. The drop-down list under "Part
SubPart" on the Test Plan Regulations tab and the new regulations Regulation Limits
form list the Federal regulations in Part 60, 61 and 63.

| 4. List all state and federal regulations that apply to the proposed testing:

Add Regulation

Part-SubPart T

Non Part 60/63 Rule Description: (click to edit) T

Compound:

Unit of Measure T

Limit

Part63 Subpart DD

Major Source Boilers

Filterable Particulate

lb/million BTU using

0.4

Part63 Subpart DD

Major Source Boilers

Carbon Monoxide

ppm®3%02

350

Part 63 Subpart DD

Major Source Boilers

Hydrogen Chloride

lb/million BTU using

0.02

Part63 Subpart DC

Major Source Boilers

Mercury

lb/million BTU using

o.ooooos

Regulation Limits

Part-SubPait

Part G3 Subpart DDDDD

Regulation

Non Pail 60/63 Rule Description:

Major Source Boilers

Compound:

Filterable Particulate

Unit of M easure

lb/million BTU using 02

Limit:

!S,

0.44

/ious Page Next Page

Exit

Save and Enit

Figure 22 - Regulation Limits
The fields are described as follows:

Part-SubPart: The regulatory citation which requires the test for the compound and

specifies the identified limit. For example: 40CFR60 Subpart UUU.

Regulation Description: The default description of the selected Part-SubPart. For clarity and

conformation, you may also add a generic identifier for the regulatory
citation. For example: NSPS for Mineral Calciners and Dryers. If the
testing is not performed to demonstrate compliance with an existing
regulation, you should provide a general description of the purpose for
the test.

Compound: The regulated or targeted compound. Use the drop-down list to select

the regulated compound and the regulatory unit of measure. If the
compound and/or unit of measure forthe regulatory limit for the

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-27

-------
pollutant are not shown, you will need to exit this screen and go to the
Locations/Methods Screen to enter the compound in section 2a and the
units of the standard in section 2b.

Unit of Measure:

Limit:

The units of measurement for the compound within the regulation or the
desired units used to describe the emissions. The units of measure are
tied to the selection of the target compound.

The numerical value for the compound as expressed in the Unit of
Measure.

• 5. Will the test results be usedfor other regulatory purposes (e.g., emission inventories,
permit applications, ect.) beyond that stated above? If yes, explain: List the secondary
reasons for performing this emissions test. If known, list those pollutants that are of
secondary interest. For example, determine emissions of CO, THC, VOC and condensable
PM emissions for use in emissions inventory reporting and determination of fees.

Note: Pressing "Shift F2" will expand the currently selected text field to a larger window to allow
for easier editing and will allow changes in the Font (size, style, Effects etc.).

Process/APCD Tab

[HI Test Plan — ~ !>

Open Expanded

ERT Package * Icompany
Name:

Test Plan Date:

8/24/2020

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods

Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers

Attach.

) 6a. Enter the process data to be documented during testing. (Required before test data entry)

Add Process

Process Parameter: (click to view/edit)

Heat Input

T Process Rate T Pollutant Unit T Measure

Million Btusj'million Lb Million Btus |/ri

H ¦

.1. 6b. Enter the process lab data to be documented during testing.

Add Lab

Analysis Required: (click to view/edit)

@ 7a. Please give a brief description of the source (including control equipment) and attach source or
process flow diagram:

The unit is a wood-fired boiler followed but multiclone to control PM emissions.

@ 7b. Control Devices: (Required before test data entry)

Add Control Device

Location ~ Control Device : (click to view/edit)

HEHBtlRlHi ,, MULTIPLE CYCLONES

Units T Target Va

Column widths may be changed by user.

Figure 23 - Test Plan Process/APCD Tab
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-28

-------
The Process/APCD is to enter process and Air Pollution Control Device (APCD) data

(Figure 23).

• 6a. Enter the process data to be documented during testing: Section 6a is where process
data is documented. Process data is quantifiable information on operational parameters for
the production unit or controls. Process data includes documentation of parameters that
may be used after the test for compliance assurance monitoring, indicators that the facility
was operating at representative operating conditions or indicators of the performance of
installed control equipment. It might include fuel feed rate, average steam output, one or
more temperatures of the process, scrubber pressure drop, scrubber water flow, ESP
current or another measurable parameter. Some process activity information might be used
to calculate the emissions limit, for example x pounds of pollutant per ton of clinker.
Process information might also be information required in a Title V permit. Process data is
required. You can either type the information in the fields directly, or click the "Add
Process" button. If there are no populated process parameter lines, you should go to the
Permit/SCC Screen to select the SCC and associated process parameter for the tested unit.
The first field is pre-populated and highlighted yellow, which means the ERT completed
this field based on the SCC you selected or an activity indicator that you established when
you selected the SCC. But if the information in a yellow field is incorrect it can be changed
by returning to the Permit/SCC Screen where it was established. For example, if the
activity information is not correct, returning to the SCC selection may show that the SCC
had multiple default activity parameters and the one selected was incorrect. By changing
the selection, the first process data parameter will change to the process units identified in
the SCC selection list. While the first line in process parameters list is populated from the
SCC selection list, additional process parameters may be added by clicking on "Add
Process" which will display the "Process Information" menu shown in Figure 24. This
menu is identical to the menu used to populate the SCC activity parameter when no
default parameter was established for that SCC.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-29

-------
Fp Test Plan

Test Plan Title:' Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2

Test Plan Date:

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations Process.'APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.
6a. Enter the process data to be documented during testing. (Required before test data entry)

Process Parameter: (click to view/edit)

Process Rate » Pollutant Unit

- Measure .

PTB Test Stuff

dfjkd

Maximums min opacity measured

COM percent/min

COM percent

/nLzl

Carbon Monoxide concentration measured at breach

PPM/min

PPM

Wood Fed into Dryer

Tons/hr Lb

Tons

Dryer Temperature At Outlet

Degree F/min

Degree F

/n ^

@ 6b. Enter the process lab data to be documented during testing.

# 7a.

PRO
Figu

Process Information

Process Parameter: Maximum 6 min opacity measured

NOTE: The Material and the Action become the Process Parameter (as in "Coal Burned")
Process Rate: Percent/min

NOTE: The Measure and Time Unit become the Process Rate (as in "Tons/hr")

Pollutant Unit:

< L

Measure: Percent

Emission factor unit numerator; units associated with pollutant emitted (as in "LB" in "LB of NOx
per tons of coal burned")

Time Unit: j/min

Emission factor unit denominator; units associated
with material processed (as in "TONS" in "Lb of
NOx per TONS of coal burned")

Will be the same for
the Process Rate and
Compound Unit

Material: Maximum 6 min opacity [~"]

Material processed (as in "COAL" in "Lbof NOx per tons of COAL burned")

Action: measured | ~ ,

Action performed on the material (as in "BURNED" in "Lb of NOx per tons of coal BURNED")

Target Value Ranee: Target Low: 0 Target High: 10

Opacity measured by Method 9 observer during Method 29 testing as required
for establishing operating limit during permit period.

Figure 24 - Add Process Information

To add or change the fields under the different column headings you must click in either the
"Process Parameter" or the "Process Rate" columns. You will see a box like Figure 24. If
the box is not visible, it may be hidden behind the test plan menu. By clicking on the test
plan menu bar and moving it to a different location, you will see the "Process Information"
menu.

Below is a description of thefields:

Process Parameter:

Process data parameter(s) documented during testing. Entries with
a yellow background were pre-populated based on the SCC. Since
the text is a combination of text from the Material and Action
fields, you must enter or change text in those fields to change the
text in thisfield.

Process Rate:

This is populated with a combination of the text entered in the
Measure field and the Time Unit specified in the field to the right
of the Measure field. As with the Process Parameter field, to
change this field, you must change the text in the other fields.
Process Information used to generate process-based emissions (i.e.
lb/Ton of Clinker) must use the same units specified for the
emission rate time unit.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-30

-------
Pollutant Unit: For a process base emission, this is the pollutant mass unit which

will become the numerator unit (i.e. lb as in lb/Ton of Clinker). For
process information that is not directly associated with mass
emissions of a pollutant (such as a process temperature, reactant
feed rate or opacity) no pollutant unit is required.

Measure, Material, Action: These items are the same as were defined in the section for selecting

the SCC. While a significant number of descriptors are provided in
the drop-down lists, almost all are primarily for creating an emission
unit that combines an emission rate with a process rate. You may
provide text which better describesthe process parameter and the
process rate information. For example, the recording of stack opacity
could be described by a Measure of "COM percent", Time Unit of
"/min", Material of "Maximum 6 min opacity" and Action of
"measured".

Target Low:
Target High:
Comments:

The lower bound of the process data information. This may be an
expected value.

The higher bound of the process information. This may be an
expected value.

Any comments concerning the process data which would clarify
what is being measured, how it is measured and for what purpose.

Caution: Clicking "Exit" will not save your entry. Click "Save and Exit" to save.

• 6b. Enter the process lab data to be documented during testing: Section 6b is where
process lab data is entered. List the process materials requiring lab analysis to determine
some characteristic of feed, output or byproduct from process. Like section 6a, this is
quantifiable information that details what is going on during testing (for example, feed
material moisture content or the results of a proximate or ultimate analysis of the fuel, etc).
You can directly enter information into the Units or Comments fields or click the "Add
Lab" button to open a form for easy entry, as seen in Figure 25 - Process Lab Information.
Clicking in the "Analysis Required' field of an existing parameter will also open the form.

F§1 Process Lab Information x

Process Lab Information

Analysis Required:

Units:

| percent

Comments:

CornrnentsI is this going to run overl. What happens then?

[ Exit ] [ Save and Exit ]

Figure 25 - Process Lab Information
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-31

-------
The fields are described as follows:

Analysis Required: A description of the lab analysis. This should include any specification

describing the specific preparation and analytical finish rather than a generic
term. For example: carbon content by ASTM D 3176 is preferred over carbon
content.

Units: Units measured within the analysis.

Comments: Any comments related to the process lab data.

• 7a. Please give a brief description of the source (including control equipment) and
attach source or process flow diagram: Section 7a is where you will give a description of
the source, a description of the control equipment, and attach at least one process flow
diagram. It is recommended that you provide a brief description in this text area so that the
description is available to a reviewer without opening an attachment and is produced in the
printed test plan and test report. You should use attachments for complex or more detailed
descriptions and diagrams.

You may submit multiple attachments (Figure 26).

Figure 26 - Attachments - Source Process Flow Diagram

To attach a file, click on the "Attach File" button. Double click on the "paperclip" icon to
open the "Attachments" screen, as seen in Figure 26. Click the "Add" button to add a file as
an attachment. Once a file has been added as an attachment, click on "OK" to return to the
"Source/Process Flow Diagram" screen. The number of attachments will show to the right of
the paperclip. (For more information concerning attachments, see Chapter 4: Attachments
Screen)

Note: When an attachment is associated with an item the "Attach File" button will turn blue.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-32

-------
• 7b. Control Devices: Section 7b is where you will list all emissions control devices in
order of process flow. You MUST enter a control device. If no control device exists, you
must select "Uncontrolled" (first selection in the dropdown list). An extensive list of process
controls and/or add-on control devices are available using the dropdown list. To enter a
control device, you can either click the first blank cell in the "Control Device" column or
click on the "Add Control Device" button. You should choose one of the control devices
from dropdown lists unless a generi c description of the installed control is not present. If a
control is not on the list, you can type the name of the device directly into the field. You
should ensure that you list all control devices which influence the emissions of the
pollutants being quantified during the test. All devices you select in section 7b should also
be described in section 7a with additional information to explain details which cannot be
entered in section 7b.

You should also insure that all parameters required to document the performance of each
control device are listed in item 7a. You should identify the most critical APCD
performance monitoring parameter that will be used for continuous compliance
demonstration, describe the parameter in the comments field and provide the units of
measure for that parameter. An existing entry can be edited by clicking in any column
except the Control Device column. As described earlier, clicking in the "Control Device"
column will open the "Air Pollution Control De\'ice Information" screen - Figure 27.

® 7b. Control Devices: (Required before test data entry) | Add Control Device )

Location

Control Device : (click to view/edit)

Units

Target

CENTRIFUGAL COLLECTOR (CYCLONE) - MEDIUM EFFICENC

inches of H20

FABRIC FILTER

degree F

WET ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR

GPM

llil. _|

Figure 27 - Control Devices

The fields are described as follows:

Location: The selection of inlet or stack for location of APCD control device.

Control Device: A name or description of the control device as li sted in the pull-down li st

Units: Units of measure for the most critical operating parameter for the control

device.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-33

-------
Target Value:

The desired or expected value for the control device operating parameter.

Comments: Any comments pertaining to the control device, explanation of the operating
parameter or method of collecting the operating parameter.

Methods Continued Tab

E§] Test Plan — ~ X

Open Expanded

8/24/2020

Name: W

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont, Audit/'Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.

i|s! 8. Describe below or attach complete documentation of any non standard test method used. Attach File

Describe all modifications and/or deviations from published methods. Attach dated documentation of
ALL non verbal request AND approval for modifications and/or alternative methods requests.

No deviations from the method.

i 9. Does the proposed sampling location meet the minimum EPA Method 1 criteria for Attach File

acceptable measurement sites? Please fist below or attach the supporting 0 Yes D Ho

documentation.

) 10. The absence of cyclonic flow must be verified by prior to testing {4DCFR60.8 (h) or Attach File

4DCFR63.7(d)(ii)}. An assessment of stratification of emission gases must also be M Yes l_l No

performed {40CFR60.8 (h)}. Will you use EPA Method 1 and/or EPA Method 7E for these
assessments? If not, explain how you will make the assessments and attach
documentation supporting your assessment.

11. Select the method that will determine the oxygen concentration :

M3A-instrumental

Figure 28 - Test Plan Methods cont. Tab

Methods Continued screen is the continuation of the "Locations/Methods" screen (Figure 28).

• & Describe below or attach complete documentation of the test methodfollowed
including all modifications and/or deviations: In this section, it is suggested that the
promulgation date of any specified test method be identified. Test methods which are not
readily available free on the internet should be attached to the ERT for use by people
reviewing the test plan or test report. If modifications and/or alternative methods are being
proposed or were used, you must attach a document describing the proposed modification
to the test plan and a copy of the request AND approval (including dates) to the test report.
If the modification/alternative method was approved verbally by a regulatory agency, the
name and date of the approval should be included. Written formal approval should be
attached using the "Attach File" button. Test methods that are different from those
published in the Federal Register should also be attached. Follow the steps in Item 7a to
attach a file.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-34

-------
• 9. Does the proposed sampling location meet the minimum EPA Method 1 criteria for
acceptable measurement sites: In this section, answer the question about Method 1
criteria by checking "yes" or "no". If Method 1 criteria are not met, explain why the
methods used at the sampling location provide a representative sample and document any
approval, as applicable, To attach a file, click on "Attach File" and follow the steps in
Item 7a.

• 10. Has absence of cyclonic flow been verified per EPA Method 1 (Section 2.4): In this
section, answer the question about cyclonic flow by checking "yes" or "no." This field is
for the documentation of the absence of cyclonic flow. If the "no" checkbox has been
selected, enter documentation of why and approval, as applicable, or attach documentation
and approval by clicking on "Attach File" and following the steps in Item 7a.

• 11. Select the method that will determine the oxygen concentration: If flue gas
characterization is for molecular weight purposes only, you may select:

Method 2:

M2- assign 29.0 Mol. Wt:

Ambient air, assign a molecular weight
of 29.0 (per Method 2).

Method 3:

M3- mol Wt.Orsat or Fyrite:

Molecular weight only, Orsat or Fyrite.

M3-assign 30.0 Mol. Wt. combustion source: Combustion source, assign 30.00 for

molecular weight.

M3 - CO2 or O2 and Stoichiometric calc:

Using CO2, Ch.or stoichiometric
calculation

M3A:

Instrumental

M3B:

Using Orsat emission rate correction
factors

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-35

-------
Audit/Calibrations Tab

1-H Test Plan

~ X

Test Plan Date:

8/24/2020

Open Expanded

ERT Package * Ijest Report name
Name: '¦&'

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.
12. Do any of the proposed test methods require analysis of EPA audit samples? If

yes, you must contact an AASP to arrange for the purchase and delivery of
an audit sample.

) 13. Has all testing equipment been calibrated within the past 12 months?
If no, please explain.

0 Yes duo
0Yes ~ Ho

14. Will all calibration gases be certified by EPA Traceabifity Protocol
procedures? If No, describe certification procedure below.

gYes ~Ho ~N/A

15. Is a dilution system (via EPA Method 205) proposed?

~ Yes gNo gN/A

16. If applicable, list the expected calibration gas concentrations for all proposed instrumental
test methods. Include as much information as is known at this time.

Attach Calibration
Gas Certificates

CylD

Compound(Analyt ~

CertProcec ~

CertVali ~

UncertainPer ~

CertDate

ExpDate iQ

CC325625-C0

PROT1

451.1

0.6

7/31/2017

7/31/202

CC325625-02

PR0T1

9/2/2016

9/2/202

CC354556

PR0T1

10.29

0.4

3/7/2018

3/7/202

CC360726

PROT1

888.4

0.6

3/16/2018

3/16/202

Record; H i |l of 6 | ~

~f M | Tx No Filter

< ¦

Previous Page Next Page

Figure 29 - Test Plan Audit/Calibrations Tab

The "Audit/Calibrations" screen (Figure 29) is for data relating to the test method and the

calibration of the testing equipment.

• 12. Do any of the proposed test methods require analysis of EPA audit samples: The test
method should indicate whether or not audit samples are required. Select "Yes" or LLNo."

• 13. Has all testing equipment been calibrated within the past 12 months: It is expected
that your response to this question will be " Yes." If the answer is "No," please use the text
box for the explanati on. You can attach calibration documentation in the "Attachments"
tab of the ERT.

• 14. Will all calibration gases be certified by EPA Traceability Protocol procedures: If
the answer is "Nouse the text box for the explanation. If the answer is not applicable,
select -W/Ar

• 15. Is a dilution system (via EPA Method 205) proposed: Select "Yes," "No" or "N/A."

• 16. If applicable, list the expected calibration gas concentrations for all proposed
instrumental test methods: Input information on the calibration gases to be used for any
instrumental methods. For the test plan, you may enter incomplete information to provide
the test plan reviewer the gases that you intent to use and the approximate concentrations.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-36

-------
However, once the test is completed, this Item MUST be completed accurately since the
instrumental test methods data processing uses the "CertValue" in calculating the
concentrations.

The following is a description of the fields:

CylID:

Compound (Analyte):

Certification Procedure:
Certified Value:
Uncertain Percent:
CertDate:

ExpDate:

This is the cylinder ID provided by the provider and listed on the
calibration certificate. For cylinders having more than one calibration
gas, input the cylinder once for each gas and include a prefix or suffix
with the cylinder ID.

Input the gas name for the compound with the indicated certification
value.

Give the certification procedure used.

Input the certified value of calibration gas.

Input the percent uncertainty of the gas from the certificate.

Date the calibration gas was certified.

Date the certification of calibration expires.

Schedule Tab

Pil Test Plan

- ~

ERT Package Ijest Report r

N^mP- £

Test Plan Date:

C* | 8/24/2020

Name: S1'

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers Attach.
@1 17. What is the proposed test schedule?

Open Expanded

The test was performed on 08/14/2020.

18. Additional comments:

i@ii 19. Required Personal Protection Equipment:

Standard

Previous Page Next Page

Figure 30 - Schedule Tab

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-37

-------
The Schedule screen (Figure 30) concerns the scheduling of the test and any preparations for

that test.

• 17. What is the proposed test schedule: This field is primarily to advise the regulatory
authority and facility the dates that emissions testing will be performed, including any set
updates.

• 18. Additional comments: Provide any additional comments about the test.

• 19. Required Personal Protection Equipment: This field is primarily to advise the
regulatory authority of the type of personal protective equipment that will be required for
them to use to access the sampling location and any other locations that are associated with
the performance of the test program. It also serves to inform the facility of the source
tester's knowledge of the required protective equipment they will use during the source
test program.

Reviewers Tab

Pi] Test Plan — ~ X

Open Expanded

ERT Package * Ijest Report name
Name:

Test Plan Date:

8/24/2020

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Locations/Methods

Regulations Process/APCD Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Reviewers

Attach.

l@) Permitted Facility Representative
Name:

Email: |email@email.com
Title:

Company: [company
Date Reviewed: |

i/@) Testing Company Representative

Name: [tester

Email: )email@email.com

Title:

Company: |test company name
Date Reviewed: |

Previous Page Next Page

Figure 31 - Test Plan Reviewers Tab

The "Reviewers" screen (Figure 31) obtains data for the Reviewers of the test. All the fields
on this screen are required. The two representative blocks are as follows:

• Permitted Facility Representative: The person authorized to represent the facility being
tested.

• Testing Company Representative: The person authorized to represent the testing
company.

Note: This is NOT an electronic signature!

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-38

-------
Attachments Tab

PI Test Plan — ~ X

Attach Desc

Source/Process Flow Diagram

i9(o)

Alternate Method Request and Approval (Item S) (optional)

10(0)

EPA Method llocation Supporting Documentation (Item 9) (optioi

10(0)

Cyclonic Flow Absence Supporting Documentation (Item 10)

10(0)

Pre-Test Meter Boxes/DGMs Calibrations

10(0)

Post-Test Meter Boxes/DGMs Calibrations

10(0)

Nozzles Calibrations

#(0)

Pitots Calibrations

10(0)

Thermocouples Calibrations

10(0)

Sampling Locations Dimensions and Point Locations

10(0)

Run Field Datasheets (raw data sheets for field sampling)

10(0)

Moisture Recovery

10(0)

Lab Data (raw data sheets for field and laboratory analysis)

10(0)

Chain-of-Custody

(0(0)

Observer Comments

10(0)

Documentation of competence as an AETB and Ql for stationary sc

10(3)

Laboratory Accreditation Certification

10(1)

Record: H 1 of 29 ~ ~! ~ Search

To add or view an attachment:

- double click on the "paper clip" symbol

- select "add" to add a file

- select "view" to view a file

Note: Effective October 31, 2016
according to 60.8(f}(v) "Where test
methods requires you record or report,
the following shall be included: Record of
preparation of standards, record of
calibrations, raw data sheets for field
sampling, raw data sheets for field and
laboratory analysis, chain-of-custody
documentation, and example calculations
for reported
results."

Figure 32 - Test Plan Attachments Tab

The Attachments screen (Figure 32) allows you to attach any documentation pertaining to the
Test Plan.

Adding an Attachment

Several of the questions in the test plan section allow the user to import files as attachments
to the test plan. If you added an attachment in one of the earlier tabs, the attachment tab will
show a number "1" (or however many attachments were added) next to the paperclip in
parentheses.

To add more attachment items, enter the description of the attachment in the
bottom row of the attachdesc column. Then add your attachment.

Tips to reduce the PDF file size:

- Create PDF directly from application, Previous Page

- Attach individual components not compiled material

-Use descriptive file names (i.e. M29-field-data_ll-ll-ll.pdf)

- Attach compressed image files (JPG, GIF, PNG) or CGM

- Scan paper documents at 200 dpi

Finished

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-39

-------
To add attachments to an existing named documentation area, double click on the paperclip.
A window like that in Figure 33 will open. If files were attached previously, the file name
will be listed in the field. If no files were attached, the field will be blank and all but the
"Add..." button will be faded. In both situations, to add an attachment, click on the
"Add..." button to display a Windows file selection menu.

In this screen you can add additional attachments by double clicking the paperclip next to
the description that applies. If your type of attachment isn't specifically listed, follow these
steps:

1. Click the empty lower left-hand cell and add a description.

2. Double click the paperclip in the cell to the right of the description.

3. Follow the prompts to add your attachment(s).

These steps can be repeated if you have multiple types of attachments.

(Note: Many of the requested files will be part of the test report and are not required or
available at the time the test plan is prepared.)

Attachments

Attachments (Double-click to open)

10 Traverse point layout.pdf

Add.

Remove

Open

Save As.

Save All...

Cancel

Figure 33 - Attachments Options

Click "OK" to save the changes and return to the "Test Plan" attachment screen. Click
"Cancel" to return to the "Test Plan" attachment screen without saving the changes. The
number of attachments will be beside the paper clip image.

Note: When one or more files are attached to a documentation area, when you double click on the
paperclip, a window will open. In addition to adding attachments as described above; one can click
on one of the file names and then click on "Open", "Remove", "Save As..." or "Save All..." to
open, remove or save the selected attachments). Simply follow the prompts.

Note: If you cannot see the paperclip image, it is likely that the PDS you are using was created by
older ERT version. The old PDS files have an OLE object field instead of an attachment file type.
As a result; PDS file sizes in ERT version 3 are greater than ERT version 4, 5 and 6. In addition,
very large attachments may not be able to be viewed because of memory constraints. If so, revise
the PDS file to the ERT version 4 and 5 file type which with an .accdb extension. If you create a
new PDS, you will see the paper clips. If the existing ERT version 3 PDS is extensive and was
created in, you can change the PDS to a version 4 format by:

1) Save all the attachments in the old ERT file using a descriptive file name;

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-40

-------
2) Create a new blank PDS using ERT version 4;

3) Close ERT, open MS Access and load the blank PDS;

4) Delete all the tables in the PDS except "tblAttachments;"

5) In the Access menu, select "External Data" then select "Import" "Access";

6) Use "Browse" to locate the ERT version 3 PDS;

7) Specify the importing of all tables, queries, forms;

8) Click "OK";

9) Select the "Select All" button;

10) Deselect "tblAttachments" and click "OK";

11) Close Access and open the new PDS.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-41

-------
Chapter 5: Test Data

Run Data

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

|98,5 MMBtu/hr Wood-fired Boiler

1 Select Location - Method:

New Run Data 1

Delete Run Data

^^hang^^n Number

Change Run Date

Figure 34 - Run Data Details

The ERT separates methods into three basic categories - single train isokinetic/manual methods,
paired train manual methods and instrumental methods. Currently, only the paired sampling train
for mercury by Method 30B can be documented in the ERT. For a single train isokinetic/manual
method, to complete the "Test Data" section you may either import the data from a spreadsheet or
manually enter the data. For a paired train manual method and an instrumental method, you must
enter the data manually.

Add New Run Data - Spreadsheet Import

Only one sample location data set can be imported at a time.

There are 3 import spreadsheets available:

1. ERT_Manual_Methods_DE_Template-Empty.xltm (Isokinetic or manual methods)

2. ERT_Manual_Methods_DE_30B_Template-Empty.xltm (Method 30B data)

3. ERTInstrumentalTemplate-Empty.xltm (Instrumental methods-Method 3 A, 6C, 7E, 10 or
25A.)

DO NOT DELETE COLUMNS FROM TEMPLATE OR FROM ERT.

If you have your field data organized in a spreadsheet format consistent with the ERT data entry
template, includes instructions (XLT 361 K) importing the majority of information for the "Header
Data" and "Point Data" tabs for single train manual test methods as follows:

• Click "Run Data" in the "Test Data" area of the "ERT- Main Menu" to bring up the "Run
Data Details" Screen, as in Figure 34.

• Click on the "Add New Run Data" button to add data.

Microsoft Office Access

Figure 35 - Import from Spreadsheet Option Dialog

This brings up a spreadsheet option dialog. Click "Yes" button to import the data from a
spreadsheet. Click the "No" button to manually add data directly into the ERT.

Once "Yes" is selected, an Import Field Run Data form opens.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-42

-------
33 Import Field Run Data

0 1.

Select Location
Select Method

[Slack

|Method 29

Select Import File
(xls or xml)

View/Edit Imported Records
Add imports into main data table

C:\Lfseis\tkHre\Desktop\ERT import.xlsx

Figure 36- Import Field Run Data Window

Step 1: Select the location and the method from the drop-down lists, as in Figure 36. A
checkmark will automatically appear in the box to the left of the red number 1 after the
selection.

Step 2: Click the # 2 and select the spreadsheet in the browse window, then click "OK"
or "Open" to select the spreadsheet. The file path will appear beside step 2 "Select
Spreadsheet File", as shown in Figure 36.

Step 3: Click the #3 to view the imported data. You will see two tables as in Figure 37 -
View Imported Data Windows. One table is the header data and one table is the point
data from the spreadsheet.

Review and edit the data in these windows. Click on the "X" in the top right corner of each
window to close them when you have finished your review.

m Imported Header Data

Location
Stack

1 Stack

' Method - RunNumbe - RunDate - JobNumbe - Personne - Pb - Pstatii ^ FilterNum ¦
Method 29 Test 1 4/24/2017 170128 29.03 -0.1 0

Method 29 Test 2 4/25/2017 170128 28 92 -0 17 0

~ X ¦

FilterNum2 - f|

0 0

o a

PI! Imported Point Data

Location

Method »

Run # -

Job# -r

Run Date - Poi -

Begii »

Er • Clock

Gas Meti »

Velocil " Orifice Pres

D • Ora

Pres. Ac »

Stack Tern -

Stack

Method 29

iEHW

170128

4/24/2017 R-1

704.415

0.15

1.5

Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

706.47

0.13

1.3;

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

708.49

0.12

1.2]

I Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

12f

710.37

0.12

1.2

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 2

151

712.22

j Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

15J

18j

712.22000

0.14

1.4-

1.4

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

211

714.21

0.13

1.45

[stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

24l

716.25

0.13

14f

1.4

Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 3

718.27

0-135|

14!

1.4

| Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017)0

720.28

0.21

2.1!

2.1

I Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

722.67

0.14

1.5

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

724.74

0.14

1.5

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 4

726.82

0.12

1.3

I Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

728.7

0.11!

1.2l

1.2

I Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/201710

4S|

730.55

0.15

1.55

| Stack

Method 29

Test 1 170128

4/24/2Q17 0

45| 48

732.66

0.11

1.2

| Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 5

48|

5lj

734.51

0.11j

1.2!

1.2

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

736.32

0.09

0.95

Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

54j

57I

737.97

(Toi

0.11

0.1

1 Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

601

73966

0.11I

1 15

1.15

I Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 6

741.52

0.07

0.8

Stack

Method 29

Test 1

170128

4/24/2017 0

66|

743.05

0.07!

0.77

Figure 3 7- View Imported Data Windows
• Step 4: Click the # 4 to add the imported data into the main data tables.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-43

-------
• Step 5 - Click "OK" on the data imported successfully dialog and then close the "Import
Field Run Data" window.

Add New Run Data - Directly

~^1 Enter New Run Key Data

~ X

Add New Run Data Key Information

Location - Method:

RunNumber: RunDate:

I I

Add Run Data

Exit without Adding Run

Figure 38 - Enter New Ran Key Data Window

Run data do not have to be imported from spreadsheets. They can be manually entered directly
into the ERT "Run Data Details" screens. To do this:

Click "Add New Run Data" from the "Run Data Details" window (see Figure 34 - Run
Data Details).

Click "No" from the import from spreadsheet option dialog (see Figure 35 - Import from

Spreadsheet Option Dialog). You will be prompted to enter a location - method, run

number, and run date for the run data to be inputted.

Select the "Location —Method' from the pick list.

Enter the "Run Number".

Enter the "Run Date".

Click the "Add Run Data" button to save data, or click "Exit without Adding Run" to
return to "Run Data Screen" without saving data.

This will add the key information for the run data to be input. The display will then show
either the "Run Data Details" screens for an isokinetic run or an "Instrumental Method'
run depending on the method selected.

Once the location, method, run number and date have been entered, you must find that run
under the drop-down list called "Select Location — Method:" (highlighted in yellow) to
enter data or view that run.

For both single train and paired train manual or isokinetic methods, you must repeat this
process to add runs until all test runs have been added.

For instrumental methods, add the first run following the above instructions. Once the
first run is complete, additional runs should be added. To add the additional runs, go to
the "/77V/ Run Results'' tab of the "Run Data Details" screen. Select the "Add New Run"
button located in the lower right corner of the form. Adding runs from the "ITM Run
Results" tab using this button will copy a significant amount of calibration, Analyzer,
Operating Parameters and test setup information to the created the additional runs. The
post-test bias data will be copied to the pre-test bias check of the new run.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-44

-------
Select Run Data

hH Run Data Details

I Facility

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:
I Select Location - Method:

I Incinerator

Location-Method
Stack - Method 10
Stack - Method 10
Stack - Method 10
Stack-Method 26A
Stack - Method 26A
Stack - Method 26A
Stack - Method 30B
Stack - Method 30B
Stack - Method 30B
Stack - Method 3A C02
Stack - Method 3AC02
Stack - Method 3A C02
Stack - Method 3A 02
Stack - Method 3A 02
Stack - Method 3A 02

Add New Run Data

runnumber

12
3
5

M 5/26A R1
M 5/26A R2
M 5/26A R3
M5/26AR1
M 5/26A R2
M 5/26A R3

Delete Run Data

Figure 39 - Select Run Data

To view the data for the different runs when you are on the Run Data Detail screens:

• Select the "Location - Method -Run" from the list.

• Click on the "<" or "> button to scroll through runs of selected locations and methods. The

"Method Setup' tab will be the same for all runs of the same method. The effects of scrolling
through runs can be seen on the other tabs. Calculations made on 0 values will result in a field
with #Error.

• Selecting either "<" or "> will change the run number in the field to the left of the symbols.
In addition to changing the run number, changes in the run data details entered in the tabs
below the run identifier are presented.

Correcting Run Data Entry Information

Incorrect entry of test data information can be corrected either by deleting the incorrect runs,
changing the run numbers associated with one or more runs, or changing the date associated with
one or more runs. The following three sections describe the procedures to perform these
corrections.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-45

-------
Delete Run Data

Add New Run Data

Delete Run Data

Change Run Number I Change Run Date

Method Setup Calibrations ITM Run Results Emissions LjU Delete Run

¦I

Run:

4 Flow Rate, DSC

Run Date:

1/1/2018

Moisture,

Start Time:

C02,

End Time:

02,

ANALYZER

OPE

Make:

Open

Model:

Units(1

sIN-. \—

No. Rei

Time Inte

Calibration

Gas Cylinder

Cert. Sy

Set: Mode

Level ID

Value Re

| 0[v_] Pre

Zero

1 u

Upscale P

i—n

Post

Zero

I u

Upscale

i r

Delete Run Data

Select Location - Method - Run to Delete:
(press Shift or Ctrl to select multiples)

Location -Method-Run

method

Stack - Method 10 -1

Method 10

Stack - Method 10-2

Method 10

Stack - Method 10 - 3

Method 10

Stack - Method 10 - 4

Method 10

Stack - Method 26A - 1

Method 26A

Stack - Method 26A - 2

Method 26A

Stack - Method 26A - 3

Method 26A

Stack - Method 30B -1

Method 30B

Stack - Method 30B - 2

Method 30B

Stack - Method 30B - 3

Method 30B

Stack - Method 3A C02 - M 5/26A R1

Method 3A CO

Stack - Method 3A C02 - M 5/26A R2

Method 3A CO

Stack - Method 3A C02 - MS/26 A R3

Method 3A CO.

Stack-Method 3A 02-M5/26AR1

Method 3A 02

Stack - Method 3A 02 - M5/26A R2

Method 3A 02

Stack - Method 3A 02 - M5/26A R3

Method 3A 02

Delete Run Data

Exit without Deleting Run

Figure 40- Delete Run Window

Deleting the run data will delete all header, point and lab data for the selected run.

• Click the "Delete Run Data" button from the "Run Data Details ScreenThe list of
location-method-runs contained in the ERT file be displayed.

• Select the "Location - Method - Run" that is to be deleted from the list.

• Click the "Delete Run Data" button to permanently delete the data and return to the

' Run Data Details" screen. There will be no warning to confirm the run is to be deleted;
if Delete Run Data is selected, the data will be removed.

• Click on "Exit without Deleting Run" to keep the data and return to the "Run Data
Details'' screen.

Change Run Number
To change the run number for the selected Location - Method - Run:

• Click the "Change Run Number" button from the Run Data Details screen.

• Select the "Location - Method - Run" from the list.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-46

-------
m Run Data Details

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

23 Rename Run

Rename Run

Select Location - Method - Run to Rename:

New Run Number:

Location-Method-Run

Stack - Method 10 -1

Stack -
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack ¦
Stack •
Stack ¦
Stack -
Stack ¦
Stack ¦

Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method
Method

10-2
10-3
26A-1
26A - 2
26A-3
30B -1
30B -2
30B -3

3AC02-M5/26AR1
3A C02 - M5/26A R2
3A C02-M5/26AR3
3A02-M5/26A R1
3A 02 - M5/26A R2
3A Q2 - M5/26A R3

Figure 41 - Rename Run Number
• Enter the new run number.

| Rename Run

X
~
1

Rename Run

1 Select Location - Method - Run to Rename: New Run Number:

|Stack - Method 10 -1

Lvj H

Rename Run Number

Exit without Renaming Run

Microsoft Access

You are about to rename run data for location = Stack and Method ¦
Method 10 and Run Number = 1 to 4. Continue?

Yes

Figure 42 - Confirmation for renaming run number

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-47

-------
• Click the "Change Run Number" button. You will be prompted to confirm the
renaming. Click "Yes" on the rename confirmation dialog to change the run number.
When the run is successfully renamed, a confirmation box will pop-up "Run was
renamed!" Select "Ok" and return to the "Run Data Details" screen. Click "No" to return
to the "Run Number" window without saving.

• Click the "Exit without Changing Run Number" to return to the "Run Data Details"

screen without saving changes.

Change Run Date
This will change the date for the selected location - method - run - date.

• Click the "Change Run Date" button from the run data details screen.

• Select the "Location — Method — Run — Date" from the pick list.

• Enter the new run date.

• Click the "Change Run Date" button. You will be prompted to confirm the renaming.
Click "Yes" on the rename confirmation dialog to change the date and return to the "Run
Data Details" screen. Click "No" to return to the "Run Date" window without saving.

• Click the "Exit without Changing Run Date" to return to the "Run Data Details" screen
without saving changes.

Isokinetic/ Measured Method Test Data

Pil Run Data Details

Open Expanded

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Lab Data Sampling/Stack Data Results Cydone Cut Size Emissions

Compounds for this Location / Method:

View / Edit Location Information

Location
Stack Outlet

~l Test Method *\ Target Parameter T Num Test Runs ~ Test Run Duration
Method 5 Filterable Particulate 3 60

Emissions / Concentrations for this Location / Method:

Location
Stack Outlet

1 of 1

T| Method
Method 5

w\ Units of Measure T Corre ~ Corrected1!
lb/million BTU using 02 o

Process Rate, Parametei

Add Emissions/Concentrations

Figure 43 - Run Data Details Screen for Isokinetic Manual Methods
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-48

-------
As stated previously there are three categories of stack test methods in the ERT currently:
single train isokinetic/manual methods, paired train manual methods and instrumental
methods. Depending on the method selected, the ERT will display different run data details
tabs. For single train Isokinetic methods, the tabs include:

• "Method Setup"

• "Header Data"

• "Point Data"

• "Lab Data"

• "Sampling/Stack Data Results"

• "Cyclone Cut Size"

• "Emissions"

You can import field data information for up to nine isokinetic test runs from a spreadsheet
(see Add New Run Data - Spreadsheet Import) or manually enter the information into the
appropriate screens. Importing data from spreadsheets populates only data for the header
data tabs and the point data tabs, to produce the emissions calculations users are required to
enter the lab data by clicking on the "Lab Data" tab.

For paired train manual methods, the tabs include:

• "Method Setup"

• "Header Data"

• "Point Data"

• "Sample Data"

• "Sampling/Stack Data Results"

• "Emissions"

• "QA/QC"

For instrumental methods, the tabs include:

• "Method Setup"

• "Calibrations"

• "ITM Run Results"

• "Emissions"

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-49

-------
Method Setup Tab

fH Run Data Details

facility name

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

Open Expanded

|'93.5 MMBtu/hr Wood-fired Boiler

Select Location

jstackOutlet-Method 5

y || Add New Run Data |

Delete Run Data

Select Run:

Method 5-1

1 Change Run Number 1

Change Run Date

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Lab Data Sampling/Stack Data Results Cydone Cut Size Emissions

Compounds for this Location / Method:

View / Edit Location Information

Location
Stack Outlet

T| Test Method
Method 5

Target Parameter
Filterable Particulate

t NumTest Runs T Test Run Duration
3 60

Record; M 1 of 1

Add Target Parameters

Emissions / Concentrations for this Location / Method:

Location
Stack Outlet

T| Method
Method 5

T| Units of Measure » Corre T Corrected %
lb/million BTU using 02 0

Process Rate, Parametei

Record: M

1 of 1

Add Emissions/Concentrations

Figure 44 - Isokinetic Method: Method Setup Tab

The Method Setup tab contains a common set of fields for all three categories of test
methods. The fields in this section will be pre-populated based on information entered in the
test plan. However, they can be modified:

• View / Edit Location Information: Allows you to revise the test location information
supplied during the test plan development

• Add Target Parameters: Allows you to add target parameters for this run at this
location/method.

• Add Emissions/Concentrations: Allows you to add emissions/concentrations for this
run at this location/method.

• Delete Target Parameters or Emission/Concentrations: Highlight the row of the
emission/concentration by clicking on the gray cell to the left of the column named
"Location ' and press the keyboard "Delete" button. When you are in the correct

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-50

-------
column, the cursor will change from a white arrow pointing up and left (^>) to a black
arrow (^pointing right).

Delete Process Rate, Parameter To delete the process rate, parameter you must block
all of the text in the field and then press the keyboard "Delete" button. It should be
noted that the process rate parameter should only be associated with an emission rate
and the time units (i.e. lb/hr, lb/min, lb/sec) should be the same for both the emissions
rate and the process rate.

Change Process Rate Parameter To add or change the process rate parameter, click
within the field and then on the down symbol (~) to reveal the drop-down list of
available process parameters. You should choose a process parameter only for
emissions rates that have the same time units as the emissions rate (i.e. tons of material
processed/hr and lb of pollutant/hr).

Header Data Tab

FH Run Data Detail

ffedrty name

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

Select Location - Method:

Select Run:

Open Expanded

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Lab Data Sampling/Stack Data Results Cydone Cut Size Emissions

Dry Gas Meter:

Control
Console:

Umbilical:

1°

StackTC:

1110

TedlarBag:

1°

OrsatPump:

1°

Probe/Pitot:

Nozzle:

Fitters

Figure 45 - Single Train Isokinetic Method: Header Data

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-51

-------
Most of the components in the "Header Data" tab are common between the single train and
paired train sampling methodologies. The information for the single train may be imported
from spreadsheets. The information for both methodologies may be entered directly into the
fields. Figure 45 shows the layout of the single train or isokinetic train "Header Data" tab.

Fil Run Data Details

pacility name

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

Open Expanded

98.5 MMBtu/hr Wood-fired Boiler

[

Select Location - Method:

Stack Outlet - Method 30B

v || Add New Run Data |

Delete Run Data

1 Change Run Number 1

Change Run Date

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Sample Data Stack Data Results Emission QA/QC

Method:

Method 30B

RunNumber:

Lab Reported MDL:"
Low point in calibration curve:™
High point in calibration curve: *
Est. MDL from Breakthrough results:
Expected Mass of Hg to be collected

0.31 ng

10 ng

500 ng

8/14/2018

Mercury
Mass UnitS:
ng v

Trap Manufacturer: Lab Name

TrapAnalysisSource: Itest company name

5.2519E-01 ng

Gas Meter Units i*

Analysis Technician: jName of technician
Analysis Method: |30B

Run Technician Name: [Name of technician

50 ng liters

Equipment ID

Sample A Sample B

Dry Gas Meter: |30B-005A |30B-005B
Control Console: jo [o

StackTC: '

Probe/Pitot: 0

1°
l°~

Calibration

Sample A

Sample B

Y: *

0,997

Cp:*

DH@:

Checks

Pre

Post

Sample A Sample B Sample A Sample B

Vacuum{jn Hg):*
Leak Ratef
Leak Rate %:

l| 23

10.0005

10.0004

|0,0004

10.0007

0.05

0.04

| 0.05

0.08

StackTC: |o |v| Ves v

Defaults

tstd *

68 Pstd :-= I 29.92 % CO

SorbentTrapTC: Yes v Yes v
Probe TC: Yes v | Yes v

|Yes |-v | |Yes |v|

Fuel Type: |Wood Bark
Fd

9600

F w

1920

Vic Components ;

Sample A: | 0~

Sample B: ] 0~

Fields marked with * are required to calculate emissions / concentrations.

Stack Gas Parameters

Flow Rate dscfm(Qsd): |
Temperaturefts): [~~
% H20:
Concentrations

% C02: * |~
% 02: * '

{run ID if used)

- User Entered -

8 - User Entered ¦

11.46 - User Entered-

Figure 46- Paired Train Manual Method: Header Data

Figure 46 shows the layout of the paired train "Header Data" tab. Below are descriptions of
the fields for both methodologies. Fields present in only one methodology will be identified.

Analytical SetUp:

The analytical Set up area is only present in the paired train
sampling methodology. Information included in the
"Analytical Set Up" area provides the critical parameters
the analyst established during the initial instrument
calibration in preparation for the analysis. Except for the
"Run Technician" name, every data element is used in the
acceptance assessment of the sample results.

F.RT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-52

-------
Lab Reported MDL:

The laboratory must establish their minimum detection limit
(MDL). Method 30B requires that the MDL must be
determined at least once for the analytical system using an
MDL study such as that found in section 15.0 to Method
301.

Low Point of the Calibration Curve:

High Point of the Calibration Curve:

Est MDL from breakthrough results:

Expected Mass of Hg to be collected:

Run Technician Name:

Mercury Mass Units:

Gas Meter Units:

This is the lowest mass which the technician selects for
calibration of the analytical instrument. Method 3 OB states
that the lowest point of the calibration curve should be five
and preferably ten times the MDL. Since Method 30B
includes an acceptance criterion that a valid analysis result
must be within the calibration range, the low point of the
calibration curve establishes the minimum analytical result
which meets the acceptance criteria.

This is the highest mass which the technician selects for
calibration of the analytical instrument. As with the low
point of the calibration curve, the high point of the
calibration curve establishes the maximum analytical result
which meets the acceptance criteria.

This value is a calculated value based upon the trap 2
results. The estimated MDL multiplies the standard
deviation of the trap 2 mass by the one tailed t-value at the
99% significance level with a degree of freedom of the
number of samples less one.

This is the mass value of Hg expected to be collected in
Section 1 of the sample trap. The expected mass is used to
assess the acceptability of the spike level used during the
field recovery test. Method 30B section 8.2.6.1 indicates
that the pre-sampling spike mass must be within 50 tol50
percent of this expected mass.

This field is the name of the person that operated the
equipment used to collect the sample. (Optional)

This field provides the metric units associated with all the
reported mass values used in the sample data tab. Metric
mass values available range from grams (g) to picograms
(pg). You should select mass units which will display the
trap two values with at least number in the one place.

This is the units that the dry gas meter displays. The ERT
limits selection to liters, cubic meters and cubic feet. You
should select the display units for the gas meters used to
collect the sample and shown on the point datasheet.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-53

-------
Sampling Media Information: This area is only present in the paired train sampling

methodology. Information in this area is used to identify the
supplier of the sampling media, analytical instrumentation,
the analyst and the analysis method.

Trap Manufacturer: This is the manufacturer of the sample cartridge or sleeve

containing a sorbent media (typically activated carbon
treated with iodine or some other halogen) with multiple
sections separated by an inert material such as glass wool.
These sorbent traps are optimized for the quantitative
capture of elemental and oxidized forms of Hg and can be
analyzed by multiple techniques.

Trap Analysis Source: This is the combined equipment and apparatus used to

perform sample analyses. This includes any associated
sample preparation apparatus e.g., digestion equipment,
spiking systems, reduction devices, etc., as well as analytical
instrumentation such as UV AA and UV AF cold vapor
analyzers.

Analysis Technician: This is the name of the person operating the trap analysis

equipment. (Optional)

This is information to identify the method used extract,
prepare and analyze the collected samples. Recovery
techniques may include acid leaching, digestion, and
thermal desorption/direct combustion. Example analytical
techniques include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet atomic
fluorescence (UV AF), ultraviolet atomic absorption (UV
AA) with and without gold trapping, and X-ray
fluorescence (XRF) analysis.

Information provided in the equipment ID area is used to
identify specific pieces of equipment used for the test
run. Identifiers which may be used include but are not
limited to manufacturers' product name and serial
numbers or test company identification numbers.

The dry gas meter is the piece of hardware responsible for
quantifying the volume of gas passing through the meter.
Typically, this is a diaphragm or bellows meter. The
bellows in the meter drive an odometer-like counter
indicating the total volume of gas which has passed through
the meter. The ID is necessary for calibration
documentation purposes. (Optional)

The control console describes the combination of the dry
gas meter, pumps, temperature controllers, manometers,
pressure transducers and vacuum gauge. The ID is

Analysis Method:

Equipment ID:

Dry Gas Meter:

Control Console:

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-54

-------
necessary for calibration documentation purposes.
(Optional)

Umbilical:

StackTC:

TedlarBag:

OrsatPump:

Probe/Pitot:

Nozzle:

Filters:

FilterNuml:

FilterNum2:
FilterNum3:
Calibration:

This is the sample gas transport line from the sample box
to the control console or meter box. The umbilical
usually consists of bundled tubing, thermocouple,
electrical lines, etc., used to control the probe and sample
box filter temperatures. The Umbilical ID is present only
on the "Single Train" headertab. (Optional)

This is the ID of the y for calibration documentation
purposes.

This is the ID of a Tedlar bag, if used. The Tedlar bag ID
is present only on the "Single Train" header tab.
(Optional)

This is the ID of the pump used for filling a Tedlar bag,
for example. The Orsat Pump ID is present only on the
"Single Train" header tab. (Optional)

This is the sample probe and or Pitot equipment
identification number. The Pitot is the piece of hardware
used to measure the velocity pressure of the stack gas.
The ID is necessary for calibration documentation
purposes.

The nozzle ID is necessary for calibration documentation
purposes. The Nozzle ID is present only on the "Single
Train" header tab.

Information provided in the filters area is used to identify
the specific filter used for the test run. The numbers
assigned to each of the filters is necessary for associating
laboratory analyses with the specific test program. Since
filters are notused with the paired train methods which
can be documented in the ERT, the filter numbers are
present only on the "Single Train" headertab.

For particulate sampling, enter the filter's unique
identification number.

This is for the second filter ID, if two filters are used.

This is for the third filter ID, if three filters are used.

Documenting equipment IDs allows for the calibration
data for the specific equipment used in sampling to be
included with the test data.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-55

-------
Y:

DH@:

Cp:

Dn (in):

This is the dry gas meter correction coefficient, gamma,
of an isokinetic sampling train meterbox (such as used for
Method 5 sampling). The value is determined by the
calibration of the dry gas meter with a volume device
traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST). The units of gamma are
dimensionless and should be between 0.95 and 1.05.

Delta H @ (AH@) is the orifice pressure differential in
inches of H2O of an isokinetic sampling train meterbox
(such as used for Method 5 sampling) that correlates to
0.75 cfm at 528°R and 29.92 in Hg.

The Pitot tube coefficient for an S-type Pitot can range
from 0.80 to 0.88 but is usually between 0.84 and 0.864.
The default value allowed for S-type Pitot meeting the
Method 2 design specification and which have not been
calibrated is 0.84. Any S- type Pitot with a Cp other than
0.84 should also include documentation of calibration by
the procedure described in Section 10 of Method 2. The
Cp for a standard Pitot is 0.99.

The nozzle diameter is measured in inches. Since at this
time the nozzle diameter is not needed with the paired
train methods which can be documented in the ERT, the
nozzle diameter is present only on the "Single Train"
header tab.

Checks:

Vacuum- Pre & Post:

The following parameters refer to leak checking of
various equipment components. "Pre" refers to checks
done before the start of a run, "mid" is in reference to
checks performed sometime during the run (such as
between port changes), and "post" means after the run.
For paired train sampling, there are fields for
documenting checks for both sample trains verses a
single sampling train system.

The vacuum at which the pre and post sampling train leak
checks were performed.

Leak Check Total Volume, Mid:

For single sampling trains, this is the total volume recorded
by the dry gas meter (DGM) during all leak checks
performed between the pre-test and post-test leak checks.
This volume is subtracted from the total sample volume
recorded for the test run. These leak checks are typically
conducted during sampling port changes. Since the ERT
capable test method which requires paired sampling trains
does not allow for leak checks with port changes this field
is present only on the single train "Header Data" tab.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-56

-------
Leak Rate- Pre & Post:

Pitot- Pre, Mid, & Post:
Nozzle- Pre, Mid, & Post:
Stack TC- Pre, Mid & Post

Defaults:

Tstd:

Pstd:

% CO:
Fuel Type:

These include the pre- and post-test sampling train leak
check rates. For Method 5, the post-test leak rate must be
less than or equal to 0.02 acfm. For paired sampling trains,
both sampling trains must have leak rates below 4%. The
pre-test leak rate is compared to the initial sampling rate
and the post-test leak rate is compared to the average
sampling rate.

These include the pre, mid, and post-test leak check results,
as applicable. This field is present only on the single train
"Header Data" tab.

These are pull-down selections for nozzle inspections for
dents, nicks, etc. This field is present only on the single
train "Header Data" tab.

These include the pre, mid, and post-test results of the
thermocouple check, as applicable. Since the ERT capable
test method which requires paired sampling trains also
requires the recording of sorbent trap and probe
temperatures, there are checks for these thermocouples.

The following parameters refer to the EPA standards.

This is the standard temperature which defaults to EPA
standard of 68 degrees F. When the test method
performed requires the use of a different standard
temperature, the "68" in this field should be changed to
the temperature specified.

This is the standard pressure which defaults to EPA
standard of 29.92 inches of mercury. When the test
method performed requires the use of a different standard
pressure, the "29.92" in this field should be changed to
the pressure specified.

This is the carbon monoxide percentage which defaults to
zero (0).

The selection of the Fuel Type with this drop-down menu
populates the three F-factor fields below this selection
with the values presented in Table 19-2 of EPA Method
19. In addition, "Override" may be selected and fuel
specific F-factors as calculated by equations 19-13, 19-14
and 19-15 in EPA Method 19 may be entered in the
appropriate F-factor field. The values entered are based
upon an ultimate analysis of the fuel or combination of
fuels using equations 19-16, 19-17 and 19-18 of EPA
Method 19.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-57

-------
Fd:

The value "Fd" is the ratio of the quantity of dry effluent
gas generated by combustion to the gross calorific value
of the fuel. When combined with the oxygen
concentration, the emission rate in lb/MMBtu can be
calculated from the dry pollutant emissions concentration.
By selecting the fuel type, the F-factor, "Fd," from US
EPA Reference Method 19 is populated in this field. If
override is selected, the user should enter the "Fd" as
calculated by equation 19-13 or 19-16 of US EPA
Reference Method 19.

Fw:

The value "Fw" is the ratio of the quantity of wet effluent
gas generated by combustion to the gross calorific value
of the fuel. When combined with the wet oxygen
concentration and the moisture concentration, the
emission rate in lb/MMBtu can be calculated from the
wet emissions concentration. By selecting the fuel type,
the F-factor, "Fw," from US EPA Reference Method 19
is populated in this field. If override is selected, the user
should enter the "Fw" as calculated by equation 19-14 or
19-17 of US EPA Reference Method 19.

Fc:

The value "Fc" is the ratio of the theoretical carbon
dioxide produced during combustion to the higher heating
value of the fuel combusted. When combined with the
carbon dioxide, the emission rate in lb/MMBtu can be
calculated from either the wet or dry emissions
concentration. By selecting the fuel type, the F-factor,
"Fc," from US EPA Reference Method 19 is populated in
this field. If override is selected, the user should enter the
"Fc" as calculated by Equation 19-15 or 19-18 of US
EPA Reference Method 19.

Ambient:

Pb:

Pstatic:

Information provided in this area is used to identify
ambient air surrounding the sampling location.

The barometric pressure of the sampling location. If the
pressure is reported to sea level conditions, adjust the
pressure for the elevation of the location above sea level.
A 0.1 inches Hg decrease for every 100 feet of elevation
is typically used.

The static pressure, inches of water, of the sampling
location.

Temperature:

Ambient Temperature in degrees F. The ambient
temperature field is present only on the single train
"Header Data" tab.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-58

-------
Vic components

Initial Final

Impinger 1: I BSB [ 548.5 \

Impinger 2: I 704.3 [ 71l72]

Impinger 3: ! 492,4' 499. l!

Impinger 4: [ 0| o|

Impinger 5: | o] [ o]

Impinger 6: 1 0 | o]

Silica Gel: | 744.9j | 758.8|

Change Vic?

Do you to replace the current Vic value with this value: 11.9999023437499?

Figure 47- Mass of liquid colluded sub menu

Vic Components: The following parameters refer to "Vic." where "Vic" is

the mass of liquid condensate. The "Vic" is the mass of
water condensed from the sample gas and collected in the
impingers of an isokinetic sampling train.

Vic: Click on "Vic Components" button on the single train

"Header Data" tab to open a form shown in Figure 47 -
Mass of liquid collected sub menu, to enter "Vic
Components", Enter the values for the initial volume or
mass and final volume or mass for up to 6 Impingers and
the silica gel. When complete, click on "Close". A
prompt will appear with the new calculated "Vic" value
to verify that the current "Vic" value should be replaced
with the new "Vic" value. Click "Yes" to replace current
value. Click "No" to close without replacing the current
"F7c" value. If you selected "Yes" to the prompt the
" Vic" value will populate the " F7c" data field in the
header date tab. The paired train header tab does not have
the capability to document individual impinger contents
at this time.

Stack Gas Parameters: This area is only present in the paired train sampling

methodology. Information in this area link the flow rate,
stack temperature and moisture to a different run like
Method 5 or Method 29. These values should be calculated
in an isokinetic train. "User entered" can also be used to
add the data, if the method utilized is not available in the
ERT.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-59

-------
Flow Rate dscm (Qsd):

Flow rate of the stack gas tested in dry standard cubic
meters.

Temperature (ts):
% H20:

Concentrations:

% C02:

% 02:

Micromanometer ID:

Temperature of the stack gas tested in Fahrenheit.

Moisture content of the stack gas tested in percent.

The following two parameters refer to the concentrations
of carbon dioxide and oxygen in the gas stream as measured
by one of several other test methods'

The carbon dioxide percent of the gas stream tested. The
pull- down to the right of the field for the CO2
concentration provides access to the results of
instrumental measurements of CO2.

The oxygen percent of the gas stream tested. The pull-
down to the right of the field for the O2 concentration
provides access to the results of instrumental
measurements of O2.

This area is only present in the single train sampling
methodology. This is the identification number of the
micromanometer.

Sensitivity:

This is the units of inches of water column.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-60

-------
Point Data Tab

Environ Mental Concious Furniture Co.

¦stack - Method 29

Method 29 - 2

Add New Run Data

Change Run Number

Poii »

BeginTirr -

indTirr -

Clock .

GasMeter ^

DeltaP -

OrificePresDesii

3:31 00 PM

741 792

0.28

1 26

3:35:00 PM

743.955

0 28

1.26

3 39 00 PM

746 118

0 31

1.39

16;

3 43 00 PM

748 281

0.31

1.39

16:

20;

3:47:00 PM

750-444

0.29

1.30

20f

24'

3 51:00 PM

752.608

0.29

1.30

24.

3 55 00 PM

754.771

0.2

0 90

3 59 00 PM

756.934

0.2

0 90

4 03 00 PM

759.097

0.29

1.30

4:07 00 PM

761.260

0.29

1.30

4 11 00 PM

763.423

0.3

1.35

48;

4 15 00 PM

765.586

0.3

1.35

4:19.00 PM

767 749

0.27

1.21

521

ssT

4 23 00 PM

769.912

0.27

1.21

M |

Figure 48 - Isokinetic Method: Point Data Tab

Although the point data for single train and paired train sampling are similar, the point data
screen for paired trains provides additional columns for documenting comparable
information for the duplicate components for the combined test train The point data for the
single sampling train may be imported from the spreadsheet. Data for both the single sample
train and the paired sampling train can be manually entered in the point data tab (Figure 48
and 49). Use the side and bottom scroll bars to view more information. Recall at any time
you can change the width of the columns in Access by placing the cursor over the split
between the columns and clicking and dragging the column to the desired width.

m Run Data Details

[Environ Mental Concious Furniture Co.

Open Expanded

Method Setup | Header Data Point Data j Sample Date | Stack Data Results ] Emission | QA/QC ]

Point •
ID5
4

J—

lA5

1b5

]C5

BeginTii • EndTim • Clock - GasMeterA - GasMeterB • DeltaP - OrificePres - OrificePres » StackTer - StackTt - jProbeTempA - ProbeTempB - 1>

3l
6|
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30|
36

3 11:

6 11:

9 11:
12 12:
15 12

18 12.

21 12:
24 12:
27 12:

30 12:

33 12
42 12:
36 12:
39 12:

45 12:
48 19

52:48 AM

55 41 AM
58:34 AM
01:26 PM
04:19 PM
07.12 PM
10:05 PM
12:58 PM
15:50 PM
18:43 PM
21:36 PM
30:14 PM
24 29 PM
27:22 PM
33:07 PM
ifi nn pm

204.870
205.578

206.280
206.973
207.675
208.374
209.070
209.769
210.471
211 170
211.863
212.568
213.279

213 972

214 671
215.367
?i fin??

144.810
145.587

146.367
147.141
147.918
148.689
149.460
150.237
151.014
151.794
152.565
153.339;
154.116
154.887
155.658
156.429
157 ?nfi

0 163

0.151

0 134

1.63

1.49

1 657
1 433
1.342
1.697
1 638
1 732
1.671
1 504
1 743
1.417
1 786
1.468
1.448
1.621
1.611
1 4?R

204

203
202
200
204:
206
206

205

204
208
218

204

203
202
200

204
206
206^

205
204
208

218

219
217
215'

248
246

243
241

249
251
252;
246

244
260
253
262
256

248
246

243
241

249

251

252
246

244
260

253
262
256

Figure 49- Paired Sample Train Point Data Tab
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-61

-------
Below is a description of the column fields:

Point:

BeginTime:
EndTime:

Clock:
GasMeter:

DeltaP:

OrificePresDesired:

OrificePresActual:

StackTemp:

The sampling point label, such as Al, A-l, D-2, etc.

The cumulative sampling time that sampling at the sample point was
started, in minutes. Port changes DO NOT reset the timeto zero (0).

The cumulative sampling time, in minutes, that sampling at the sample
point was ended, and is the begin time plus the sampling time per point.
Values in end time are used in calculating Net Run Time and isokinetics.

The actual clock time at the start of sampling at a point.

The dry gas meter volume reading at the beginning of the sampling at a
point. This means that the final volume reading is recorded in a row
without a point label and no other recorded point data. Sometimes the
sampling data is recorded at the end of sampling at a point which would
require that the first volume reading is recorded without any other
sampling data. Values in "Gas Meter" are used in the calculation of
sample volume metered, standard sample volume metered, isokinetics,
calculated moisture content of sampled gas stream, dry mole fraction of
water, wet molecular weight of gas stream, velocity of gas stream, and
actual and standard stack gas flow. For paired sample train tests there are
two columns for recording the gas meter volumes.

The velocity pressure (delta p) expressed in inches of water. Values in
"Delta P" are used in the calculation of isokinetics, average delta p,
velocity of gas stream and actual and standard stack gas flow.

This is the orifice pressure setting required for sampling isokinetically,
measured by inches water. For paired sample train tests there are two
columns for recording the desired orifice pressure.

Orifice pressure sampled or reached, measured by inches of water. The
values in the "Orifice Pressure Actual" are used in the calculation for "Delta
Ft," sample volume corrected to standard conditions, isokinetics, moisture
percentage, dry mole fraction of water, velocity of gas stream and actual and
standard stack gas flow. For paired sample train tests there are two columns
for recording the actual orifice pressure.

Stack temperature is the temperature of the effluent gas at the sampling
point and is expressed as degrees F. The values in the stack temp are used
in the calculation for isokinetics, moisture percentage at saturation, dry
mole fraction of water, wet molecular weight of sampled gas stream,
average stack temperature, velocity of gas stream, and actual and standard
stack gas flow. For paired sample train tests there are two columns for
recording the stack temperature.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-62

-------
ProbeTemp:

Trap Temp:

FilTempIn:

This is the temperature of the sampling probe, degrees F. For paired
sample train tests there are two columns for recording the probe
temperature.

This is the temperature of the sample collection traps, degrees F. For
paired sample train tests there are two columns for recording the trap
temperature. There is no column for trap temperature for single train
sample methods.

This is the filter temperature entering the filter box or compartment,
degrees F. All filter temperatures should be the temperature measured by a
thermocouple in direct contact with the sample gas. Where a sampling
protocol requires the monitoring of two filter temperatures, this may be
used as the exit gas temperature for the first filter. For example, this would
be the Method 5 filter temperature for a combined Method 5 and Method
202 sampling train.

FilTempOut: This is the filter temperature exiting the filter box or compartment,

degrees F. Where a sampling protocol requires the monitoring of two filter
temperatures, this may be used as the exit gas temperature for the second
filter. For example, this would be the Method 202 filter temperature for a
combined Method 5 and Method 202 sampling train.

FinalExitTemp:

DryGasInlet:
DryGasOutlet:

Pump Vac:

This is the temperature of sample gas exiting silica gel impinger, degrees
F. For paired sample train tests there are two columns for recording the
final exit temperature.

This is the dry gas meter inlet gas temperature, expressed as degrees F.

This is the dry gas meter outlet gas temperature, expressed as degrees F.
The values in the dry gas outlet are used in the calculation for dry gas
meter temperature, sample volume corrected to standard conditions,
isokinetics, moisture percentage of stack gas, dry mole fraction of water,
wet molecular weight of sampled gas stream, average stack temperature,
velocity of gas stream and actual and standard stack gas flow. For paired
sample train tests there are two columns for recording the dry gas outlet
temperature.

This is the vacuum of the sampling pump, measured in inches of mercury.
For paired sample train tests there are two columns for recording the pump
vacuum.

SampleRate: This is the sampling rate, measured in cubic ft per min. For paired sample

train tests there are two columns for recording the sampling rate. For
paired sample train tests this is in the units of measure selected on the
"Header Data" tab and is a required field which is used in the quality
analysis of the test.

Notes: These are any observations or comments concerning the test run.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-63

-------
Lab Data Tab

PH Run Data Details

Environ Mental Conbous Furniture Co.

¦stack - Method 29

Add New Run Data [ Delete Run Data
Change Run Number I Change Run Date

Figure 50- Isokinetic Method: Lab Data Tab

The single sample "Lab Data''' screen presents a limited amount of information and the
comparable paired sample screen is named "Sample DataEnter the lab data for each
compound. Below is a description of the single sample "Lab Data" fields:

Compound: Analyte name from the "Setup" window.

Mass: Sample catch weight reported from the lab.

Units: The mass units, including: gm (grams), mg (milligrams), ug (micrograms), ng

(nanograms) or pg (picograms).

Flag: Lab quantifier comment about the sample data, which may be ND, EMPC, J, etc.

EMC Guidance document GD-051F recommends using the following flags for
stack test results which have multiple reported fractions: BDL (below detection
level) - all analytical values used to calculate and report an in- stack emissions
value are less than the laboratory's reported detection level(s); DLL (detection
level limited) - at least one but not all values used to calculate and report anin-
stack emissions value are less than the laboratory's reported detection level(s); and
ADL (above detection level) - all analytical values used to calculate and report an
in-stack emissions value are greater than the laboratory's reported detection
level(s).

Comments: Observations or comments. EMC Guidance document GD-051F recommends the
reporting of individual components and laboratory detection level(s) in the
comment field. Each component should be provided in the order of the sampling
train with comas separating the individual values. Values which are below the

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-64

-------
detection limit should be enclosed with brackets and the value proceeded with a
less than sign. For example, a four-fraction sample would be reported as 0.036,
[<0.069], 1.239, [<0.945], It is suggested that the method to address below
detection level results should be included in the comment field as well as a
summary of the methodology used to establish the detection level.

Sample Data Tab

r§l Run Data Details

Sample A

Sample B

Trap ID:

Section 1 Hg Mass (ml /ms), ind. plug

Section 1 Spike Value (Mspiked)

Section 1 Spike Recovery (Crec)

Section 1 Spike Recovery Mass

Section 1 Recovery Percentage (R)

Section 2 Hg Mass (M2)

Section 2 Breakthrough (%B)

Initial sampling rate

Average sampling rate

Maximum deviation from sampling rate

Total Sample Volume (Vt)

Spl Vol deviation from field recovery run

Sample Mercury Mass Collected

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cd)

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cw)

60.00

3.9862E+00
6.1786E+01
102.976

1.5001 ng

3.500

2.586 %
2.3300E-01 l/min
2.4555E-01 l/min

6.9 %
1.4000E-02 M3
252.9 %
5.9500E+01 ng

ug/dscm
ug/scm

2.778
2.5800E-01
2.7150E-01
6.2

1.5500E-02
218.7
6.9500E+01

l/min
l/min

4.2500E+00

1.0850E+00

Test Run Mercury Concentration

Paired trap agreement relative deviation (RJ

4.4839E+00

ug/dscm

1.1450E+00

ug/scm

4.3670E+00 ug/dscm

2.6777 %

Figure 51 - Paired Sample Train: Sample Data Screen

For paired sample trains, the "Sample Data" screen contains only eight fields for the user to
provide information. The remaining information presented is intermediate calculations and
final calculated results based upon the user entered information.

Below is a description of the user entered and calculated fields:
Trap ID:

This is usually an alphanumeric code as required by
section 6.1.1 of Method 3 0B which uniquely
identifies a cartridge or sleeve containing a sorbent
media with two sections separated by an inert
material.

Section 1 HgMass:

This is the mass determined by the analysis of the first
section of the sorbent trap and the inert separation
material. The units of measure displayed after the date
entry fields are the units selected on the paired train
"Header Data" screen.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-65

-------
Section 1 Spike Value:

Section 1 Spike Recovery:

Section 1 Spike Recovery Mass:

This is the mass which was spiked (added) to "Section
1" of one of the pairs of traps used for the Field
Recovery Test. All spiked samples will be one of the
tests for the "Field Recovery Study." The mass spiked
should be between 50 and 150 percent of the expected
mass collected on the unspiked samples.

For samples which were spiked, the concentration
calculatedby Method 30B Equation 30B-6 is
presented. The units of measure are |ig/dscm.

For samples which were spiked, the product of the
spike recovery concentration and the volume of gas
sampled are presented. The units of measure are those
selected in the "Header Data" screen.

Section 1 Recovery Percentage:

For samples which were spiked, the percentage of
spike mass recovered calculated by Method 30B
Equation 30B-7 is presented. While there are no
specifications for individual recoveries, the average of
all the Field Recovery tests should be between 85%
and 115%.

Section 2 HgMass:

Section 2 Breakthrough:

This is the mass determined by the analysis of the
second section of the sorbent trap. The units of
measure displayed after the entry fields are the units
selected on the "Header Data" screen. You should
adjust the units of measure on the "Header Data"
screen such that all figures for the mass are visible
within the three visible decimal places of this field.

This is the breakthrough percentage from the section 1
mass. Method 30B Equation 30B-2 calculates
breakthrough by dividing the Section 1 sorbent trap
results by the Section 2 sorbent trap results. The units
of measure are percent. The acceptability of the
breakthrough percentage is dependent on the average
concentration for the test run.

Initial Sampling Rate:

This is the initial sample flow rate entered in the point
data by the source tester. This value will be used to
assess the acceptability of the Pre-test leak rate and the
ability of the source tester to maintain this sampling
rate during the test period. The units of the sampling
rate are those selected in the "Header Data" screen.

Average Sampling Rate:

This is the average sampling rate achieved by the
source tester during the run. This value will be used to
assess the acceptability of the Post-test leak rate and

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-66

-------
the ability of the source tester to maintain this
sampling rate during the test period. The units of the
sampling rate are those selected in the "Header Data"
screen.

Maximum deviation from sampling rate:

Total Sample Volume:

Spl Vol deviation from field recovery run:

Sample Mercury Mass Collected:

This is the maximum sampling rate deviation from the
average sampling rate. While there are no criteria for
acceptability, this value is an indicator of the source
testers' ability to achieve the intent of the method to
maintain a constant sample flow rate. The units of the
deviation are in percent.

This is the total volume of gas sampled through the
collection traps. The units of this value are Cubic
Meters. This value will be compared to the average
sample volume collected during the "Field Recovery"
study tests.

This is the percentage deviation from the average
sample volume recorded for the "Field Recovery"
study tests. To meet the acceptability requirements of
Method 3OB Section 8.3.3.3, each test run must be
within 20 percent of the volume for the "Field
Recovery" study tests.

This is the sum of the mass collected on Section 1 and
Section 2 reduced by any mass spiked on Section 1.
The units of measure are those selected in the "Header
Data" screen.

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cd):

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cw):

Test Run Mercury Concentration:

This is the dry concentration of mercury measured by
each of the two sampling trains based upon the
"Sample Mass" collected and the "Total Volume
Sampled". The units of measure for the concentration
are in |ig/dscm.

This is the wet concentration of mercury measured by
the two sampling trains based upon the dry
concentration and the measured moisture content. The
units of measure for the concentration are in |ig/scm.

This is the average of the paired trap concentrations.
Although the values are displayed to five significant
figures users should base any decision on local policy
for rounding and use of significant figures. EPA
policy is that final values should be rounded to two or
three significant figures.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-67

-------
Paired Trap Agreement Relative Deviation: This is the relative difference between the two

samples as calculated by Method SOB Equation 3QB-
5. The unit of measure is percent. The criteria
specified in Method 3OB for acceptance depends upon
the average measured concentration.

Sampling/Stack Data Results Tab

h§] Run Data Details

adlity:

Open Expanded

J8.5 MMBtu/hr Wood-fired Boiler

J|staac Outlet - Method 5

_^J| Add New Run Data |

Delete Run Data

I Method 5-1

Change Run Number I Change Run Date

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Lab Data Sampling/Stack Data Results Cydone Cut Size Emissions

Method 5

Sampling Train Parameters:

NetRunTime (min):

% H20:

NetTravPts:

% H20sat:

Dn (in):

0.21

Mfd:

Cp:

0.84

%C02:

0.999

% 02:

Pb On Hg):

29.92

%CO +N2:

DeltaH On H20): [

1.63

Fo:

Vm (acf):

41.898

Md:

tm (F):

70.50

Ms:

Vmstd (DSCF):

41.826

Pg On H20):

Vic:

151.6

Ps On Hg):

Vwstd (WSCF):

7.15

tsO=):

%I:

100.8

Sqrt Delta P Avg

On H20):

Note: Double dick in fields to see the formulas

Figure 52- Isokinetic Method: Sampling/Stack Data Results Tab

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-68

-------
Pi] Run Data Details

~ X

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Sample Data Stack Data Results Emission QA/QC

Figure 53- Paired Sampling Trains: Stack Data Results Tab

This tab shows results for a specific run, which were calculated from data in the Header
Data and Point Data tabs. Except for the percent isokinetic field at the bottom left of the
Sampling/Stack Data Results tab as shown in Figure 52, the data elements displayed are
identical. Since the Paired Sampling trains have two independent sampling systems, the
paired sampling train Stack Data Results tab has a separate column for each sampling train
in the Sampling Train Parameters area as shown in Figure 53. None of the fields are
editable.

By placing your mouse over either the abbreviations or the data fields and pausing for about
two seconds, a popup tip will appear explaining the abbreviations. This feature is not used
for either "Net Run Time" or "Net Traverse Points" as these are easily deciphered.

Click the "View All Runs" button to display a print-ready window showing the results from
all runs in a side-by-side manner.

Below is a description of thefields:

NetRunTime: Net time in minutes of run.

NetTravPts: Net number of traverse points.

Dn: Diameter of nozzle, inches.

Cp: Pitot coefficient.

Y: Meter box coefficient, Gamma.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-69

-------
Pb: The barometric pressure of the sampling location, inches of mercury.

DeltaH: DGM orifice pressure differential, inches of water.

Vm: Sample Volume metered, actual cubic feet.

Tm: Dry gas meter temperature, degrees Fahrenheit.

Vmstd: Sample volume corrected to standard conditions, DSCF.

Vic: Equivalent volume of liquid water collected in moisture sample, ml.

Vwstd: Volume of water collected at standard conditions, SCF.

%I: Percent Isokinetic, percentage.

% H20: Calculated moisture content of sampled gas stream, percentage.

% H20sat: Calculated moisture content of saturated gas stream, percentage.

Mfd: Dry mole fraction, 1-BWS.

% C02: Carbon Dioxide concentration of sampled gas stream, percentage.

% 02: Oxygen concentration of sampled gas stream, percentage.

% CO + N2: Balanced gas concentration of sampled gas stream, percentage.

Fo: Ratio of excess oxygen and carbon dioxide. Calculation uses (20.9-
%02)/%C02

Md: Dry molecular weight of sampled gas stream, lbs/lb-mole.

Ms: Wet molecular weight of sampled gas stream, lbs/lb-mole.

Pg: Static pressure of sampled gas, inches of water.

Ps: Absolute pressure of sampled gas, inches of Hg.

Ts: Temperature of sampled gas, degreesF.

SqrtDeltaPavg: Square root of the average pitot tube differential pressure, inches of water.

Vs: Velocity of gas stream, feet per second.

Dstk: Diameter of exhaust, inches.

Dwdth: Width of exhaust, inches.

Dlngth: Length of exhaust, inches.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-70

-------
As:

Area of stack, feet squared.

Qsd: Dry volumetric flow rate of exhaust at standard conditions, DSCFM.

Qaw: Actual volumetric flow rate of exhaust, ACFM.

MMBtu/Hr: Heat Rate, mmBtu per hour.

Note: Fields with "#Error" is a result of missing or incomplete Run data. See the descriptions for
the point data columns to identify data entry errors that may cause one or
more field in the sampling results tab to display "#Error." Errors in the
sampling results may also be due to errors in one of the fields in
"Calibration," "Concentration," or mass of liquid components (Vic).

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-71

-------
Cyclone Cut Size Tab

31 Run Data Details — ~ X

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

! 1

Select Location - Method: |jej^

-Method 201A

v || Add New Run Data

Delete Run Data

1 Change Run Number 1

Change Run Date

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Lab Data Sampling/Stack Data Results Cydone Cut Size Emissions

Note: These results are only valid for Methods using PM10 and PM2.5 Cyclone Head!

Run # "V Point ~

RunTime

GasMeter -

Velocity -

DeltaPSqrt ~

Gas Velocity (ft/s) -

Gas Volume (dscf) -

Pt. to Pt. ISO. (%)

1 1

5.21

508.067

0.4

0.63

37.59

2.2

100.5

1 2

5.99

510.500

0.46

0.68

40.61

2.7

99.0

1 3

4.43

513.500

0.34

0.58

34.80

1.7

100.9

1 4

3.9

515.400

0.3

0.55

32.85

1.4

101.2

1 5

5.73

517.000

0.44

0.66

39.45

2.5

98.8

1 6

7.16

519.750

0.55

0.74

44.19

3.5

101.2

1 1

6.9

523.700

0.53

0.73

43.55

3.3

99.6

1 2

5.73

527.400

0.44

0.66

39.41

2.4

96.9

1 3

4.56

530.100

0.35

0.59

35.23

1.7

95.7

1 4

3.91

532.000

0.3

0.55

32.97

1.3

91.5

1 5

4.81

533.450

0.37

0.61

36.57

1.9

99.6

1 6

3.52

535.600

0.27

0.52

31.14

1.2

99.5

536.940

Figure 54 - Cylcone Cut Size Tab and Point to Point Isokinetic calculations
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-72

-------
These results are calculated for every isokinetic method. However, they are only intended
for methods using PM10 and PM2.5 cyclone heads. Click on the value to expand the value
to twelve positions to the right of the decimal. Select the Show Point to Point Isokinetics
Button for the Method 201A point-to-point isokinetic calculations.

Emissions Tab

i^al Run Data Details

Open Expanded

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Lab Data Sampling/Stack Data Results Cydone Cut Size Emissions

Associated ^
Process Run: •

Method:

RunNumber:

RunDate:

Compound

Filterable Particulate

Ib/mmBtuO:
2.76E-01

Record: H 1 of 1

Figure 55 - Emissions Tab

This tab shows the calculated emissions/concentrations for each compound by run.
Generally, these fields are not editable. Columns other than "Compound" are dependent on
the "Emissions / Concentrations" selected in the "Methods Setup" tab (Figure 44 -
Isokinetic Method: Method Setup Tab). If a process rate variable has been associated with
an emission rate, there will be an additional column which presents the process-based
emissions calculation. You will see the text "#Error" in this column until the test run has an
associated process rate selected. To calculate the process based emissions select the process
run using the drop-down menu in the far right salmon colored field below the text
"Associated Process Run" which is circled in Figure 55 - Emissions Tab. The "#Error" will
be replaced by the quotient of the test run emission rate divided by the process rate for the
selected process run.

Below is a description of a few of the more common column headings:

Compound: Analyte name from setup window.

Gr/dscf:

Grain per dry standard cubic feet.

Gr/dscf@7%02: Grain per dry standard cubic feet corrected to 7% Ch.
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-73

-------
Elb/hr:

Pounds per hour.

Elb/Tons of...:

Pounds per Ton of ... The full text of the divi sor (Tons of ...) is dependent
on the choice of process variable selected under the "Process Rate
Parameter" heading of the "Emissions / Concentration" area of the
"Method Setup" tab.

Paired Train QA/QC Tab

l-sl Run Data Detail

Method Setup Header Data Point Data Sample Data Stack Data Results Emission QA/QC
QA/QC Test or Specificatiof » Acceptance Criteria

Demonstrated Performance

Pre-test leak check

Post-test leak check

Sample flow rate.

<4% of target sampling rate The pre-test leak check for Sample A was 0.049% of the target (initial) sample rate
therefore meeting the acceptance criteria of <4% of target sampling rate. The pre-
test leak check for Sample B was 0.035% of the target (initial) sample flow rate
therefore meeting the acceptance criteria of <4% of target sampling rate.

<4% of average sampling
rate

Adjust the sampling flow
rate as necessary to
maintain the initial sample
flow rate.

The post-test leak check for Sample A was 0 l/min which is 0.047% of the average
sample flow rate of 1 l/min, and therefore met the acceptance criteria of <4% of
target sampling rate. The post-test leak check for Sample B was 0 l/min which is
0.076% of the average sample flow rate of 1 l/min, and therefore met the
acceptance criteria of <4% of target sampling rate.

The maximum flow rate variation for Sample A was 0% of the initial sample flow
rate of 1 l/min. The maximum flow rate variation for Sample B was 0% of the initial
sample flow rate of 1 l/min.

Test run total sample
volume.

Sorbent trap section 2
breakthrough

Within ± 20% of total
volume sampled during
field recovery test.

< 10% of section 1 Hg mass
for Hg concentrations > 1
Hg/dscm;< 20% of section
1 Hg massD or < 0.2 ng/dscm

The total volume sampled for Sample A was 0.05 M3 and for Sample B was 0.05 M3
verses the average sample volume of 0.05 M3 for the field recovery test spiked
samples. The maximum deviation of the total volume sampled was 2.1% of the
total volume sampled during the field recovery test. Both of the samples met the ±
20% acceptance criteria.

The average Hg concentration was < 1 |ig/dscm. The Hg in section 2 was 0.7 ng for
Sample A and 0.31 ^g for Sample B for breakthroughs of 0.675% for Sample A and
0.662% for Sample B, thus meeting the acceptance criteria of <20% of section 1 Hg
mass for Hg concentrations < 1 ng/dscm. For Sample A the Hg in section 2 was < 50%

Figure 56- QA/QC Tab

For paired sampling trains, there is a QA/QC tab (Figure 56) which identifies several of the
QA/QC specifications contained in the test method and the Acceptance Criteria specified in
the test method. In addition, the last column has text which describes the specific conditions
for deciding the acceptability criteria and an acceptability assessment. Because of
differences in display of numbers by the software, and variations in the rounding and
significant figures conventions of different programs, the values presented show more
decimal places than necessary. The acceptability assessment uses EPA's criteria of carrying
all digits through the calculations and rounding to two significant places except when
otherwise indicated. It is assumed that acceptance criteria presented in the method with one
or two places are to be evaluated at two significant figures and that criteria presented in the
method with three places are to be evaluated at three significant figures.

Due to the length of the text, you may not be able to see all the information for a QA/QC
specification, you can adjust the row heights or column widths. Do this by placing your

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-74

-------
cursor in the row indicator on the left or column header above until the cursor changes to a
symbol indicating the ability to change the width or height.

QA/QC specifications which are assessed include:

• Pre-test leak check

• Post-test leak check

• Sample flow rate

• Test run total sample volume

• Sorbent trap section 2breakthrough

• Paired sorbent trap agreement

• Fi el d recovery te st

• Sample analysis

• Calibration Curve

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-75

-------
Instrumental Method Test Data
Method Setup Tab

hH Run Data Details

Open Expanded

Permitted Source ID/Description:

i i.

||93.5 MMBtu/hr Wood-fired Boiler

Select Location - Method:

Select Run:

I Method 10 - 1

Add New Run Data I Delete Run Data
Change Run Number I Change Run Date

Method Setup Calibrations ITM Run Results Emissions

Compounds for this Location / Method: ITM

Location
Stack Outlet

T| Test Method T| Target Parameter
Method 10 Carbon Monoxide

t NumTest Runs T Test Run Duration
9 21

Record: H 1 of 1

Add Target Parameters

Emissions / Concentrations for this Location / Method:

Location
Stack Outlet

Stack Outlet

Method
Method 10

Method 10

Units of Measure
ppm

ppm corrected

;ure t Corre T (

Corrected % T
0

Process Rate, Parametei

Figure 57 - Run Data Details for Instrumental Methods- Method Setup Tab

As mentioned on page 40, you must enter the instrumental method test data manually.

Begin by returning to the "Audit/Calibrations" tab in the "Setup / Test Plan* area. Update
or input the calibration gases certified cylinders information in Item 16, as shown in Figure
29 - Test Plan Audit/Calibrations Tab. When you update or input the calibration gas
cylinder information, you must enter a unique name in the "C>7//>" column for each gas that
was used in the emissions test. For cylinders which contain multiple calibration gases, you
can make the cylinder identification number unique with the addition of the compound and
range indicator (as an example see the names used under "Cj/ZD" in Figure 29). Once
unique cylinder identification is provided in the "CylID" column, you should insure that the
remainders of the columns contain the correct information as is documented by the
certificate provided by the cylinder supplier.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-76

-------
In addition, you must enter all the instrumental test method data required for any
Performance Specifications prior to entering the CEM data associated with the reference
method test runs.

Once you have performed the audit calibration update, the procedure is similar to inputting
isokinetic data with the exception that the tabs in the "Run Data Details" screen for
Instrumental Methods differ from those of the isokinetic methods screen. These tabs
include: "Method Setup " "Calibrations," "ITMRun Results," and "Emissions". While the
information in the "MethodSetup" and "Emissions" are identical to the isokinetic methods
screens, the differences in the test methods require different information than isokinetic test
methods.

To minimize data entry time and reduce data entry errors, it is suggested that the first
run be completed prior to adding subsequent test runs. The ERT uses information in the
completed test run to pre- populate the next test run. For example, all information in the
"Calibrations" tab is retained and selected information in the "/77V/ Run Results" tab is
transferred to the appropriate field for the next run if the Peach "Add Next Run" button
located at the lower right portion of the ITM Run Results Tab. Users can revise these pre-
populated fields if needed. In addition, to minimize warning messages, users should enter the
specific required information (like units) suggested in the below instructions before entering
the majority of the remaining information.

As is the case with the method setup screen for the isokinetic methods, the fields in this
section will be pre-populated based on information entered in the test plan. However, they
can be modified without returning to the test plan by using the following:

• View /Edit Location Information: Allows you to revise the test location
information supplied during the test plan development (see Figure 14 - Test
Location Information Panel for more information).

• Add Target Parameters: Allows you to add target parameters for this run at this
location/method (see Figure 16 - select Location, Method and Compounds for
more information).

• Add Emissions/Concentrations: Allows you to add emissions/concentrations for
this run at this location/method (see Figure 19 - Add Emissions/Concentrations for
more information).

• Delete Target Parameters or Emission/Concentrations . Highlight the row of the
emission/concentration by clicking on the gray cell to the left of the column named
location and press the keyboard "Delete" button.

• Delete Process Rate, Parameter. To delete the process rate, parameter you must
block all of the text in the field and then press the keyboard "Delete" button. It
should be noted that the process rate parameter should only be associated with an
emission rate and the time units (i.e. lb/hr, lb/min, lb/sec) should be the same for
both the emissions rate and the process rate.

• Change Process Rate Parameter . To add or change the process rate parameter,
click within the field and then on the down symbol (~ ) to reveal the drop-down list
of available process parameters. You should choose a process parameter only for
emissions rates that have the same time units as the emissions rate (i.e. tons of
material processed/hr).

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-77

-------
Calibrations Tab

Fg| Run Data Details — ~ X

Method Setup Calibrations rTM Run Results Emissions

Direct and System Calibrations:

Calibration Gas
Set: Mode Label

Cylinder Cert. Date Of

ID Value Response Error % Certification Expiration

§ Direct

Zero

IZero Air -2

v |

r °

0.00

Span
888,4

Low

V |

1 1

Mid

|CC325625-CO

V I

1451.1 |

444.3

-0.77

| 7/31/2017

| 7/31/2025

High

|CC360726

V I

1888.4 |

888.4

0.00

| 7/31/2017

| 3/16/2026

System

Zero

IZero Air -2

V 1

1 0 1

0.11

Upscale

(CC325625-CO

V |

1451.1 [

443

-0.15

| 7/31/2017

| 7/31/2025

Calibration Gas
Set: Mode Label

Cylinder Cert. Date Of

ID Value Response Error % Certification Expiration

0 Direct Zero
Low
Mid
High

Span

System Zero

Upscale

T^T

Figure 58 - Calibrations Tab

The results of the instrument calibration and system zero and span responses must be entered
in the "Calibrations" tab prior to data entry in the "/77V/Results" tab. In addition, you should
enter the "set" number that must not be zero and the "span " values for before you select any
calibration cylinders under "Cylinder //)". After entering a "set" number and "span" value,
select the "Cylinder ID" from the pick list. For each selected "Cylinder ID" the orange fields
will be automatically filled using information that was entered in the "Audit/Calibrations" tab
of the "Test Plan". You will note that when you select the "Cylinder ID," the ERT will display
an error percent in the yellow fields. Initially this value is based upon calculations using the
certification value and a response of zero. When you enter the actual response for the "Direct
and System Calibrations" you will note that the calculated error percent changes.

Note: Be sure to input the span value before inputting the responses; otherwise a non-fatal
error message is generated (which may be ignored).

Below is a description of the columns:

Calibration Set: The number used to associate this set of calibrations with the run data

entered in the "ITM Run Results" tab.

Calibration Mode: Direct or System.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-78

-------
Span:

Span concentration used to calculate percent bias and percent drift.
Generally, the span value is set at the concentration of the high-level
calibration gas although the value is dependent on the method being
used.

Gas Label:

Cylinder ID:

Cert. Value:

Direct Mode includes Zero, Low, Mid and High. System mode includes
zero and upscale. Calibration level of measurement range.

Cylinder identification number on the gas cylinder and any additional
label to make this identifier unique for the gasand concentration. This
field is populated by the selection of one of the available ID's entered in
the test plan section of the ERT.

Calibration gas certified concentration. This field is automatically
populated from the information entered in the test plan section of the
ERT.

Response: The analyzer's response to gas injection. This is the value measured by

the instrument when challenged with gas from the gas cylinder identified
in the Cylinder ID column.

Error %: Difference between certified value and analyzer measurement. Specific

calculation procedures are dependent on the reference method being
performed.

Date of Certification: Date cylinder received certification for use. This field is automatically

populated from the information entered in the test plan section of the ERT.

Date ofExpiration: Date cylinder certification expires. This field is automatically populated

from the information entered in the test plan section of the ERT.

ITM Run Results Tab

Enter the results from the test run. If you are correcting your result to % oxygen or % Carbon
dioxide, it would be best to enter those instrumental data first then you can link the data in the
subsequent instrumental data. If you followed the guidance presented in the first section of
"Instrumental Test Method Data" only one blank run was created. By completing the
information in the "ITM Run Results" for one run and adding new runs with the "Add New
Run" button on this page, much of the information on this page will be pre-populated on the
pages of the new runs. If "ITM Run Results" have been completed on some but not all runs
or if the number of runs entered is equal or greater than specified in the test plan, the "Add
New Run" button will be available on only the last run. If the "Add New Run" button is not
visible or each run had different calibrations, new runs can be added using the "Add New
Run Data" button near the top of the screen.

To complete the information on the "ITM Run Results" tab, it is suggested that the units for
"Cavg" be selected before selecting the calibration set or entering any system response
information. If you start entering data in the "Start Time" field, you can use the tab key to
progress through all data entry fields without using the mouse to change fields. If flow rate,

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-79

-------
moisture percent, C02 concentration percent or 02 concentration percent have been
documented in the ERT by other tests, you can select the test and run ID using the drop-
down menu to populate these fields (Figure 60 - ITM Run Results, stack Parameters and
Calibration Set selection). You should associate the test run data with the calibration gas set
by selecting the set from the "Set" pick list. Figure 59 - ITM Run Results Tab shows the use
of both the selection of other stack test results for populating the stack parameter
information and the use of the set pick list for associating calibration sets with the test run.
Enter the zero and upscale system responses for the pre- and post-test calibrations. Then
record the test run average concentration value measured by the instrument in LLCavg". The
value in LLCgas" will be calculated. If the source is a combustion unit you can select the fuel
type and the F-factors for that fuel will be populated in the orange field below the "Fuel
Type" selection field. If the "Fuel Type" option ^ Override" is selected, you can enter fuel
specific F-factors based upon an analysis of the combusted fuel.

hil Run Data Details

[facility name

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

Open Expanded

Method Setup Calibrations rTM Run Results Emissions

Run:

Run Date: [~ 8/14/2018

Start Time: | 7:00:00 AM
End Time: I 7:21:00 AM

ANALYZER

Make: | M and C
Model:

PMA22

Moisture, %: | 14.6
02, %: | 10.8235

OPERATING PARAMETERS

Operating Range: P
Units(%rppmrppb): [~~

S/N: f

0208105

No. Readings/Avg.: |~~
Time Interval of Data Recording: |~~

Fuel Type: |Wood Bark
Fd: ~

Fw:

9600

Fcf

1920

Calibration

Gas

Cylinder

Cert.

System

Set: Mode

Level

Value

Response

Bias %

Drift %

[ l^T Pre

Zero

]CC325625-02

1 0

0.03

| 0,38

Upscale CC354556

]10.29

| 10.2

| -0,19

Post

Zero

]CC325625-02

1 0

0.04

| 0,19

Upscale CC354556

110.29

10.27

| 0.14

| 0.33

Cavg: J 9.2 |%vw
Cgas: | 10.824 |%vd
Cgasw: | 9.2433 |%vw

Units
Units
Units

Figure 59 - ITM Run Results Tab

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-80

-------
Pal Run Data Details

P - Decatur Works

-1

[ Add New Run Data I

[ Delete Run Data ]

Change Run Number I Change Run

Method Setup Calibrations ITM Run Results Emissions

_ B X

Data |
iDate |

(Run Id's if selected from another run)

Run:

9 I

Flow Rate, SCFM:

0 11

- User Entered -

Run Date:

1/11/2012

Moisture, %: ["

0 ! i

- User Entered -

Start Time:

11:52:00 AM

C02, %:

° 1 1

- User Entered -

End Time:

12:12:00 PM

02,%: Q

4.4

Fo: ~~

ANALYZER

Make: [ C
Model:

S^M

OPERATING PARAMETER!

Operating Range
Units(%rppm,ppb)
No. Readings/Avg.

Time Interval of Avg.

- User Entered -
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method
Boiler AB8103 Outlet - Method

3A 02 -1
3A 02 - 2
3A 02 - 3
3A 02 - 4
3A 02 - 5
3A02-6
3A 02 - 7
3A 02 - 8
3A 02 - 9

4.6

4.5

4.6
4.4

4.3

4.4
4.4

Calibration
Set: Mode

Gas

Level

Cylinder
ID

Cert.
Value

System
Response

System
Bias %

3 v Pre Zero

Cavg: 25.66 ] |ppmvd

I Set Zero Cyl ID

Zero Cyl Resu

Hi Cyl ID Hi Cyl Results

Location Method

N2Z

02M-CC243€ 9.9

Boiler AB310! Method 3A 02

N2Z

02M-CC243S 9.9

Boiler AB810: Method 3A 02

N2Z

02M-CC243S 9.9

Boiler AB810! Method 3A 02

N2Z

02M-CC2436 9.9

Boiler AB810: Method 3A 02

N2Z

02M-CC243S 9.9

Boiler AB310! Method 3A02

N2Z

0.1

SOxM-SA 1Z 24.8

Boiler AB810! Method 6C

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810! Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810! Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810! Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810! Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810! Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810: Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810: Method 7E

N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810: Method 7E

18 N2Z

NOxM-SA 12 24.9

Boiler AB810: Method 7E

24.526 | jppmvd

' Units
Units

Add New Run

Figure 60 - ITM Run Results, stack Parameters and Calibration Set selection

If additional test runs are required and the "Add New Run" button is visible within the
green 'ITMRun Results'' screen, you can add the next run by clicking on this button. The
screen then updates with the next numbered run pre-populated in the run field. The run date
field will have the same run date. In addition, the "ANALYZER' section, the
"OPERATINGPARAMETER' section, the pre-test calibrations and the fuel type fields
will be pre- populated with information from the previous run. The start time, end time, flow
rate, moisture, CO2, O2, Post-test calibrations and "Cavg" will be empty. In addition to
entering data into the empty fields, you can revise any pre-populated fields or change the
calibration set.

If you select a run ID associated with the test you are viewing, or a Run ID from another test,
the Run ID will be automatically filled. If the ID is not associated, an alert box stating, "Data
type mismatch in criteria expression" will appear and the system will not record the run results.
If this happens, close the 'Run Data Details" screen and click on the "Data Details" tab's
"Run Data", Select the "Location - Method" and begin again.

You can click on'
data.

Delete Run Data" on "Run Data Details" screen to remove erroneous run

Field descriptions are below:

Run: Prefilled, but editable, number of run.

Run Date: Date run was performed.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-81

-------
Start Time: Hour-minute-second AM/PM that run was performed. Time can be

entered as 24-hour time or 12-hour time with the AM/PM extension and
the time will revert to the latter time format.

End Time: Hour-minute-second AM/PM that run was completed. Time can be

entered as 24-hour time or 12-hour time with the AM/MP extension and
the time will revert to the latter time format.

Flow Rate, SCFM: The standard cubic feet per minute volumetric flow rate.

Moisture, %: Percentage moisture in gas.

C02, %: Percentage carbon dioxide, CO2.

02, %: Percentage oxygen, O2.

Fo: Ratio of excess Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide. Calculation uses (20.9 -

%02)/%C02.

Analyzer Information

Make: Analyzer Make.

Model: Analyzer model number.

S/N: Serial Number of Analyzer.

Operating Parameters

Operating Range: Acceptable range of fluctuations of concentrations of analytes being

measured.

Units (%, ppm, ppb); Units used for the operating range.

No. Readings /Avg: Number of readings or average number of readings.

Time Interval of Avg: Time interval between readings.

Fuel Type: Drop-down menu of fuel types. The selection of the fuel type populates

the three F-factor fields below this selection with the values presented in
Table 19-2 of EPA Method 19. In addition, "Override" may be selected
and fuel specific F-factors as calculated by equations 19-13, 19-14 and
19-15 in EPA Method 19 may be entered in the appropriate F-factor.
The values entered are those calculated based upon an ultimate analysis
of the fuel or combination of fuels using Equations 19-16, 19-17 and
19-18 of EPA Method 19.

Fd: The value "Fd" is the ratio of the quantity of dry effluent gas generated

by combustion to the gross calorific value of the fuel. When combined
with the oxygen concentration, the emission rate in lb/MMBtu can be

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-82

-------
calculated from the dry pollutant emissions concentration. By selecting
the fuel type, the F-factor, "Fd", from US EPA Reference Method 19 is
populated in this field. If "Override" is selected, the user should enter
the "Fd" as calculated by Equation 19-13 or 19-16 of US EPA Reference
Method 19.

Fw: The value "Fw" is the ratio of the quantity of wet effluent gas generated

by combustion to the gross calorific value of the fuel. When combined
with the wet oxygen concentration and the moisture concentration, the
emission rate in lb/MMBtu can be calculated from the wet emissions
concentration. By selecting the fuel type, the F-factor, "Fw", from US
EPA Reference Method 19 is populated in this field. If "Override" is
selected, the user should enter the "Fw" as calculated by Equation 19-14
or 19-17 of US EPA Reference Method 19.

Fc: The value "Fc" is the ratio of the theoretical carbon dioxide produced

during combustion to the higher heating value of the fuel combusted.
When combined with the carbon dioxide, the emission rate in lb/MMBtu
can be calculated from either the wet or dry emissions concentration. By
selecting the fuel type, the F- factor, "Fc", from US EPA Reference
Method 19 is populated in this field. If "Override" is selected, the user
should enter the "Fc" as calculated by Equation 19-15 or 19-18 of US
EPA Reference Method 19.

Calibration Set: The number assigned to the set of readings. The number used to associate

this data to the data entered in "Calibrations" tab.

Calibration Mode: Pre (before) and post (after) readings.

Gas Label: Calibration level of measurement range, assigned as zero or upscale.

Cylinder ID: Cylinder identification number on the gas cylinder and label.

Cert. Value: Prefilled calibration gas certified concentration.

Instrument Response: The manufactured listing of the proper instrument response settings.

System Bias %: Calculated percentage of bias.

Drift %: Calculated percentage of drift.

Cavg: Average gas concentration displayed by gas analyzer.

Cgas: Average gas effluent concentration.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-83

-------
Emissions Tab

Pal Run Data Details

llfatility name

Facility:

Permitted Source ID/Description:

Open Expanded

Method Setup Calibrations ITM Run Results Emissions

Figure 61 - Emissions Tab

This shows the calculated emissions/concentrations for each compound by run. Column
headings other than "compound' are based upon the output units selected in the "Emissions /
Concentrations" area of the "Setup / Test Plan" or the "Method Setup" of the "Run Data
Details" screen (see Figure 57 - Run Data Details for Instrumental Methods- Method Setup
Tab).

Some of the more common column names are as follows:

Compound:
Elb/hr:

Elb/Million Btu:

ppm

ppm@7%02:

Analyte name from Setup window.

Emissions, pounds per hour.

Pounds per Million Btu... Units in this form are calculated from the emissions
rate (pounds per hour) and the process rate (Million Btu per hour) The full text
of the divisor (million Btu...) is dependent on the choice of process variable
selected under the "Process Rate Parameter" heading of the "Emission/
Concentration" area of the "Method Setup" tab.

Concentration, parts per million.

Concentration, pounds per million corrected to 7% Ch.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-84

-------
Lb/mmBtu02 The pounds per million Btu of fuel combusted when calculated using one of
theF-factors.

Performance Specification Data

The ERT calculates Continuous Emissions Monitoring Systems (CEMS) Relative Accuracy
Test Audits (RATAs) and Calibration Drift using the instrumental test method results from
ERT data entered for Method 3 A, Method 10, Method 7E or Method 6C as described above
and the manual entry of the continuous emissions monitoring systems data as described
below. The first step in the process is the addition of at least nine test runs of the applicable
reference method. The user should verify that the reference method emissions are in the
same units generated by the CEMS. Next, you should click on the "Add New Run Data" as
described in Chapter 5: Add New Run Data - Directly. When you select one of the
performance specifications, you will notice that the fields for "Run Number" and Run
Date" are no longer visible. Clicking on "Add Run Data" will create the forms for
documenting the performance specification. To enter data into the performance specification
forms you should select the performance specification from the "Select Location —Method'
menu. The performance specification "Run Data Details" screen as shown in Figure 62 -
Performance Specification Run Data Details will be displayed.

New feature in version 6 is the ability to use wet values for a RATA. Performance
Specification 2 requires the RATAs to be on a dry basis but we recognize the need for wet
RATA calculations. To use the wet value, place a check mark in the box to the left of Use
Wet Values.

Pi] Run Data Details — ~ X

CEMS Information and Run Data CEMS Calibration Drift Data

RA Start Date

1 7/18/2017 RA End Date | 7/18/2O1^0use Wet values ^

PPMv Standard

Lb/Hr Standard

Oxygen Correction

Lb/MMBTU Standard

PPM@02 Standard

Select MM BTU to Use Q2 v|

Enter related CEMS data for each reference method run

Ri ~

RunDate t

StartTimi t

EndTime t 02 t

Percer „ Lb/Hr , Lb/MMBTU

Exclude Run -r

8/14/2018

7:00 AM

7:21 AM

9.89

8/14/2018

7:22 AM

7:43 AM

9.7762

8/14/2018

7:44 AM

8:05 AM

9.7524

8/14/2018

8:45 AM

9:06 AM

10.1381

8/14/2018

9:07 AM

9:28 AM

10.0571

8/14/2018

9:29 AM

950 AM

8.9762

8/14/2018

10:23 AM

10:44 AM

8.881

8/14/2018

10:45 AM

11:06 AM

8.5333

8/14/2018

11:07 AM

11:28 AM

8.8905

Relative Accuracy Results

Figure 62 - Performance Specification Run Data Details
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-85

-------
There are two data entry screens for performance specifications. The one labeled "CEMS
Information and Run Data" is used to document the RATA data of the Plant CEMS, while the
one labeled "CEMS Calibration Drift Data" is used to document the performance of the seven-
day calibration drift evaluation. Figure 62 - Performance Specification Run Data Details is a
screen shot of the blank tab for entering RATA CEMS information and Figure 63 is a screen
shot of the blank tab for entering CEMS calibration drift information.

CEMS Information and Run Data

The RATA CEMS tab has two fields for the date of the relative accuracy assessment, five
fields for the entry of the applicable emissions limitations and three columns of fields for the
reported CEM emissions data. As shown in the columns labeled "Run," "RunDate,"
"StartTime" and "EndTime" are pre-populated with information from the reference method
test runs. The five columns for entry of CEMS data include "02", "PPM," "PPM@02,"
"Lb/Hr" and "Lb/MMBTU". The reference method emissions calculated by the ERT for
these pre-populated test run identifiers will be used in the calculations of the relative
accuracy but are not presented in this CEMS data entry screen.

Field descriptions for the "CEMS Information and Run Data" are as follows:

RA Start Date:

RA End Date:

PPMv Standard:
Oxygen Correction:
PPM@02 Standard:
Lb/Hr Standard:
Lb/MMBTU Standard:
Run:

Run Date:

This is the date of the first test run for evaluating the relative accuracy
of the CEMS.

This is the date of the last test run for evaluating the relative accuracy of
the CEMS.

This is the emissions limitation standard when the measured pollutant is
not corrected for dilution.

This is the oxygen concentration used to standardize the concentration
values for the measured pollutant.

This is the emissions limitation standard when the measured pollutant is
corrected for dilution using the measured oxygen concentration.

This is the emissions limitation standard when the measured pollutant is
expressed as an hourly emissions rate.

This is the emissions limitation standard when the measured pollutant is
expressed as a ratio of the mass emissions per unit of fuel energy.

These are the run numbers which are pre-populated from the reference
test method for the pollutant and the parameter used for correcting the
pollutant.

These are the dates of the test runs which are pre-populated from the
reference test method for the pollutant and the parameter used for
correcting the pollutant.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-86

-------
These are the start times of the test runs which are pre-populated from
the reference test method for the pollutant and the parameter used for
correcting the pollutant.

These are the end times of the test runs which are pre-populated from
the reference test method for the pollutant and the parameter used for
correcting the pollutant.

These are the uncorrected concentrations for the pollutant or diluent
measured by the CEMS during the reference method test runs. These
values are entered by the user.

These are the emissions rates in pounds per hour for the pollutant
measured by the CEMS during the reference method test runs. These
values are entered by the user.

These are the emissions factors in pounds per million Btu fuel
combusted for the pollutant or diluent measured by the CEMS during
the reference method test runs. These values are entered by the user.

This column contains boxes which may be checked to exclude runs
from the relative accuracy calculations. Up to three boxes may be
selected but at least nine runs must remain for calculation of the RA.
All runs (including those selected for exclusion) will be presented in the
RATA report. All runs which have not been excluded will be used to
calculate the relative accuracy.

Data entry is required in only those standards fields where there is an emissions limitation
for which the CEMS is used for measuring the pollutant of interest. Those fields for the other
units of emissions standards may be left empty. Users are required to enter CEMS data only
for the units of emissions of the standards which apply to the tested source. If there are
emissions limits in two or more sets of units, the user will need to enter data for all the units
of standards which apply. When an emissions standard in units of PPM corrected to a
specified oxygen level is used, data entry is required for EPA Method 3 A for 02, the
reference method for the pollutant, the CEMS 02 concentration and the uncorrected CEMS
pollutant concentration. The ERT will use the diluent concentrations to calculate the
corrected pollutant concentrations.

Start Time:

End Time:

PPM:

Lb/Hr:

Lb/MMBTU:

Exclude Run:

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-87

-------
CEMS Calibration Drift Data

II Run Data Details - h X

CEMS Information and Run Data CEMS Calibration Drift Data

Enter Calibration Drift Data

Calibration Drift Results

Figure 63 - CEMS Calibration and Drift Data Entry

The second performance specification data entry tab labeled "CEMS Calibration Drift
Data" is used to enter the data required for the CEMS calibration drift calculations. This tab
has fields for the end date of the drift assessment, the analyzer span value, the low
calibration gas value, the high calibration gas value and seven pairs of fields for the results
of the daily low and high calibrations.

Field descriptions for the "CEMS Calibration Drift Data" are as follows:

Day: This is the numerical order of the consecutive days used for assessing the

calibration drift results.

Low: These are the results of the daily low calibrations of the CEMS.

High: These are the results of the daily high calibrations of the CEMS.

CD End Date: This is the date of the last day for the calibration drift assessment.

Analyzer Span: This is the operational range of the CEM instrument.

Low Cal. Known: This is the low calibration gas value for the CEMs.

High Cal Known: This is the high calibration gas value for the CEMs.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-88

-------
After entering the required data in the tabs "CEMS Information and Run Data" or "CEMS
Calibration Drift Data," the results can be displayed. Click on the box below the data entry
fields "Relative Accuracy Results" or the "Calibration Drift Results," respectively. For
the calculation of the RATA results, users are permitted to exclude up to three test runs from
the calculations by checking the box in the "Exclude Run" column. Users which select
more than three runs for exclusion will receive a pop-up warning stating that they can only
exclude up to 3 runs. Also, users that do not leave nine or more runs available for calculating
the relative accuracy will receive a pop-up warning stating that they must have 9 runs for the
RA report. The ERT will not perform calculations if there are not nine runs remaining.

Relative Accuracy Results

Note: Reference values are wet
Facility facility name RAStartDate 7/13/2017 '

RAEndDate 7/13/2017

Ref

CEMS

Differences

Run

Percent

Run

9.24

9.59

0.65

10.10

9.73

-0.33

10.10

9.75

-0.35

10.54

10.14

-0.40

10.44

10.06

-0.33

9.73

3.9 S

-0.75

9.44

S.SS

-0.56

S.93

3.53

-0.40

9.54

S.S9

-0.65

Sums

33.06

34. S9

-3.17

Avg's

9.73

9.43

-0.35

Standard Deviation

0.40

Co nf id en c e Co eff ic i ent

0.31

Relative A ecu ra cy j < or = to 1% Difference!
Relative Accura cy {< or = to 20% RA |

TheRA of the CEMS was be no greater than 23% Df the mean value Df the reference method (RM)
data or the absoiute value of the difference between the mean RM value and the mean CEMS value
was lessthan or equal to 1.0 percent02 dt 032; the specification in paragraph 13.2 of Performance

Specification 3 was met.

Note: All calculations performed are as specified in Section 12 Df RS2 and use the US EPA rounding
conventions.

Figure 64 - RATA results report
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-89

-------
A "Relative Accuracy Results" report like Figure 64 - RATA results report will be produced
if the "Relative Accuracy Results" box is selected. This report includes the ERT calculated
emissions for the reference test method, the emissions the user entered for the CEMS, the
differences between the reference test method and the CEMS and the averages of each of
the data selected for inclusion by the user. Below the averages of the differences, the RATA
results report presents the calculated standard deviation, the confidence coefficient, the
relative accuracy calculations using the reference

method and the relative accuracy calculations using the emissions standard. The descriptions
to the left of the calculations of the relative accuracy provide a summary of the acceptance
criteria and when they are to be applied. Above each of the calculated values for the
'Relative Accuracy Results'' report is one of the mathematical symbols "< or =" or ">"
indicating the relative value of the relative accuracy compared to the acceptance criteria.

While the Relative Accuracy values are presented to more than two significant figures, the
symbols are assigned based upon the US EPA criteria for significant figures and rounding
conventions. The EPA conventions for calculating and reporting were clarified in a June 6,
1990 memorandum titled Performance Test Calculation Guidelines and reiterated in the
Office of Compliances Clean Air Act National Stack Testing Guidance. Below the
descriptions and relative accuracy calculations are descriptions of the decision criteria used
for selecting the performance criteria calculation and a written statement comparing the
calculated results to the acceptance criteria. While Figure 64 presents calculations for all
units of emissions, a RATA for only one set of units will have printed results for only the
units where there are standards, calculated test results and CEM data.

Calibration Drift Results

Likewise, if the "Calibration Drift Results" box is selected, a report similar to Figure 75 -
Calibration Drift Results report will be produced. The "Calibration Drift Report" includes
the measured responses for the daily calibrations at the low and high values, the differences
between the responses and the calibration standard for each day, and the percent of span that
the differences represent. Below the calibration drift results the report presents the criteria
specified in the performance specification for acceptance.

L3 Press Ctrl+P to Print - a x

Calibration Drift Results

Boiler AB8103 Outlet
PSTCOto PS4

Day

Low Response

High Response

Low PPM Drift

High PPM Drift

Low % of Span

High % of Span

22.00

105.00

2.00

5.00

1.33

3.33

19.00

95.00

-1.00

-5.00

-0.67

-3.33

18.00

93.00

-2.00

-7.00 |

-1.33

-4.67

20.00

100.00

0.00

1 5

25.00

120.00

5.00

20.00

3.33

13.33

20.00

100.00

0.00

20.00

100.00

0.00

ALL Differences Must Not Exceed 5% for Six Out Of Seven Days! Page 1 of 1

Figure 65 - Calibration Drift Results Report
ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-90

-------
Process Data

Click the "Process Data" button in the "Test Data" area of the main menu to display the
"Process Data" screen. This allows entry of process run data, APCD run data and lab data
that was identified to be captured in the test plan.

Process Run Data Tab

Process Data Details
-adlity: Environ Mental Conrious Furniture Co.

litted Source ID/Description:

Process Run Data | APCD Run Data || Lab

Delete This Run

Name

Value t

Units

Target Lo1 -r

Target Hig -r

commi

Anthracite Burned

Tons

Oxygen Concentration

percent

Carbon Monoxide concentre

ppm

250

Dryer Wood Feed

Tons/Hr

125

Dryer Outlet Temperature

deg F

325

Natural Gas Fuel Flow

FtA3/min

Figure 66 - Process Run Data Tab

This list was created during the test plan on item 4a. (See Figure 23 - Test Plan
Process/APCD Tab_section for more information.)

The name, units, target low and target high are prefilled with data from item 4a, and are not
editable. If corrections to the information shown under these columns are required, you
should close this window and click on "Process Info" under the "Setup / Test Plan" area of
the "Main Menu". Corrections to the information in the first line which is highlighted
yellow may be a default established by the selection of the SCC. However, if the name and
units were established by the user during the selection of the SCC, you may be able to return
to the SCC selection area under the "Setup / Test Plan" to revise this information. Process
activity rate information (i.e., the name is a production or feed material parameter and the
units have a denominator of time), consistent with a measured emissions rate calculated by
the ERT may be paired with the emissions rate in the "Emissions" tab of "Run Data
Details" for either an isokinetic or instrumental test method.

• Enter the value for the process name for the duration of the run. Enter comments as
needed for the run.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-91

-------
• Move to the next or previous runs by using the navigation bar at the bottom of the
screen.

Record: n | i 11 T ~ I H !~ + ! of 2

Figure 67 - Rim Navigation Bar

• Click the "Add a Run" button to add a new process run.

• To delete run data, highlight the row by clicking on the gray cell before cell
containing the name of the run. Click on "Delete This Run". The first run cannot
be deleted. You should be extremely wary of deleting individual rows as this may
introduce unintended consequences where this row is used to calculate a process
based emissions. You may wish to use Windows Explorer to duplicate the Project
Data Set prior to performing a row deletion and evaluate the results of the deletion.

• Note: Only the "Value" and "Comments" columns are active on this tab
APCD Run Data Tab

Pal Process Data Details

Facility: ^^[Environ Mental Conaous Furniture Co.
litted Source ID/Description:

[Dryer 2

Praces^ur^ata| APCD RunData|La^at^J

Add A Run |

Delete this Run 11

APCDName

Value -

UOM ^

TargetValu ~

comments

FABRIC FILTER

FABRIC FILTER - MEDIUM TEMPERATURE

BOILER AT LANDFILL

BAGHOUSE

i 1 1111

Record: M lofl ~! ^ No Filter Search

Figure 68 - APCD Run Data Tab

This list was created during the test plan on item 5b (see Figure 27 - Control Devices - Test
Plan Process/APCD Control Devices editing for more information). Using the data from
item 5b, the "APCDName", "UOM\ &nd"TargetVaIiie" areprefilled.

• Enter the value for the APCD parameter associated with the name for the duration
of the run.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-92

-------
• Enter comments for the APCD run as needed.

• Move to the next or previous runs by using the navigation bar.

• Click the "Add a Run" button to add a new process run.

• Click the "Delete This Run" button to delete run data.

• Note: Only the "Value" and "Comments" columns are active on this tab.
Lab Data Tab

m Process Da

Add A Run

Name

Wood Moisture Content of feed material
Wood Moisture Content of product
Wood density of feed material
Wood density of product

^ Value - UOM
50 percent
percent

lb/ton
lb/ton

Figure 69 - Lab Data Tab

This list was created during the test plan on item 4b (see Figure 25 - Process Lab
Information section for more information).

• Enter the value for the lab data results for the parameter identified by the name for
the duration of the run. You should insure that the value entered is consistent with
the units of measure specified.

• Enter comments for the value entered in the lab data run as needed.

• Move to the next or previous runs by using the navigation bar.

• Click the "Add a Run" button to add a new process run.

• Click the "Delete This Run" button to delete run data.

• Note: Only the "Value" and "Comments" columns are active on this tab.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-93

-------
Tester DQ Assessment

3 Comments:

Comment By; Tester

Figure 70 - Tester Comments window

Click the "Tester DQ Assessment" button in the "Test Data" area of the "ERTMain
Menu" to allow entry of any comments from the tester on: 1) their assessment of the validity
of the test, 2) the representativeness of the process operation, 3) an assessment of the
achievement of the data quality objectives, 4) the use of the data quality indicators
supporting the statements about meeting the DQO's, 5) documentation on the conduct of the
tests, 6) explanations of the test results, and 7) any other statements about the use of the test
for other purposes.

This is a freeform text field that is unlimited in the amount of text that can be entered. This
text will be included in the printed test report.

The "Tester DQ Assessment" tab can be used to enter a narrative of the test plan, any
deviations from methods, mishaps or problems during testing, a summary or discussion of the
results, etc. It is highly recommended that testers provide comments in this section.

When typing in this comment window, DO NOT use the symbol, use words (eg. per as
in pounds per hour or divided by in an equation). This symbol will cause the file to not be
able to be uploaded to CEDRI and give you the following error: ERROR (115): Invalid
XML File The ERT XML could not be processes. Please check your ERT file for
incomplete data, invalid structure or invalid version.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-94

-------
Attachments

ID Test Plan - h x

Test Plan Title: * Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2 Test Plan Date: '5 | 5/25/2009|^^

Facility/Tester Permit/SCC Regulations Process/APCD Locations/Methods Methods cont. Audit/Calibrations Schedule Signatures Attach.

AttachDesc

' Right Click to add file »

Source/Process Flow Diagram

Package

Alternate Method Reques and Approval (Item 8) (optional)

EPA Method lLocation Supporting Documentation (Item 9) (optional)

Package

Cyclonic Flow Absence Supporting Documentation (Item 10)

Pre-Test Meter Boxes/DGMs Calibrations

Post-Test Meter Boxes/DGMs Calibrations

Nozzles Calibrations

Pitots Calibrations

Thermocouples Calibrations

Sampling Locations Dimensions and Point Locations

Run Field Data Sheets

Moisture Recovery

Lab Data

Chain-of-Custody

Observer Comments

APCD Diagram

Package

Record: M 1 of 16 ~ M ~ | C. | Search | i

1 ~

To add more attachment items, enter the description of the attachment in the
bottom row of the attachdesc column. Then add your attachment.

Tips to reduce the PDF file size:

1. set your scanner on 200 DPI when scanning documents. t ;¦¦¦; |

2. attach individual components files that match the
attachdesc, instead of attaching a single file with all
components.

To add or view an attachment:

- double click on the "paper clip" symbol

- select "add" to add a file

- select "view" to view a file

Figure 71 - Attachment Tab

Once the test data have been entered, click "Attachments" in the "Test Data" area of the
"ERTMain Menu". This will display the "Attachments'' screen from the test plan.

All documents to support the test need to be included as attachments here. See
Adding an Attachment section for more information on how to attach files.

Completeness Check

The ERT provides a means for the stack test report writer, the source test company test
reviewer, the tested company representative and others to systematically review the ERT
project data file for completeness prior to the creation of the "Submission Package File"
and submission to CEDRI. The ERT checks those specific locations in the Project Data Set
to determine whether text has been entered in the field for a required or optional piece of
documentation or an attachment has been provided for the item.

As shown in Figure 72, the "Quality Assessment Questions" are in the salmon colored
column with the ERT provided response in the next column. There are three groups of
questions: The first group is for information about the facility and general test report
documentation; The second group is about documentation of manual or isokinetic test
methods; and the third group is about documentation of instrumental test methods. Users can
not change the questions. Nor can the user change the ERT provided response. The user can
cause a change in the response by entering information in the required field or providing the
supporting documentation in the attachments area. The "Completeness Check" screen
includes a "Note" providing general instructions for using this function of the ERT. This
screen also includes a column labeled "Comment" where the Facility representative or their
contractor may provide supplementary information. Any comment(s) provided will not

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-95

-------
affect the ERT's response to the question but may provide the Regulatory Agency Reviewer
with information that they may not otherwise know. The last column identifies what area of
the ERT contains the documentation necessary for assessing the proper response to the
question. Clicking in the cell identifying the ERT area will open the item identified. Once
open, the information or attachment may be reviewed, revised or added as necessary. You
will not see a change in the response to the question until you click in the "Update
Completeness Answers" which will force the ERT to update the responses.

r=al Test Quality Questions _ n X

Quality Assessment Questions

Completeness

Note: ERT will answer the salmon colored Completeness questions with a "Yes" or "No" based on the response is provided in the
applicable area or a file is attached in the applicable line. Clicking in the "Click to Show ERT Data" column will show the
applicable area or attachment. Selecting the "Update Completeness Answers" button will refresh the answers based on any new
content entered into ERT. The Completeness answers can only be changed by entering data into the applicable areas or adding

Update
Completeness
Answers

attachments. Only the Source or Testing Company can add or edit data in the Project Data Set.

Question

Answer •

i Comment •

Click to Show ERT Data •

Is a full description of the process and the unit being tested (including installed controls) provided?

Yes

(Test Plan Item 7a & 7b) -
Review process
documentation.

Has a detailed discussion of source operating conditions, air pollution control device operations and the representativeness of
measurements made during the test been provided?

Yes

Review the

sourcjs/testers Test Data
Quality Assessment.

Were the operating parameters for the tested process unit and associated controls described and reported?

Yes

Review Process Run
Data.

Is there an assessment of the validity, representativeness, achievement of DQO's and usability of the data?

Yes

Review the Tester's DQ
assessment

Have field notes addressing issues that may influence data quality been provided?

Review Field Notes.

Have the following been included in the report: Dry Gas Meter (DGM) calibrations, pilot tuve and nozzle inspections?

Review calibration
documentation.

Figure 72 - Completeness Check: Quality Assessment Questions

A more detailed list of questions is available for State/local agencies to use as a check sheet
for their review of the test report. Users preparing the report for submission may use this
more detailed list of questions to more completely assess the completeness of the
documentation provided to support the representativeness, precision and accuracy of the test
report. The preparer of the test report should not respond to this more detailed list of
questions as they are intended only for State/local agency source test assessment.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-96

-------
Report Verification

3 Final Test Report Verification - o

Final Test Report Verification

Permitted Facility Representative
Title:

Company: IBP - Decatur Works
Email:

Date Siqned: 4/4/20121

Based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, I certify that the
statements and information in this test report are true, accurate, and complete.

Testing Company Representative

Name: (Jeremy Hutchens
Title: [Project Manaqer
Company: Alliance Source Testinq, LLC
Email: jeremy.hutchens@stacktest.com
Date Sianed: 4/4/20121

I have reviewed all testing details and results in this test report and
hereby certify that the test report is authentic and accurate.

Figure 73 - Final Test Report Verification Window

Click the "Report Verification" button in the "Test Data" area of the "ERT Main Menu". The
two types of reviewers are as follows:

• Permitted Facility Representative: The person authorized to represent the facility
being tested. Enter the representative's name, title, company and date reviewed.

• Testing Company Representative: The person authorized to represent the testing
company. Enter the representative's name, title, company and date reviewed.

• Note: This is NOT an electronic signature! The person submitting the final ERT file to
EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) will be required to register as a report submitter for
the facility and receive an Cross- Media Electronic Reporting and Recordkeeping Rule
(CROMERR) compliant electronic signature agreement which will allow that individual
to provide an electronic signature with the submission of the file to EPA through the
CDX/CEDRI.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-97

-------
Creating an ERT Submission Package File
Compacting a Project Data Set

Microsoft Access files can be very large. By clicking on "Compacting a Project Data Set"
you can reduce the file size of the project data set. This will not affect the quality of content
of the file. Do this by clicking "Compact Project Data Set" from the project data set area of
the ERT main menu. A message will alert you when the process is complete.

Compacting the ERT

Because of the way Microsoft Access manages memory allocation, the file size of the ERT
program will grow. If you have Access 2010, or runtime program from 2010, or later,
installed then the file will automatically compact itself upon closing the program.

For versions of Access 2007, the user will need to periodically compact the ERT. Do this by
following these steps:

1. Click the Microsoft Access icon on the upper left of the ERT Access program. This
will open the Microsoft administration tools window, as seen in Figure 74.

2. In the left menu of the Administration tools window, click on the "Manage" icon.
A submenu will open in submenu selection space in the right most part of the
window

3. Click on the "Compact and Repair Database" selection to compact the ERT.

& M— Step 1

New

Open
Save

Save As ~
Print ~

| —ana9e *

1^3] E-mail

Lj Publish St©J

, Close Database

Manage this database

^ Compact and Repair Database

Perf°rm routine maintenanc^oi^pe
database to ensure data integ^H^^^

Back Up Database

_jr,a Back up important databases re«@J@p 3
prevent data loss. *

Database Properties

J Review and set the basic properties of the
database, including the name and owner.

^ Access Options X Exit Access

Figure 74 - Access 2007 Compacting of ERT

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-98

-------
Project Submittal History/Creating the ERT Package for Regulatory Agency Submittal

Figure 75 - Project Submittal History Area of the ERT Main Menu

The "Project Submittal History" area of the ERT allows you to create an ERT submission
package file and keep track of where the PDS is in the workflow of the source test process.
(Please see the previous Basic Workflow section for more information on the workflow
process). At the completion of each step when a ERT package is created (test plan, test plan
review, test report, test report review / approval), the action, date submitted, to whom it is
being submitted, who made the submission, and any special comments are entered in this
area.

If the data set is required to be submitted to CDX/CEDRI, an ERT submission package file
must be created. Make sure the ERT project dataset is located on the local drive (either on
the C: drive or on the desktop). A submission may have difficulties being created if the file
is not on a local drive (Thumb drives and servers have caused issues in the past). To create
a submission file, click "Create ERT Submission Package File." If anyrequired fields are
not complete, a window will open with a list of links to the screens. Click on the links to the
screens to complete the fields. Once the field window is closed, click on the "Re-Check
Data" button. When all the required fields have been completed, the "Create ERT
Submission File" window will open, shown in Figure 76, in which the file preparation menu
is activated.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-99

-------
hi] frmRequiredShow

The item(s) below are missing and are required to create a
Submission Package File. Please click on the link below
and add the data. Then click "Re-Check Data".

Missing Required Information (click to enter/view data)

Re-Check
Data

! Facility County

Figure 76 - Missing Items List in ERT

F§1 Create ERT Submission File

Complete the steps below to create an ERT Submission File

j 1- j Set/Review Test and Process Run Associations
Enter Project Data Set Submittal Data

Create ERT Submission

Optional Steps

Go to the CDX Website I Email Submission File

Figure 77 - Create ERT Submission Package File Menu

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-100

-------
eU WebFire Emission Factors Export - n

Associate Data Runs with Process Runs for Emission Factor Calculations:

(Note: Data Runs with out associated Process Runs will NOT be included in the EF Calculations or Export.)

Location

Method

RunNumbe -r

Proct -r

see

EjEWS

Method 10

10200701

Stack

Ullfethod 10

10200701

I Stack

Method 10

10200701

Stack

Method 23

10200701

J Stack

Method 23

10200701

| Stack

Method 23

10200701

| Stack

Method 25A

10200701

Stack

Method 25A

10200701

Stack

Method 25A

10200701

Stack

Method 26A

10200701

Stack

Method 26A

10200701

Stack

MeQ)od26A

10200701

' Stark

Mothrvi

m?nn7ni

View WebFire Export

Figure 78 - Associate Reference Method Data Runs with Process Runs

Select 1. Set/Review Test and Process Run Associations of Figure 77 - Create ERT
Submission Package File Menu and you will see the above screen. This allows you to
associate the process data with the test run data. Even if you associated process data with test
run data in the emissions tab of the run data details screen, you will need to make the
associations in this screen. TUTS IS REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTING TO CDX/CFDR1
Successful association of the data will result in a table, as in Figure 78 - Associate Reference
Method Data Runs with Process Runs. Click on "View WebFIRE Export" to see results in
spreadsheet format.

i-Hl WebFire Emission Factors Export -

Associate Data Runs with Process Runs for Emission Factor Calculations:

(Note: Data Runs with out associated Process Runs will NOT be induded in the EF Calculations or Export.)

Location

Method

RunNumbe *¦

Proci '

sec

View WebFire Export

Figure 79 - Blank Associate Data Runs with Process Runs

When submitting a PDS with only test plan data there will be no run or process data to
associate. Click on "Continue" button to skip this process and continue to create the
submission package file.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-101

-------
EH Create ERT Submission File I ¦=» || S ifc^l

Complete the steps below to create an ERT Submission File

Figure 80 - PDS Submittal Data

Click the number 2 to "Enter Project Data Set Submittal Data". This will activate the fields
so that the data can be entered. Select the action from the dropdown list and enter the other
information in the fields. The actions are as follows:

• "Submit Test Plan"

• "Notice of Deficiency - Test Plan"

• "Resubmit Test Plan"

• "Approve Test Plan"

• "Submit Test Report,"

• "Notice of Deficiency - Test Report"

• "Resubmit Test Report"

• "Approve Test Report"

• "Request Additional Information"

• "Other-

While you may create a submission file without entering information in all the fields, this
information will be saved in the "Project Submittal History" as documentation of the
activities associated with the source test program.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-102

-------
f=al ERT Submission File Build Status

Creating webFIRE export file: PST Test Data Facility_10-26-2011_ll-52.xml - Please Wait... -

DONE!

Creating PDS zip file: PST Test Data Facility_10-26-2011_ll-52.zip - DONE!

Creating ERT Submission zip file: PST Test Data Facility_10-26-2011_ll-52_pkg.zip - DONE!

FINISHED - Submission File Created:

[ Finished |

^ [ 3. | Create ERT Submission

C:\Devapps\ERT\ProjectData\PSTTest Data Facility_10-26-2011_11-52_pkg.zip

Figure 81 - Notice of Creation of ERTfile

Click on number 3 to "Create ERT Submission." An action window will appear with
instructions as it creates the ERT Submission file, a PDS zip file and an ERT Submission
zip file. When the "Finished" is clicked, the location of the field will be reported in the
field. This screen should not take a long time to create. If it does take a long time (more
than 5 minutes), most likely there is an issue with the data or the file. For instance, if the
file is saved on a server and not a local drive, an ERT submission package file will not be
created. It will give a blue spinning wheel and will not advance to creating a zip file.

If the internet is active, by clicking on 4a to "Go to the CDX Website", you will be linked
to the CDX website. By clicking on 4b to "Email Submission File", the local email will
open with a reminder to attach the file from the provided location.

Note: If clicking on 4a to "Go to the CDX Website" generates a "Cannot Connect to
Proxy Error," click on "Internet Options", then on "Advanced." Check to be sure the SSL
and TLS protocols are enabled under the security section.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-103

-------
Chapter 6: Accessing Test Plans and Data for Review

Obtaining Test data for Review

Test data can be obtained for review in two ways:

1. If an ERT submittal package was submitted through EPA's Central Data Exchange
(CDX), the data can be accessed in CEDRI after submission or WebFIRE - 60 days after
submission to CDX/CEDRI (see instructions below).

2. States or other delegated authorities can review test data if the ERT file is sent to them
(via email, CD, etc).

How to Obtain and View ERT Submissions from WebFIRE

1. Go to EPA's WebFIRE webpage:

2. Scroll down to the paragraph titled "Search and Retrieve WebFIRE Report
Submissions"

3. Click the "Search for reports" text below the list of available search criteria.

Start Date
End Date

Facility Name

(MM/DD/YYYY)

Start and End Date refer to a span of time that the files were submitted to EPA

State

NEW JERSEY

NEW MEXICO

NEW YORK

NORTH CAROLINA

¦ -

County

NC-Alamance

NC-.Alexander

NC-.Alleghany

NC-Anson

City

Zip Code

Report Type(s)

Performance Test Reports

FRS ID
see

" Control-Click for multiple selections

~ Control-Click for multiple selections

| Submit Search | j Reset

Figure 82 - WebFIRE Seach Engine

4. A page with the available search criteria as shown in Figure 82 will be displayed.

5. Enter your desired search criteria and click the "Submit Search" icon OR you can leave
the search criteria fields blank (this may result in a long list of files). Currently, four types of
reports are available in WebFIRE. If you limited your search to "Performance Test
Reports'' the last column will only have "ERT' as the "Report Type." The results of your
search as shownin Figure 83 will be displayed. You can adjust the column widths to see
more of the text and you can click on the column heading to change the order of the
displayed results.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-104

-------
The following acronyms are used to designate the report type in the results table:
ERT = Performance test reports
EVAL= Performance evaluations
NCOS = Notification of compliance status reports
AER = Air emissions reports

Report Search Results

Organ...

Facility

City

" State

County

Submission

Document

Size
(Bytes)

Report
Type

AIR A...

Lehigh Cement Company

Union Bridge

Carroll

08/07/13

Lehiah Cement ComDanv 08-07-2013...

3066S93

ERT

AIR C...

Arcelor Mittal Weirton LLC

Weirton

Hancock

09/19/13

Arcelor Mittal Weirton LLC 09-19-201...

970197

ERT

AIR C...

Lehigh Cement Company LLC

York

06/14/13

Lehiah Cement ComDanv LLC 06-14-...

1773958

ERT

AIR C...

Argos USA Harleyville Plant

Harleyville

Dorchester

07/25/13

Aroos USA Harlewille Plant 07-25-20...

37053495

ERT

AIR C...

Lafarge Whitehall Cement Plant

Whitehall

not provided

10/29/12

Lafaroe Whitehall Cement Plant 10-29...

11566809

ERT

AK ST...

AK Steel Middletown Works

Middletown

Butler

01/23/13

AK Steel Middletown Works 01-22-20...

4069041

ERT

AMERI...

AEP John W. Turk Jr. Power Plant

Fulton

07/30/13

AEP John W. Turk Jr. Power Plant 07-...

15953629

ERT

ARCEL...

ArcelorMittal Indiana Harbor LLC

East Chicago

Lake

12/12/13

ArcelorMittal Indiana Harbor LLC 12-1...

1613961

ERT

ARGO...

Argos Cement LLC

Calera

United States

07/22/13

Aroos Cement LLC 07-22-2013 09-5...

80579

ERT

ASHG...

Ash Grove Cement Company

Clancy

Jefferson

04/26/13

Ash Grove Cement ComDanv 04-26-2...

3084960

ERT

ASHG...

Ash Gr5ove Cement Company

Leamington

Juab

04/10/13

Ash Gr5ove Cement ComDanv 04-10-...

11082392

ERT

1 ASHG...

Ash Grove Cement. Inc.

Chanute

Neosho

12/18/12

Ash Grove Cement. Inc. 12-18-2012 ...

3258768

ERT

Figure 83 - WebFIRE Search Results

6. All files in the "DocumentName" column are Zip files - these files contain a Project
Data Set (PDS) file created by the ERT application. To review a test report, use one of the
following procedures:

a. Click the name of the zip file you wish to review and click "Open."

b. Depending on your operating system, you can click "Extract", "Unzip" or drag the file
to a folder. This will save the file to the location you specify. Make sure you are cognizant
of the location and have selected a location that you will remember.

c. Open the ERT application.

d. In the ERT, click "Select Project Data Set" and choose the file (it will have an
extension of either .accdb or .mdb, depending on the version of the ERT that was used to
create the file). You will see that the location and name of the extracted file will be
displayed in the "Current Project Data Set" box

a. Click the name of the zip file you wish to review and click "Save"

b. Save the zip file to a location you will remember.

c. Open the ERT application.

d. In the ERT, click "Select Project Data Set" and choose the zip file. The ERT
application will extract the PDS from the zip file and store it in the same directory as the zip
file. You will see that the location and name of the extracted file will be displayed in the

"Current Project Data Set" box.

e. CAUTION: Use this procedure only the first time you open the PDS. The use of this
procedure will overwrite the existing PDS and you may lose any saved changes. Subsequent
times that you open the PDS, using step d. of the first procedure will preserve changes you
made to the PDS.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-105

-------
Chapter 7: Regulatory Agency Review

Test Plan Review

nil Test Plan Review

Test Plan Title: |Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2 | Test Plan Date: | l/2/2014|

Open Expanded

Regulatory Agency Review
Accepted (Yes, No, N/A)

Facility Name:

[Environ Mental Concious Furniture Co.

Address: 666 66th St N Ave

City:

State/Zip:
County:

Contact:
Phone:

Fax:
email:

AFS Number:
Industry

/SCC/NAIS:
FRS:

State ID:
Lat./Long.:

Enviro M. Concious

enviro.concious@enviroconcious.com

|30701415

110020338963

(47.521947

J [-111.181064

Testing Company: | View Test Company Certification^

Emissions Factors 8i Policy Applications Group

OAQPS/EMAD (C312-02)

City:

State/Zip:

Contact:
Phone:

Research Triangle Park

|27711

(919) 541-5407

myers.ron@epa.gov

SCC/Desc.: 10300103 [view Field Team Lead Certification |

External Combustion Boilers - Commercial/Institutional -
Anthracite Coal - Hand-fired

Air Permit Number: |NC666-1234 ~

Permitted Source ID and Name: DR2

Permitted Maximum Process Rate:
Maximum Normal Operation Process Rate:
Target Process Rate for Testing:
Operational Hours Per Year:

175 Tons per Hour

150 Tons per Hour

125 Tons per Hour

| Add/View Comment
Test Co. Info:

|Y<* |71

| Add/View Comment

[ Next Page |

Figure 84 - Test Plan Review Facility Permit Information

This section of the ERT may be used by a person evaluating the proposed source test
protocol and if necessary identifying areas requiring improvement. Generally, if performed,
the evaluation is performed by a regulatory agency employee. Upon receipt of a completed
test plan, the reviewer (typically the state or other delegated authority) may access the
database by selecting the appropriate proj ect data set (see Selecting a Project Data Set
section for more information on selecting a project data set) and clicking "Test Plan
Review" in the "Test Plan Review" area of the "ERT Main Menu".

The test plan will be displayed in a split window that contains the test plan as submitted for
review on the left side and several areas with check boxes and buttons to access comment
areas on the right side. Each of the areas are associated with key elements of the test plan.
The left side of the test plan review is nearly identical with respect to the tabs identifying
the type of information and the layout of information contained on each tab area to the test
plan. This provides an organized "step-through" process for the test plan review.

Select " Yes" or "No" on each section based on whether the information provided is
acceptable or not. If'Wo", click the "Add/View Comment" button to explain why the
information is not acceptable and request what additional information is needed.

Upon completion, update the "Submittal History" and return the Project Data Set to the
tester. (See the Project Submittal History section for more information on how to update the
history).

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-106

-------
Test Plan Review Locations/Methods

|=s| Test Plan Review

t Plan Title: Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2

Facility/Permit [ Locations/Methods [j

Test Plan Date:

Open Expanded O

Regulatory Agency Review
Accepted (Yes, No, M/A)

Pro:ess/APCD , Methods cont, Audit/Calibratons Schedule Reviewers Attach.

1. Please enter sampling location information, (all dimensions in inches) | View File ]

Location ( click to view/edit) - In let/0 utt . | Total Trav« ».

| Round Duct Diam . I Duct Le . j Duct Wkt . Equiv

2a. Please provide the foHowing information for each test parameter.

Target Parameter
I Cadmium

| Chromium

Lead
IMmm

| •

» Test Method » Num Test Runs » Test Run Duration »
Method 29 3 64

Method 29 3 j 64

Method 29 3 64

JJelhnrL2a_

| Search | i [

2b. Please select the Emissions / Concentrations for each location.

Local . Method
stack Method 25A

_ stack : Method 25A

j stack j Method 25A
Inlet Method 29
stank Jlethod_29__

Is of Measure » , Corrected Analyte - Corrected % - ] Process Rate. Parameter •

ppm corrected
grains/dscf corrected

1 of 21

| Previous Page J | Next Page ]

Add/View Comment

1 Q*

Add/View Comment

N 1-rl

Add/View Comment

Figure 85 - Test Plan Review Locations/Methods Tab

For Item 1, the reviewer will select or "No" on each section depending on whether
the information provided is acceptable or not. If "AV, click the "Add/View Comment"
button to explain why the information is not acceptable and request what additional
information is needed.

In Item 1, below the "Fes" or "Afo" response, click on the "QA" button, as the red box in
Figure 85 indicates, to open the quality assurance calculations screen. The' Protocol
Evaluation Calculations" screen will open, Figure 86. There are two sets of results for the
calculations depending on the selection of location as "inlet" or "stack."

QA Information

Fsl Protocol Evaluation Calculations - Press Ctrl+P to Print X

Location J7I5!

[^1 Inlet Hours/Year: ^uu

i—i

•
1

Round("): 19-5 Length("):

0 Equiv. C)

19.5 Temp{F):

ACFM:

Stack and Flow Rate Information

Assumed
SCFM: Moisture %:

Moisture %
@ Saturation:

@ Assumed
DSCFM:

DSCFM @
Saturation:

Assumed
Stack 02 %:

#Error

Traverse Details

~ Non-Particulate Traverse

Diameters to
Disturbance

Traverse Point

Calculation Required Traverse/Flow Methods:

Downstream From ("): 0

0.00

EPA Methods 1 & 2

Upstream From ("): 280

14.36

< i

Figure 86 - Location, Stack and Flow Rate Information and Traverse Details

In the "Protocol Evaluation Calculations" screen, select the "Location" as "inlet" . The
calculations from the data as provided in Item 6 will fill the orange fields. The calculations
based on the data entered in the Regulations" "Locations," "Methods" and
"Concentrations" areas of the test plan will fill the gray fields. Use the calculations to
determine if the proposed sampling protocol is acceptable.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-107

-------
The fields are as follows:

Hours/Year:

Round ("):

Length("):

Width("):

Equiv.("):

Temp.(F):

ACFM:

Stack and Flow Rate Information:

SCFM:

Assumed Moisture %:

Moisture % @ Saturation:

Moisture % @ Assumed DSCFM:

Assumed Stack 02 %:

Traverse Details:

Non-Particulate Traverse:

Downstream From ("):

Upstream From ("):

Diameters to Disturbance/Downstream:

Diameters to Disturbance/Upstream:

Traverse Point Calculation/Downstream:

Traverse Point Calculation/Upstream:

Required Traverse/Flow Methods:

ERT User Manual

Hours location operates in a year.

Round duct diameter in inches.

Duct length or depth measured in inches.

Duct width measured in inches.

Equivalent diameter of a rectangular duct.

Temperature in degrees F.

Actual cubic feet per minute.

Source gas emission rate in cubic feet per minute.

Assumed percentage moisture.

Calculated moisture content of saturated gas
stream percentage.

Assumed percentage moisture at point of dry
standard flow rate in cubic feet perminute.

Oxygen concentration of sampled gas stream,
percentage.

Checked if "Yes" if the test location includes
non-particulate traverse.

Distance to downstream disturbance in inches.

Distance to upstream disturbance in inches.

Number of equivalent diameters to the
downstream disturbance.

Number of equivalent diameters to the upstream
disturbance.

Calculated number of traverse points from
downstream disturbance.

Calculated number of traverse points from
upstream disturbance.

Required Method for calculation of flow rate.

- Stack Testing Part 1-108

-------
Note: Fields with "#Error" is a result of missing or incomplete run data.

ss Ctrl+P to Print

RoundO: 72 Lengthf): 0 WidthO: 0
Stack and Flow Rate Information

Equiv.O: 72

Hours/Yea
Temp Saturation: DSCFM: Saturation: Stack 02%:

96.7] | iai| 4.5% | 8ti| | 92.4| | 13.0|

Traverse Details

i—i Diameters to Traverse Point

~ Non-Parbaiate Traverse Disturbance Calculation Requred Traverse/Flow Methods:

Downstream From O: I 72| \ LOOl |1> I EPA Methods 1 a 2

Upstream From O: | 280 I 3.89 12

Parameters of Interest EPA Method 35 vs 2SA

grains • 64.799 = mgs . Lb/Hr Limit - mg/30cf .

% Carbon % Production CE DE Outlet ppm
|60 | |95 | 1100 | |95 |

Reportinq Threshold Alowables

Parameter .

Method

USE . Reporting Ib/yr .

Lbs/hr

SOTA fos/yr .

Lbs/hr

Reporting Lbs/h .

SOTATonstyr - Lbs/h r

Chromium

Method 29

T5!ll000

0.50C

10000

5.00C

Lead

Method 29

-xc-il;

C CCl

0.01C

Manganese

Method 29

'K'I'iJ 2

0.001

0.01C

Nickel

Method 29

I'AL'i'j200

0.1 oc

2000

1.00C

jn Durabon(hr) |1 |jeJ Front Half Sample Volume 300 |T| Back Half Sample Volume 150 [j-J

. Lb/Hr Limit . ug/traln

AAS/CVAAS . GFAAS .

220E-01 8.73E-07

2.20E+01 8.73E+07

220E-01 8.73E»07

mgfdscm 7%Q2

Organics ft Gases

:al organic compounds

Sample VolumeQ.) |60 »| Impinger Start Volume(irJs) 0 |»|

(TOCj

¦ Solubility - Boiling Point - Polarl . - ug/Traii

Figure 87 - Complete Protocol Evaluation Calculations Screen Shot

In the "Protocol Evaluation Calculations" screen, select the "location " as "stack". The
calculations from the pre-selected data as provided in Item 6 will fill the orange fields. The
editable fields have white background. Based on the data entered in the "Regulations
"Locations"Methods" and " Concentrations" areas of the test plan, the calculations will
populate the fields with gray background. Use the calculations to determine whether the
protocol sampling information is acceptable or not.

The red background of the " USE' column under "Reporting Threshold Allowables" is the
values which the tester/reviewer should use in calculations of the selected method. This
calculated value is based on a New Jersey formula using the look-up values in the following
columns.

Check the box if the test-run includes non-particulate traverse.

The editable fields beneath the comparison of EPA Method 25 vs. 25A determine the
calculation of the outlet ppm.

The editable fields in the "Metals" section include the run duration (hr), the front half
sample volume, and the back-half sample volume. They directly affect the calculations in
the gray boxes. The columns beneath "/C4P," "AAS/CVAAS," "GFAAS" and "ICPMS"
can have either a green, yellow or red background. The green color indicates the estimates
for the calculated values fall within EPA measurement capabilities at the compliance limits.
Red indicates that the calculated values fall outside the EPA measurement capabilities at the
compliance limits. Yellow indicates there is a potential issue somewhere within the
proposed test protocol or analytical finish. It may indicate that the estimated values for the
test run or analytical finish are close to the measurement capabilities of the selected
combination compared with the compliance limits.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-109

-------
The editable fields of organics & gases include the sample volume (L) and the impinger start
volume (mL). The changes affect the calculations for the parameter.

The fields below the calculations are as follows:

Parameters of Interest:

Grains * 64.799 = mgs:

Lb/hr limit:

Mg/30cf:

EPA Method 25 vs. 25A

Inlet VOC lbs:

% Carbon:
% Production:

CE:

DE:

Outlet ppm:

Reporting ThresholdAllowables:

Parameter:

Method:

USE:

Reporting lb/yr:

Lbs/hr:

SOTA lbs/yr:

Lbs/hr:

The conversion of grains to milligrams.

The flow limit in lb/hr of location of run.

The milligrams per sample rate, where the
minimum is 30 cubic feet.

The pounds of volatile organic compounds in inlet
stream.

The percent of weight fraction of carbon in VOC.

The percent of carbon of VOC (i.e., %carbon *
Inlet VOC).

The capture efficiency typically from permit.

The destruction efficiency, typically found on
permit.

The emission of carbon through outlet in parts per
million. If emission is less than 50 ppm carbon,
select Method 25 A. If emission is greater than 50
ppm carbon, select Method 25.

The analyte/ target parameter reported.

The allowable test method for the analyte.

The calculated value based on the New Jersey
lookup table values following.

The look up values for number of reported pounds
per year.

The analyte allowable pounds per hour.

The analyte value in lbs per year in state-of-art
stack.

The analyte in pounds per hour in state-of-the-art
stack.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-110

-------
Reporting lb/hr:

SOTA tons/year:

Metals:

Run Duration (hr):

Front Half Sample Volume

Back Half Sample Volume:

Parameter:

Lb/hr limit:

Ug/train:

ICAP:

AAS/CVAAS:

GFAAS:

ICPMS:

Anal. Ug/ml:

Mg/dscm 7% 02:

The reportable analyte in pounds per hour in state-
of-the-art stack.

The analyte measurement in tons per year in state-
of-the-art stack.

The number of hours of duration of the run. The
selection will affect the calculations of the table
below.

Select the volume of the front half of the stack in
run. The selections are from 30 to 500 in
increments of 5.

Select the volume of the back half of test sample
of the stack in run. The selections are 25 to 500 in
increments of 5.

The test analyte being measured.

The test analyte's test limit in pounds per hour.

Micrograms of analyte per sampling train.

The calculated Inductively Coupled Argon
Plasma.

The Atomic Absorption Spectrometry technique
utilizing Cold Vapor Atomic Absorption
Spectrometry detection technique of measuring
the analyte in lower concentration ranges.

The Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption
Spectrometry technique utilizing graphite furnace
technique of measuring the analyte in lower
concentration ranges.

The Inductively coupled Plasma/Mass
Spectrometry technique for measuring trace
amounts of the analyte.

The calculated value of micrograms per milliliter
of the analyte.

The micrograms of analyte particulate per dry
standard cubic meter corrected to 7% 02.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-111

-------
Organics & Gases:

Sample Volume (L):

Impinger Start Volume (mis):

Parameter:

Lb/hr Limit:

MW:

ppm limit:

Solubility:

Boiling Point:

Polarity:
ug/Train:
mp ugs:

Select the test sample volume collected in liters.
The list range is from 15 to 180 in increments of
15.

Select the volume in the impinger at the start of
the test measured in milliliters. The range is from
0 to 20 in increments of 1.

The test run selected parameters for organics and
gases.

The pre-selected pound/hour limit of the
parameter.

The calculated molecular weight of the parameter.

The calculated approximate parts per million of
the parameter.

The calculated solubility of the parameter, if
applicable.

The calculated boiling point of the parameter, if
applicable.

The calculated polarity of the parameter, if
applicable.

The approximate calculation of micrograms per
sampling train. I

The calculated micrograms of the impinger.

Testing Observation and Report Review

The Regulatory Agency Review section in the ERT Main Menu contains four areas of
interest. They include:

Regulatory Field Observation Documentation
Regulatory Assessment of Supporting Documentation
Emissions Results

Comprehensive Regulatory Test Assessment

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-112

-------
Regulatory Field Observation Documentation

hll Comments;

Observer Comments by
Post leak check Test 2 was 0.025 acfm.|

h X

Figure 88 - Regulatory Field Observation Documentation Window

In this area, the observations made by the Regulatory Agency" field observer may provide
comments directly into the text box, or attach a file that contains his/her observations of the
performance of testing at the facility. (See Attachments Screen for more information on how
to attach a file).

Regulatory Assessment of Supporting Documentation

Eal Test Quality Questions

Quality Assessment Questions

Completeness: Regulatory Review [

Reviewer's Name:
Regulatory Agency:

Reviewer's Phone:

Review Date:

Note: The answers and comments associated with the Completeness Questions (salmon shaded cells) are determined by the presence
of documentation provided in the test report Responses made by the applicable regulatory reviewer (rows with no shading of the
Question field) will have precedence over automated responses made by the ERT in the Completeness assessment. Comments should
be provided to substantiate any determination of sufficiency for the individual questions. The regulatory reviewer may not modify
data in the Project Data Set, only anwser the questions and provide comments.

Indude i—1

Completeness I B I
Questions

Question

» Answer • Comment * Click to Show ERT Data -

Is a description and drawing of test location provided?

Is there documentation that the source or the test company sought and obtained approval for deviations from the published test
method prior to conducting the test or that the tester's assertion that deviations were not required to obtain data representative of
operations that are typical for the facility?

Were all test method deviations acceptable?

Is a full description of the process and the unit being tested (including installed controls) provided?

Has a detailed discussion of source operating conditions, air pollution control device operations and the representativeness of
measurements made during the test been provided?

Is there documentation that the required process monitors have been calibrated and that the calibration is acceptable?

(Test Plan Item lor
Attachment) - Review
dimensions and diagram.

(Test Plan Item 8) •
Review test method
documentation.

(Test Plan Item 8) -
Assess deviations and
approval documents.

(Test Plan Item 7a & 7b) -
Review process
documentation.

Review description of
source operation, APCD
operation and sampling
for representativeness.

Review process
monitoring data.

Figure 89 - Regulatory Review of Quality Assessment Questions

The "Regulatory Assessment of Supporting Documentation" is an extension of the
"Completeness Check" questions. The Quality Assessment Questions (QAQ) screen (Figure
89 - Regulatory Review of Quality Assessment Questions) provides a check list to assist in
the assessment of the test report. While there may be several reasons for the assessment, one

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-113

-------
would be for the regulatory agency to be assured that the information contained in the report
is sufficiently complete, accurate and representative for the purposes which were intended.
Unlike the "Completeness Check" no answers have been selected. To determine the
responses for the "Completeness Check" the user of the QAQ screen can switch between
the "Completeness Check" questions and the ' Regulatory Review" questions by clicking
on the two tabs. Alternatively, the screen can be expanded to show both the "Completeness
Check" questions and the "Regulatory Review" questions by selecting the''Include
Completeness Questions" box (in large red circle as shown in Figure 90). The
"Completeness Questions" are highlighted with salmon colored shading and include the
ERT response. In some instances, the questions are identical to those which the ERT
provided a response based upon the presence of a response or attachment. However, while
the ERT only checks that information has been entered in the field or that an attachment has
been provided, the assessor can determine if that information provided meets the
requirements for that item.

r§1 Test Quality Questions

a x |

Quality Assessment Questions

Completeness Regulatory Review

r, .1

Reviewer's Name:

Regulatory Agency:

Reviewer's Email:

Reviewer's Phone:

Note: The answers and comments associated with the Completeness Questions (salmon shaded cells) are determined by the presence f Include
of documentation provided in the test report. Responses made by the applicable regulatory reviewer (rows with no shading of the t Completeness
Question field) will have precedence over automated responses made by the ERT in the Completeness assessment Comments should | Questions
be provided to substantiate any determination of sufficiency for the individual questions. The regulatory reviewer may not modify
data in the Project Data Set, only anwser the questions and provide ct

Question

Ans\ »

Comment

Click to Show ERT Data

Is there documentation that the required process monitors have been calibrated and that the
calibration is acceptable?

Review process monitoring
data.

Was the process capacity documented?

Review stated process
capacity.

Was the process operating within an appropriate range for the test program objective?

Compare process rate during
test with proposed range.

Were process data concurrent with testing?

Review process monitoring
data.

Were data included in the report for all parameters for which limits will be set?

Compare data collected to
Title V permit requirements.

Is there an assessment of the validity, representativeness, achievement of DQO's and usability of
the data?

Yes

Review the Tester's DQ
assessment

Did the report discuss the representativeness of the facility operations, control device operation,
and the measurements of the target pollutants, and were any changes from published test
methods or process and control device monitoring protocols identified?

Review the Tester's DQ
assessment

Figure 90 - Completeness and Regulatory Review Quality Assessment Questions

The Regulatory Review" screen contains a heading to identify the name, agency, email and
phone number of the individual responsible for the review. A date for the review is also
available and may be selected using the calendar (small red circle) pop up. Below the
heading is a "Note" providing a short description of the function of the "Completeness"
question rows (salmon shaded question cells) and use of the "Answer" and "Comment"
areas. Below the "Note" are the "Questions" providing a guide for the reviewer. To the
right of the "Question" is the "Answer" which is selected by a drop-down answer (Blank,
N/A, Yes and No). None of the questions require a response since the reviewer may have
higher priorities and thus limits the review to the most critical areas. In many instances, the
reviewer may limit the review to the' Emissions Results" and a brief assessment of the
ERT completeness responses, thus none of the questions will have a response. Even with a

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-114

-------
complete review of the questions, many questions may not have a response since the
questions may cover a test which was not required nor conducted. If an -Answer" is
selected, the reviewer may provide a note in the "Comment" column to the right of the
response justifying or clarifying the response. While the reviewer's observation may not be
necessary for a blank, "N/A" or "Yes" response, it is expected that a justification and/or
explanation would be provided for a negative response. There is no limit on the text length
allowed in the "Comment'* fields and you may adjust the width of the columns or the height
of rows to allow you to see all the text in the cell.

fII Test Quality Questions

Quality Assessment Questions

H X

Completeness Regulatory Review

Reviewer's Name:

Reviewer's Email:
Reviewer's Phone:

Review Date:

Note: The answers and comments associated with the Completeness Questions (salmon shaded cells) are determined by the pi
of documentation provided in the test report Responses made by the appl icable regulatory reviewer (rows with no shading of the
Question field) will have precedence over automated responses made by the ERT in the Completeness assessment Comments should
be provided to substantiate any determination of sufficiency for the individual questions. "Hie regulatory reviewer may not modify
data in the Project Data Set. only anwser the questions and provide cc

Indude r—i

Completeness a |
Questions

ffl

Question

Answer *

Comment

Click to Show ERT Data

Were thermocouple calibrations within method criteria?

Review Thermocouples
Calibrations

Was the pitot tube inspection acceptable?

Review Pilots Calibrations

Were nozzle inspections acceptable?

Review Nozzles Calibrations

Were flow meter calibrations acceptable?

Was the Method 1 sample point evaluation included in the report?

Were the appropriate number and location of sampling points used?

Were the cyclonic flow checks included in the report?

l^glTest Plan

Test Plan Title:' Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2

Test Plan Date: J 1| til iMf"

FadDty/Tester j Perrmt/SCC ; Locations/Methods [ Regulations i Process/APCD Methods cont, Audit/Calibrations [ Schedule [ Reviewers j Attach.

e below or attach complete documentation of any non standard test method used. Attach File I

e aH modifications and/or deviations from published methods. Attach dated documentation
of ALL non verbal request AMD approval for modifications and/or alternative methods requests.

Instead of using the procedures prescribed In NC rule 25NC7725-3, we propose using a combination of Method
202 and Method 315 procedures. These include purging with Nitrogen and the use of Methelene Chloride as the
extracant. In addition, we propose to use acetone as a finish solvent following the Methelene Chloride rinses as

I 9. Does the proposed sampling location meet the minimum EPA Method 1 criteria for I AttachRte I

acceptable measurement sites? Please fist below or attach the supporting 0 Yes No

documentation.

Yes v

IP 10. Has absence of cyclonic flow been verified per EPA Method 1 (Section 2.4)?

absence of cyclonic flow must be verified prior to testing. If yes, please attach
supporting documentation.

Cyclonic flow was determined by EPA Method 2 prior to the first test run as part of the initial velocity traverse.
|Flow angles were less than 15 degrees. See attached Cyconic flow traverse.

V 11. Select the method that will determine the oxygen

iM3A-instrumental

| Attach F8e j

|Prevtat« Page~] | WmtPafle. |

Figure 91 - OAO's Show Data

By clicking in the ' Click to Show ERT Data" cell beside the question the test report area(s)
which provide most or all of the documentation supplied by the facility is opened as shown
in Figure 91 - QAQ's Show Data. There are some questions which have documentation in
multiple areas to fully document the parameter covered by the comment. For example, there
may be attachments which provide additional detail which is not provided in another area.
In some cases, two windows will open. In other cases, you may open multiple cascading
windows by clicking on the "Attach File" button associated with the field associated with
the original item. Figure 92 shows an example of cascading open windows. The original
field in the "Quality Assessment Question" sheet that caused the first window to open is

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-115

-------
circled in red. This larger circle points to the window which opened and the smaller red
circle identifies the button used to open the "Attached File" window to show the files
containing additional details. You can switch between the different windows while
compiling or editing the text in the "Comment" field or deciding on the response. It is
suggested that you have some area of every window which you are using visible when
another window is above it to facilitate switching between windows. In some cases, when
some areas of the ERT are opened, you will hear a "bell" when you try to switch to another
window. In these cases, you will need to close the higher-level window to be able to open the
other window.

Test Quality Questions

Quality Assessment Questions

9 S

Completeness Regulatory Review

Reviewer's Name:
Regulatory Agency:
Reviewer's Email:
Reviewer's Phone:

; and comments associated with the Completeness Questions (salmon shaded cells) are determined by the presence Indude
of documentation provided in the test report. Responses made by the applicable regulatory reviewer (rows with no shading of the Completeness
Question field) will have precedence over automated responses made by the ERT in the Completeness assessment Comments should Questions
be provided to substantiate any determination of sufficiency for the individual questions. The regulatory reviewer may not modify
data in the Project Data Set, only anwser the questions and provide ct

Question

- Answi • ICommer

Is a description and drawing of test location provided?

! Is there documentation that the source or the test company soug
for deviations from the published test method prior to conductir
tester's assertion that deviations were not required to obtain da
operations that are typical for the facility?

m Test Plan

Test Plan Title:? Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Dryer 2

Test Plan Date:

Were all test method deviations acceptable?

i Is a full description of the process and the unit being tested (incl
provided?

| FacSty/Tester [ Permt/SCc] Locations/Wethods [Regulations j Process/APCD | Methodscont j Audit/Calibrations f Schedule [ Reviewers ] Attach.;
© 1. Please enter sampling location information, (all dimensions in inches)

(Required before test data entry)

To add or view an attachment: To add more attachment items, enter the description of the attachment in the

- double click on the "paper clip" symbol bottom row of the attachdesc column. Then add your attachment.

- select "add" to add I file Tips to reduce the PDF file size:

-select view to view a file . Create PDF directly from application.

- Attach individual components not compiled material

- Use descriptive file names (i.e. M29-field-data_ll-ll-ll.pdf)

- Attach compressed image files (JPG, GIF, PNG) or CGM
• Scan paper documents at 200 dpi

Add Emissions/Concentrations

retted * - Process Rate, Parameter -

| Previous Page Next Page

Figure 92 - Cascading Multiple Windows

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-116

-------
Emissions Results

[=§! Test Report Review _ H X

Applicable State and Federal Regulations for this Test Report:

Regulation

Compound

Limit -r Unit

40CFR63 Supbart XXX Mercury

Mercury

1 ng/dscm

40CFR63 Subpart xxx

Arsenic

0.25 lb/Tons of Anthracite Burned

Compound Emissions:

Location Compound Unit of Measure -• Runl *¦ Run2 - Run3 * Run Average

stack - Method 29

Lead

gr/dscf

8.63E-03

1.07E-02

9.52E-03

9.62E-03

stack - Method 29

Lead

gr/dscf@7%02

1.56E-02

2.52E-02

1.92E-02

2.00E-02

stack - Method 29

Manganese

gr/dscf

8.63E-03

1.07E-02

9.52E-03

9.62E-03

stack - Method 29

Manganese

gr/dscf@7%02

1.56E-02

2.52E-02

1.92E-02

2.00E-02

stack - Method 29

Manganese

Ib/hr

2.30E+00

3.00E+00

2.12E+00

2.47E+00

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

Ib/hr

5.32E-02

1.35E-02

1.20E-02

2.62E-02

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

gr/dscf

2.75E-03

6.55E-04

6.23E-Q4

1.34E-03

Inlet - Method 30B

Mercury

Ib/hr

SError

Inlet - Method 30B

Mercury

ug/dscm

fflError

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

Eg/hr

2.41E+01

6.12E+00

5.45E+O0

1.19E+01

stack - Method 30B 3 6

Mercury

Eg/min

3.82E-01

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

lb / Dry Standard Cubic Feet of E

1.33E-02

9.64E-04

1.00E-03

5.09E-03

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

ug/dscm@7%02

1.14E+04

3.53E+03

2.58 E+03

5.84E+03

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

ug/dscm

6.30E+03

1.50E+03

1.43E+03

3.08 E+03

stack - Method 30B 3 6

Mercury

ug/dscm@7%02

7.82E+02

stack - Method 30B

Mercury

mg/dscm

6.30E+00

1.50E+00

1.43E+00

3.08E+00

cord: H > M > | ^ 1 Jo Filter

Search i |

Figure 93 - Test Report Review - Average Emissions

Upon receipt of a completed test report, you may access and review the data by selecting
the appropriate project data set (see the Selecting a Project Data Set for more information
on selecting a project data set) and clicking the "Emissions Results" button in the
Regulatory Agency Review" area of the "ERT Main Menu". The top part of the screen
shows the applicable state and/or federal regulation for the test report as was entered in Item
2 of the "Regulations Screen" of the test plan section of the 'ERTMain MenuAs shown
in Figure 93 - Test Report Review - Average Emissions, the "Emissions Results" screen
provides a quick method to directly compare the measured emissions with the regulatory
requirements provided in the "Setup/Test Plan" area of the ERT. As is evident in the figure,
there is a limited amount of detail associated with the test program and some additional
review may be desirable for a proper assessment of the representativeness, precision and
accuracy of the values shown. The bottom part of the screen shows the emissions for each
compound. Click on the record arrows in the bottom left of the screen to scroll through the
compounds. The columns are as follows:

Applicable State and Federal Regulations for this Test Report:

Regulation: The title of the regulation (auto-populated from information

entered in the test plan).

Compound: The analyte applicable in the regulation.

Limit: The upper limit of the analyte concentration.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-117

-------
Unit:

The unit of regulation measurement.

Compound Emissions:

Location: A unique sampling location name, such as inlet, stack, ESP inlet, scrubber

outlet, etc and the Method used.

Compound: The analyte collected and analyzed.

Unit of Measure: The emission concentration or mass rate that is being calculated.

Run 1: Emission results of the compound of interest in the unit of

measure for Run 1.

Run 2: Emission results of the compound of interest in the unit of

measure for Run 2.

Run 3: Emission results of the compound of interest in the unit of

measure for Run 3.

Run Average: Average mission results of the compound of interest in the unit

of measure for Run 1, 2 and 3.

Alternatively, you may select the "Run Data" from the "ERT - Main Menu" then select
the location and method to view from the "Select Location —Method' pick list. Accessing
the test information at this level allows you to review and identify details about the
individual data entered by the report preparer and or intermediate calculations or QA/QC
indicators which are not available using the high level "Emissions Results" screen. For
details on the contents of these more detailed screens, you should go to the appropriate
location of this User Manual in either Chapter 4: Create Test Plan or Chapter 5: Test Data

Comprehensive Regulatory Test Assessment

F§] Comments: _ n x

Comment By: |Test Reviewer

Test times per run were 72 minutes vs. 90 minutes as stated in the Test Plan.

Figure 94 - Test Reviewer Comments
In this area, the Regulatory Agency test reviewer can enter additional comments which are
not provided in the "Regulatory Assessment of Supporting Documentation" or provide

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-118

-------
other information which the Regulatory Authority wishes to make. Comments may be
entered directly into the text box.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-119

-------
Chapter 8: Printed Reports

In the "Printed Reports" section of the ERT "Main Menu," you have the option to print
whichever section(s) of the test report you choose. You can view the report or table on
screen, export the report or table to Microsoft Word, or create a .pdf of the report or table.
Click on the "Select Report/Data Table" and a screen like Figure 95- Report Selection
Menu will open. The type of reports includes:

• Test Plan

• Test Plan Review

• Full Test Report (excludes RATA's)

• Sampling Location Table

• Test Parameters Table

• Sampling/Stack Data Results Summary Table

• Sampling/StackData Results Summary Table

• Sampling/Stack Data Results Detail Table

• Emissions Summary Table

• Emissions Summary Table with Limits

• Process Run Data Table

• APCD Run Data Table

• Process Lab Run Data Table

• Attachments

• Completeness Questions

• 30B QA/QC (if Method 30B is entered into the file)

• Regulatory Review Questions

• Location - PST (RATA results, if RATA entered into the file)

Another way to access the Relative Accuracy Results is to open the "Run Data" screen of
the "CEMS Information and Run Data" tab, click on the "Relative Accuracy Results." (See
Performance Specification Data for more information). The RATA results are not included
when you print the "Full Test Report." As a result, you will need to add the printed RATA
results to the "Full Test Report" pages.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-120

-------
i=3] View/Export Reports/Tables (press Crtl-P to print reports)

Test Plan

Test Plan Review

Full Test Report (excludes RATA's)

Sampling Location Table

Test Parameters Table

Sampling/Stack Data Results Summary Table

Sampling/Stack Data Results Detail Table

Emissions Summary Table

Emissions Summary Table with Limits

Process Run Data Table

APCD Run Data Table

Process Lab Run Data Table

Attachments

Completeness Questions

Method 30B QA/QC

irt Report/Table to Microsoft Excel

Create PDF of Report/Table

Figure 95- Report Selection Menu

icrosoft Word

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-121

-------
Test Plan

1^ Press Ctrl+P to Print

_ H X

Facility Information:

jEf.vtran Mental Coicoe Furniture Co.

Test Plan

Emissions Testing of Wood Chip Drye r 2
5/25/2009

Testing Company:

555 55th £tN Ave

Contact:
Phone:
Fai:
Email:

St ate ID:

inviro M. Caickms

ZEE

919) 555-2525

'915$ 555-5252

¦siviro caicky!£gai,.-!fc»:cf.cb'i£.coffi

missions Factors <& Micy .Apples boss Gimp

CACPS EMAD (0312-02)

ReaesicJi T riar.aie Park

Cmtact:
Phone:
Fas:
Email:

sldE Myers

[913) 541-5407

[919) 541-1055

nyerarongepE gcv

Project Number:

Industry NAICS:
.Air P ermit Number:

:c:-123 4

FRS ft 2"552

Permitted Source E> Nairn:

[drI

~[[Dyef 2~

Permitted M aTiwmm P races Rate:
|l 75 Tor-spar Hatr ~

Mai.Normal Operation Process Rate:
1 [l50 Tans per Haur |

Target Process Test Rate

|l25 Tons per Hmg

see .< DescrtBiai 1102X104

Externa! CoaJbustian. Boilers - Industrial - Aitfhrati 6 C-cel - Tia%»!tag Grate
'Overfeed; Stcker

L What h the specific purpose for the proposed testing?

"DeteraiiiE cosaplence tsittiNSPS and Stale SIP ez isaoRslim i etkms
Estsbli 3: C.AM aar.itofins narssieters as stated Sr. T itl-= V perait" "'"

2 List ah state and federal regulations that appfc to the proposed testing:

Rerckrira Dficnp bra

C -•ap:T 1A

Limit

U«it

R#: Da-r Tsk PT5

Anaaic

0.CO2

lbi*r

3. Wil the test results be used for other regulatory purposes {e.g_ emission inventories,
permit applications, etc.) bevond that stated above? Ifves, erplain.

Reailts will be used for satSbBslasg total PM (filterable and condensable) ankaons as required by State for
:or.3obdated E>r, i'smth* Resorting

4a_ Enter the process data to be documented during testing.

Pmes Pina e»r

Uakz

r*rjet Yah t

C«aanc

.taisacjSo Bsn»d

Tosalij

FT5 TmI Staff

-------
rectangle, will open the report types, such as the one shown in Figure 96 - Test Plan Report
Print Preview Screen.

Selecting "Test Plan" from the menu will activate the four buttons below the menu
selection field. The four buttons are "View Report/Table on Screen," "Export
Report/Table to Microsoft Word," "Export Report/Table to Microsoft Excel," and
"Create PDF of Report/Table." By selecting "View Report/Table on Screen" a "Final
Test Plan Report" like Figure 98 will be created and opened on your desktop screen. You
can adjust the location and size of the window and thus view the produced report. You can
also magnify the size of the report and scroll around the opened page. Since only one page
at a time is visible, you can see other pages of the report by clicking on the arrows at the
bottom left of the screen.

You can either press "Ctrl+P" to print the pages to any of your available printers or you can
close the window and use one of the other three options. You can produce a Microsoft
Word file which approximates the document generated to the desktop screen. While the
Word file may be edited to improve the appearance or correct minor imperfections, the
effort to produce a desired appearance may not justify the extra effort required. You may
also produce a Microsoft Excel file. This file row is not formatted to produce the document
previewed but separates the individual elements which are printed into different column and
rows. Lastly, you may produce an Acrobat PDF file which can be emailed, or attached to
the ERT as a time stamped file for documentary purposes.

Test Plan Review

~ Press Ctrl-Pto Print ~ EI S

Test Plan Review Comments

Test Plan Section

Field ID

Facility Information

FacName

Comment

The email address appears to be to someone other than the person listed as the contact. Please verify the contact persons
name and email addres prior to submitting the test report.

Also, the logitude does not appear to be correct 1 think that the Logitude should be a negative number. Please verify during
the emission test the correct latitude and logitude for the centerline of the stack.

Test Plan Section

Field ID

Source Information

PermittedSourcelD

Comment

While a targer processing rate of 90 Mmtu/hr will be acceptable for the RATA, this may limit future operations if the
reference test data will be used for compliance testing and is substantially below the normal operating range.

Page: 1 ] > ~ | ^ No Filter [ < I I" I ~

Figure 97 - Test Plan Review Comments

Selecting "Test Plan Review" produces a printed report that looks like Figure 97 - Test Plan
Review Comments. While this report may be mailed, emailed or attached to the ERT
"Project Data Set" this information is included in the PDS for use by both the person
reviewing the plan and the preparer. While the size of the PDS of a plan makes it amenable
to send as an email attachment, some reviewers may wish to transmit their review by paper
or as a separate electronic file. If the agency returned the test plan comments in the PDS, the
tester can click on "Test Plan Review" in the "Printed Reports" area of the "ERT Main
Menu". Click on the "Test Plan Review" button to view the agency's comments on the test
plan. No fields are editable in the comments.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-123

-------
The "Project Data Set Submittal History" will show if the agency approved the test plan or
requires more information if a submittal package is created. You can update the test plan
based on the agency's comments, update the " Submittal History," and resubmit the Project
Data Set.

Full Test Report (excludes RATAs and 201A ISO's and excludes RATAs)

Selecting "Full Test Report" will produce a file comprised of the components of a typical
complete test report. The report will have a cover page with signature blocks for the facility
representative and the test company representative. Reports of the RATA results are not
produced during the creation of the "Full Test Report" and must be generated separately.
Attachments like RATA results are not included in the "Full Test ReportHowever, a list
of attachments is provided in the report. If the regulatory authority requires the attachments,
each attachment must be produced separately for inclusion in the file or printed report. Any
changes made to the "Test Plan" sections to reflect as tested changes will be produced in
the "Full Test Report." The full data set includes all the individual report components listed
below the "Full Test Report." Details of the information in each of these components are
described below.

Sampling Location Table

This table includes the information related to all sampling locations. This includes the
location, round duct diameter, rectangular duct length, rectangular duct width, equivalent
diameter, distance from upstream disturbance, distance from downstream disturbance,
number of traverse ports and minimum traverse points. These values were provided in the
test plan item 6.

Test Parameters Table

This table includes the full data set for the parameters of the test plan. This includes the
location, target parameter, test method, number of test runs, test run duration, sample points
and comments.

Sampling/Stack Data Results Summary Table

This report includes a summary of all location - methods run with calculated data with
average. These include isokinetic, instrumental and 30B test data. The report includes the
location-method; run numbers; test dates; run start and finish times; net run time (minutes);
dry gas meter volume sampled (dscf); moisture content of stack gas (%); moisture
saturation at stack gas temperature (%), or moisture (%); carbon dioxide (%); oxygen (%);
average stack gas temperature (degrees F); Square Roof of the Average velocity (ionches of
water), dry volumetric flow rate (dry scfm); actual wet volumetric flue gas flow rate (acfm);
percent isokinetic of sampling rate(%); F-Factor (dscfm/mmBtu @ %02); fuel type; Fw; and
Fc.

Method 201A Point to Point Isokinetic Calcs Table

This report includes a point to point data to calculate the isokinetics. These data elements
includes the run number, point number, run time (min), gas meter reading, velocity (inches of
water), delta P square root, gas velocity (fl/s), gas volume (dscf), and point to point isokinetics (%).

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-124

-------
Sampling/Stack Data Results Detail Table

This report includes the details of all location - methods per run. The report includes for the
isokinetic methods: location- method; run number; test date; run start and finish time; net
traversing points; net run time (minutes); nozzle diameter (inches); Pitot tube coefficient;
dry gas meter calibration factor; barometric pressure (inches of mercury); average orifice
meter differential (inches in water); dry gas meter volume sampled (cubic feet); average dry
gas meter temperature (degree F); dry gas meter volume sampled (dscf); total moisture
liquid collected (g);volume of water vapor (standard cubic feet); moisture content of stack
gas (%); moisture saturation at stack gas temperature (%); dry mole fraction; carbon dioxide
(%); oxygen (%); carbon monoxide & nitrogen (%); fuel factor; dry molecular weight (lb/lb-
mole); wet molecular weight (lb/lb-mole); flue gas static pressure (inches of water);
Absolute flue gas pressure (inches of mercury); average stack gas temperature (degrees F);
Square root of average velocity head (inches of water); average stack gas velocity
(feet/second); stack cross-sectional area (squared feet); dry volumetric flow rate (dry scfm);
actual wet volumetric flue gas flow rate (acfm); percent isokinetic of sampling rate (%);
percent excess air (%); F-Factor (dscfm/mmBtu @ %02); round duct diameter (inches);
rectangular duct width (inches); rectangular duct length (inches); Fw; and Fc.

If the report contains method 3 OB, the data elements included in the report are location-
method; run number; test date; run start and finish time; net traversing points - Sample A;
net traversing points - Sample B; net run time (minutes); Pitot tube coefficient - Sample A;
Pitot tube coefficient - Sample B; dry gas meter calibration factor - Sample A; dry gas
meter calibration factor - Sample B; barometric pressure (inches of mercury); average
orifice meter differential (inches in water); dry gas meter volume sampled (cubic feet)-
Sample A; dry gas meter volume sampled (cubic feet)- Sample B; dry gas meter volume
sampled (dscf) - Sample A; dry gas meter volume sampled (dscf) - Sample B; average dry
gas meter temperature (degree F); total moisture liquid collected (g) - Sample A; total
moisture liquid collected (g) - Sample B; volume of water vapor (standard cubic feet)-
Sample A; volume of water vapor (standard cubic feet)- Sample B; moisture content of
stack gas (%); moisture saturation at stack gas temperature (%); dry mole fraction; carbon
dioxide (%); oxygen (%); carbon monoxide & nitrogen (%); fuel factor; dry molecular
weight (lb/lb-mole); wet molecular weight (lb/lb-mole); flue gas static pressure (inches of
water); Absolute flue gas pressure (inches of mercury); average stack gas temperature
(degrees F); Square root of average velocity head (inches of water);average stack gas
velocity (feet/second); stack cross-sectional area (squared feet); dry volumetric flow rate
(dry scfm); actual wet volumetric flue gas flow rate (acfm); percent isokinetic of sampling
rate (%); percent excess air (%); F-Factor (dscfm/mmBtu @ %02); round duct diameter
(inches); rectangular duct width (inches); rectangular duct length (inches); Fw; andFc.

If the report contains instrumental methods, the data elements included in the report are
location- method; run number; test date; run start and finish time; carbon dioxide (%);
oxygen (%); fuel factor; dry volumetric flow rate, dry scfm; F-Factor (dscfm/mmBtu @
%02); moisture, (%); analyzer make; analyzer model; analyzer serial number; operating grange;
operating units; no. readings/average; calibration set; calibration pre zero cylinder Id; calibration
pre zero cylinder instrument response; calibration pre zero cylinder bias; calibration pre zero
cylinder drift; calibration pre zero high cylinder Id; calibration pre high cylinder instrument
response; calibration pre high cylinder bias; calibration pre high cylinder drift; calibration post

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-125

-------
zero cylinder Id; calibration post zero cylinder instrument response; calibration post zero
cylinder bias; calibration post zero cylinder drift; calibration post zero high cylinder Id;
calibration post high cylinder instrument response; calibration post high cylinder bias;
calibration post high cylinder drift; C average; C average units; C gas; C gas units; fuel type;

Fw; Fc; Cgasw; and Cgasw units.

Emissions Summary Table

This summary report includes all of the compound data for each run of a location-method.

For each compound, the table provides for each run the run number, Mmass (mg); gr/dscf;
gr/dscf @ 7% 02; and average of these.

Emissions Summary Table with Limits

This report is identical to the "Emissions Summary Table" with the addition of any
regulatory emission limits which were provided in Item 4 "Regulations" of the "Test Plan"

Process Run Data Table

This data table contains all of the process run data. This includes the name; run number;
value provided; UOM; target value; and any comments per run.

APCD Run Data Table

This data table contains the air pollution control device data. This includes the name of the
control device; run number; value provided; UOM; target value; and any comments per run.

Process Lab Run Data Table

This data table contains the process parameters requiring lab analysis. This includes the
name of the process parameter; run number; value provided; UOM; and any comments per
run.

Attachments

This is a list of attachments contained in the ERT file.

Completeness Questions

This data table contains the list of the "Completeness Questions" describing those
components of a manual test program and an instrumental test program. The ERT's
assessment of the presence or absence of each component is also provided along with any
comments provided by the report preparer concerning those components described in the
question.

Regulatory Review Questions

This data table contains the list of "Regulatory Review Questions" which in addition to the
"Completeness Questions" include supplementary detail questions about the presence and
quality of components within those broad categories. The regulatory agency responses to the
detail questions are provided as well as any comments justifying or describing the response.

Relative Accuracy Results

Due to the complexity and variations in Relative Accuracy Tests the reports cannot be
produced with the current test report generator in the ERT. To produce a report of the

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-126

-------
RATA results, you should open the Run Data area, select the Performance Specification to
be printed from the "Select Location-Method" area of the "Test Data Details", then produce
the report by selecting "Relative Accuracy Results" at the bottom right of the screen. Once
the report is shown on the screen, you can print the report to any printer available from your
computers print menu. You may also depress the right mouse button then select "Export"
and select one of the options. If available, selecting "PDF" replicates the report on the
screen. Selecting "Word RTF file" produces a file which when imported into MS Word is
usable but not easily edited to improved appearance.

The "Relative Accuracy Results" data table contains the reference test method results and
the CEM results in the emissions concentration, rate or fuel energy units specified in the
reference test method run data emissions and the CEM output, the arithmetic average of the
runs performed, the individual run differences between the two measurement systems, the
arithmetic averages of the differences, the standard deviations of the differences, the
confidence coefficient of the differences, the relative accuracy calculated using the
reference method and the relative accuracy calculated using the emissions standard.

Method 30B QA/QC

This data table includes the list of Method 30B runs that do not meet QA/QC specifications.
The report includes the stack run number, the specifications, and acceptance criteria.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-127

-------
Chapter 9: Administration

Help/ System Reports

3] ERTADMIN

ERT Help / Administration Screen

ERT Version: |J

12/11/2022

Release Date:

Check for New ERT
0 Check Version on Startup

Release Date:

Access 2016 16.0.14326 64-bit

ERT Version History
Field Result Calculations
Emission/Concentration Calculations

ERT User Guide
ERT Methods and Target Parameters
ERT Data Dictionary

Web Links

EPA ERT Home Paoe

Industry NAICS Search
FRS Search
CAS Number Search
Method Information
CDX Home Paae
Audt Sample Info.

ERT Support

Theresa Lowe

U.S. Envronmental Protection Agency
Office of Ar Quaky Piannng and Standards Sector Pofcies
and Programs DwBion, Measurement Pokey Group, D243-05
RTP NC 27711 Tel. 919.541.4786 Fax 919.541,1039

Lowe. Theresa@epa. gov

Figure 98 - The ERT Help/Administration Screen

The administration area of the ERT includes a "Help /System (Sys) Reports" button.
Clicking on the button will open the "ERT Help / administration'' screen, as seen in Figure
98 - The ERT Help/Admini stration Screen. The ERT version and release date are at the
top. The ERT support names and contact information is provided at the bottom. The two
middle sections include buttons that provide more information or help, and websites for
more information orhelp.

Buttons:

ERT Version History

The ERT Versions from oldest to most
current with a listing of the descriptions of
the updates.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-128

-------
Field Result Calculations

Emission/Concentration Calculations

ERT User's Manual

ERT Methods and Target Parameters

ERT Data Dictionary

Broken down per test run tabs, a table of the
field, field description, and the formula
used to calculate the provided value.

A table providing the formula to provide
the calculated value of
emission/concentration. The table provides
the emission/concentration, and the formula
used.

If the file "uman.pdf' is available in the
folder with the ERT; thq" Users ManiiaF
will be accessed for the user to read. If the
file is not available, an alert reminds the
user to download the user's manual from
the ERT website.

Clicking on this tab brings up a table that
lists all source test methods which the ERT
is capable of documenting. The table
identifies the methods by number with their
associated description and the compound(s)
associated with the test method

Web Links:

EPA ERT Home Page

Industry NAICS Search

FRS Search

CAS Number Search

Method Information

CDX Home Page

The ERT home page within the CHIEF web pages.
https://www. epa. gov electronic-reportirm-air-emissions/
electronic-reporting-tool-ert

North American Industry Classification (NAICS) website.

http://www. census, gov/eos/www/naics/

Federal Registry System (FRSYhttps://www.epa.gov/enviro/frs-
querv-page

Chemical Name search to get the Chemical Abstract Service
identifier associated with a gas or chemical.

http://webbook. nist. gov/chemistrv/name-ser. html

The main page for the Emissions Measurement Center which

provides information on test methods for measuring pollutants

from stationary sources and other sources.

https://www. epa. gov/emc/

Central Data Exchange website;

.https://cdx.epa.gov/epa_home.asp

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-129

-------
Appendix A: Calculations

Calculations and Decision Criteria Determination for RATAs

The numerous, interrelated and complex calculations and decisions criteria for Performance
Specifications 2, 3 and 4 for O2, CO, NOx and SOx preclude a simple listing of all the equations
and logic statement in a printed document format. To document the calculations used in the ERT
for the Performance Specifications, an Excel Spreadsheet is attached to this page for users to
download and examine to access the calculations, logic decisions and decision criteria. To
examine or save the Excel Spreadsheet, open the attachments module of Adobe Acrobat. To
open the module, click on the paper clip symbol of the left side of screen. The spreadsheet is
named RATAEvaluation.xlsx. Click on the file and select the option desired (open in the native
application or save attachment). This procedure may vary depending on the version of Acrobat
that are using.

ERT Emission/Concentration Calculations

Units of Measure

grains/dscf

grains/dscf corrected 02

grains/dscf corrected C02

grams/hr
grams/minute
grams/sec
kg/day
kg/hr
kg/year
lb/cfNG
lb/day
lb/hr

lb/million BTU using CO2
lb/million BTU using O2

Calculations and Conversion Formulas used in ERT

Format(7000*[lb/dscf],'Scientific') AS [gr/dscf]

Format([gr/dscf|*(20.9-[CorrPerc])/(20.9-[PercO2]),'Scientific') AS
[gr/dscf@[CorrPerc]%02]

Format([gr/dscf]*([CorrPerc])/([PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[gr/dscf@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*453.592,'Scientific') AS [g/hr]
Format([Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*453.592,'Scientific') AS [g/min]
Format([Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*453.592/60,'Scientific') AS [g/sec]
Format(0.06*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*453.592*24,'Scientific') AS [kg/day]
Format(0.06*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*453.592,'Scientific') AS [kg/hr]
Format(0.06*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*453.592*24*365,'Scientific') AS [kg/year]
[lb/dscf] AS [lb/dscfNG]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf]*24,'Scientific') AS [lb/day]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf],'Scientific') AS [lb/hr]

Format([lb/dscf]*[Fc]* 100/[PercCO2],'Scientific') AS [lb/mmBtuC02]

Format([lb/dscf]* [Fd]*20.9/(20.9-[Perc02]),'Scientific') AS
[lb/mmBtu02]

lb/minute

Format([Qsd]*[lb/dscf],'Scientific') AS [lb/min]

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-130

-------
Units of Measure

lb/trillion BTU using CO2

lb/trillion BTU using 02
lb/year
mg/acm
mg/dscm
mg/dscm corrected 02

mg/dscm corrected C02
mg/hr
mg/wscm
ng/dscm
ng/dscm corrected 02

ng/dscm corrected C02

ng/hr

ng/joule using CO2

ng/joule using O2
percent(%)
percent(%) corrected 02

percent(%) corrected C02

Calculations and Conversion Formulas used in ERT

Format([lb/dscf]*[Fc]* 100000000/[PercC02],'Scientific') AS
[lb/TBtuC02]

Format([lb/dscf] * [Fd] *1000000*20.9/(20.9-
[Perc02]),'Scientific')AS[lb/TBtu02]

Format(60*8760[Qsd]*[lb/dscf],'Scientific') AS [lb/Year]

Format([mg/wscm]*(527.67*[Ps])/(29.92*(459.67+[ts])),'Scientific') AS
[mg/acm]

Format([lb/dscf] * 453.592 * 35.32* 10A3,'Scientific') AS [mg/dscm]

Format([mg/dscm]*(20.9-[CorrPerc])/(20.9-[PercO2]),'Scientific') AS
[mg/dscm@ [CorrPerc] %02]

Format([mg/dscm]*([CorrPerc])/([PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[mg/dscm@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf|*453.592* 1000,'Scientific') AS [mg/hr]

Format([lb/dscf| * 453.592 * 35.32* 10A3*(l-([PercH20]/100)),
'Scientific') AS [mg/wscm]

Format([lb/dscf| * 453.592 * 35.32* 10A9,'Scientific') AS [ng/dscm]

Format([ng/dscm]*(20.9-[CorrPerc])/(20.9-[PercO2]),'Scientific')
AS[ng/dscm@[CorrPerc]%02]

Format([ng/dscm]*([CorrPerc]/[PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[ng/dscm@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf|*453.592* 1000* 1000* 1000,'Scientific') AS
[ng/hr]

Format([lb/dscf| * [Fc] * 429.92261418213 5 * 100/[PercCO2],'Scientific')
AS[ng/jouleC02]

Format([lb/dscf| * [Fd] *429.922614182135 *20.9/(20.9-
[Perc02]),'Scientific') AS [ng/joule02]

format([lb/dscf| * 385.3 / [Fwt] * 10A2,'Scientific') as [Percent(%)]

Format([percent(%)]*(20.9-[CorrPerc])/(20.9-[PercO2]),'Scientific') AS
[mg/dscm@ [CorrPerc] %02]

Format([percent(%)]*([CorrPerc])/([PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[percent(%) @[CorrPerc]%C02]

pg/dscm

Format([lb/dscf| * 453.592 * 35.32* 10A12,'Scientific') AS [pg/dscm]

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-131

-------
Units of Measure

Calculations and Conversion Formulas used in ERT

pg/dscm corrected 02

pg/dscm corrected C02
ppb

ppb corrected 02

ppb corrected C02
ppm

ppm corrected 02

ppm corrected C02
ppt

ppt corrected 02

ppt corrected C02

tons/day
tons/hr
tons/year
ug/dscm

ug/dscm corrected 02

ug/dscm corrected C02
ug/hr

Format([pg/dscm] * (20.9- [CorrPerc])/(20.9- [Perc02]),' Scientific')
AS[pg/dscm@[CorrPerc]%02]

Format([pg/dscm]*([CorrPerc]/[PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[pg/dscm@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format([lb/dscf] * 385.3 / [Fwt] * 10A9,'Scientific') as [ppb]

Format([ppb] * (20.9- [CorrPerc] )/(20.9- [Perc02]),'Scientific')
AS [ppb@[CorrPerc] %02]

Format([ppb]*([CorrPerc]/[PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[ppb@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format([lb/dscf] * 385.3 / [Fwt] * 10A6,'Scientific') as [ppm]

Format([ppm]*(20.9-[CorrPerc])/(20.9-[PercO2]),'Scientific')
AS [ppm@[CorrPerc] %02]

Format([ppm]*([CorrPerc]/[PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[ppm@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format([lb/dscf| * 385.3 / [Fwt] * 10A12,'Scientific') as [ppt]

Format([ppt] * (20.9- [CorrPerc] )/(20.9- [Perc02]),'Scientific')

AS [ppt@ [CorrPerc] %02]

Format([ppt]*([CorrPerc]/[PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[ppt@ [CorrPerc] %C02]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf|*.0005*24,'Scientific') AS [tons/day]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf|*.0005,'Scientific') AS [tons/hr]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf|*.0005*24*365,'Scientific') AS [tons/year]

Format([lb/dscf| * 453.592 * 35.32* 10A6,'Scientific') AS [ug/dscm]

Format([ug/dscm] * (20.9- [CorrPerc])/(20.9- [Perc02]),' Scientific')
AS[ug/dscm@[CorrPerc]%02]

Format([ug/dscm]*([CorrPerc]/[PercC02]),'Scientific') AS
[ug/dscm@[CorrPerc]%C02]

Format(60*[Qsd]*[lb/dscf|*453.592* 1000* 1000,'Scientific') AS [ug/hr]

MMBtu/hr

IIf([fd]=0,",CDbl((60*[Qsd]/[Fd])*((20.9-[Perc02])/20.9))))

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-132

-------
Instrumental Test Method (ITM) Run Results
Field ID Field Description

CalPreZSysBias Calibration Pre Zero Cylinder Bias

CalPreHSysBias Calibration Pre High Cylinder Bias

Cgas Cgas

CalPostZSysBias Calibration Post Zero Cylinder Bias

Field

Calculations

FormatNumber(100 * (Crv - Cv) / CS, 2);

Crv instrument Response; Cv=Cylinder Response; CS=Span
Response

FormatNumber(100 * (Crv - Cv) / CS, 2);

Crv instrument Response; Cv=Cylinder Response; CS=Span
Response

CalcCgas = (Cavg - Co) * (Cma / (Cm - Co))

FormatNumber(100 * (Crv - Cv) / CS, 2);

Crv instrument Response; Cv=Cylinder Response; CS=Span
Response

CalPostHSysBias Calibration Post High Cylinder Bias FormatNumber(100 * (Crv - Cv) / CS, 2);

CalPostZDrift Calibration Post Zero Cylinder Drift
CalPostHDrift Calibration Post High Cylinder Drift
Cgasw Cgasw

Crv instrument Response; Cv=Cylinder Response; CS=Span
Response

Abs(Me.CalPostZSysBias - Me.CalPreZSysBias)
Abs(Me.CalPostHSysBias -Me.CalPreHSysBias)

Me.Cgas = Me.Cgasw / (1 - (Me.MoisturePerc /100))

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-133

-------
Method 30B Sample Data

Field ID Field Description

AM3 Section 1 Spike Recovery (Crec)A

BM3 Section 1 Spike Recovery (Crec)B

SRMA Section 1 Spike Recovery Mass A

SRMB Section 1 Spike Recovery Mass B

ASRP Section 1 Recovery Percentage A

BSRP Section 1 Recovery Percentage B

AB Section 2 Breakthrough (%B)A

BBP Section 2 Breakthrough (%B)B

ISRA Initial Sampling Rate A

ISRB Initial Sampling Rate B

ASRA Average Sampling Rate A

ASRB Average sampling rate B

ERT Field Calculations

SpikeRecovery([AMl],[AVT],[AMS], [BM1],[BVT], [Forms] ![frmRunDataDetails
Master]! [subForm]! [subfrmHdrData30B]! [MercuryMassUnits]) Function
SpikeRecovery(Ml 1,VT1, Ms, M12, VT2, MMUnits) As Variant If Nz(Ml 1, 0) = 0 Or
Val(Nz(Ms)) = 0 Or Val(Nz(VTl))= 0 Or Val(Nz(VT2)) = 0 Then SpikeRecovery =
""ElseSpikeRecovery = Abs(((Ml 1/ VT1) - (M12 /VT2)) * MassScalar(MMUnits)) End If
End Function

SpikeRecovery([BM1 ], [BVT], [BMS], [AMI ],[AVT], [Forms]! [frmRunDataDetails
Master]! [subForm]! [subfrmHdrData30B]! [MercuryMassUnits]) Function
SpikeRecovery (Ml 1, VT1, Ms, M12, VT2, MMUnits) As Variant If Nz(Ml 1, 0) = 0 Or
Val(Nz(Ms)) = 0 Or Val(Nz(VTl)) = 0 Or Val(Nz(VT2)) = 0 Then SpikeRecovery = ""
ElseSpikeRecovery = Abs(((Ml 1 / VT1) - (Ml 2 / VT2)) *MassScalar(MMUnits)) End If
End Function

IIf(Nz([AM3],"",ABS[AM3]*[AVT]/ MassScalar([Forms]! [frmRunDataDetails
Master]! [subForm]! [subfrmHdrData30B]! [MercuryMassUnits]))

IIf(Nz([BM3], "")="", M",Abs([BM3]*[BVT])/MassScalar([Forms]! [frmRunDataDetails
Master]! [subForm]! [subfrmHdrData30B]! [MercuryMassUnits]))

IIf(Nz([AM3],"")="",11 ",Round(Abs (([SRMA]/[AMS])*100),3))

IIf(Nz([BM3],"")="",'"',Round(Abs(([SRMB]/[BMS])*100),3))

IIf(Nz([AMI ])="" OrNz([AM2])="","",Round([AM2]/[AMI ]* 100,3))

IIf(Nz([BMl])="" OrNz([BM2])="",'"',Round([BM2]/[BMl]*100,3))

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subform]! [subfrmLabData30B]! [InitA]

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData30B]! [InitB]

Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData30B]!

[AvgOfSampleRateA]

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData30B]!
[AvgOfSampleRateB]

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-134

-------
Field ID

MaxDevA
MaxDevB
AV
BVT

SampDev A

SampDevB

SMCA
SMCB
CdA

CdB

CwA

CwB

Field Description

Maximum deviation from sampling rate A

Maximum deviation from sampling rateB

Total Sample Volume (Vt)A

Total Sample Volume (Vt)B

Spl Vol deviation from field recovery run A

Spl Vol deviation from field recovery run B

Sample Mercury Mass Collected A
Sample Mercury Mass Collected B
Sample Mercury Concentration (Cd)A

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cd)B

DryAMC

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cw)A

Sample Mercury Concentration (Cw)B

Test Run Mercury Concentration

ERT Field Calculations

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData3 OB]! [MaxDevA]

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData30B]! [MaxDevB]

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData30B]! [VtA]

[Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmLabData30B]! [VtB]

Round(l 00*Abs([AVT] [Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]!
[subfrmLabData30B]![AvgSpikeVolume])/[AVT],l)

Round(100*Abs([BVT]- [Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]!
[subfrmLabData30B]![AvgSpikeVolume])/[BVT],l)

[AM1]-[AMS]+[AM2]

[BM1]-[BMS]+[BM2]

HGConcentration2([AMl ], [AM2],[AMS], [AVT], [Forms]!

[frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmHdrData30B]! [MercuryMassUnits])
Function HGConcentration2(Ml, M2, Ms, VT, MMUnits) As Single If Nz(Ml, 0) = 0 Or
Nz(VT, 0) =0 Then HGConcentration2 = 0 Else HGConcentration2 = (Nz(Ml, 0) +
Nz(M2, 0) - Val(Nz(Ms, 0))) / VT * MassScalar(MMUnits) End If End Function

HGConcentration2([BMl],[BM2],[BMS],[BVT],[Forms]!

[frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]! [subfrmHdrData30B]! [MercuryMassUnits])
Function HGConcentration2(Ml, M2, Ms, VT,MMUnits) As Single If Nz(Ml, 0) = 0 Or
Nz(VT,0) = 0 Then HGConcentration2 = 0 Else HGConcentration2 = (Nz(Ml, 0) +
Nz(M2, 0) - Val(Nz(Ms, 0))) / VT * MassScalar(MMUnits) End If End Function

Round([CdA]*(l -([Forms]! [frmRunDataDetailsMaster]! [subForm]!

[subfrmCalcData3 0B], [Form]! [lowH20]/l 00)),3)

Round([CdB]*(l- ([Forms]![frmRunDataDetailsMaster]![subForm]!
[subfrmCalcData30B].[Form]! [lowH20]/100)),3)

IIf(Nz([CdA])="" Or Nz([CdB])="",'"',Round((([CdA]+[CdB])/2),3))

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-135

-------
WetAMC Test Run Mercury Concentration Wet IIf(Nz([CwA])="" OrNz([CwB])="",'"', Round((([CwA]+[CwB])/2),3))

RD Paired trap agreement relative deviation IIf(Nz([CdA])="" Or [CdB])/([CdA]+[CdB]))* 100,4)))

RATA Results

Field ID Field Description

raPPM

Field Calculations

Relative Accuracy using the Reference Method (Abs([avgPPMdif])+Abs([ccPPMdif]))/ [avgRefPPM]* 100

rasPPM Relative Accuracy using the Standard

ra5PPM Relative Accuracy using 5ppmv absolute

Sample Train Parameters
Field ID Field Description

NetRunTime Net Run Time, minutes

NetTravPts
NetTravPtsA
NetTravPtsB
Dn
Cp
CpA
CpB
Y
YA
YB
Pb

DeltaH

Net Traversing Points
Net Traversing Points-Sample A
Net Traversing Points-Sample B
Nozzle Diameter, inches
Pitot Tube Coefficient
Pitot Tube Coefficient - Sample A
Pitot Tube Coefficient - Sample B
Dry Gas Meter Calibration Factor
Dry Gas Meter Calibration Factor A
Dry Gas Meter Calibration Factor B
Barometric Pressure, inches of Hg

(Abs([avgPPMdif])+Abs([ccPPMdif]))/[PPMvStandard] * 100
differenceIIf([PPMvStandard]<200, Abs([avgPPMdif])+[ccPPMdif],")

Field Calculations

Max([EndTime])

Sum(IIf(Len(Trim([velocity]))>0,l,0))

Sum(IIf(Len(Trim([StackTempA]))>0,l,0))

Sum(IIf(Len(T rim( [ StackT empB ] ))>0,1,0))

Min([DnHDR])

Min([CpHDR])

Min([CpHDRA])

Min([CpHDRB])

Min([YHDR])

[YHDRA]

[YHDRB]

Min([PbHDR])

Average Orifice Meter Differential, inches of water Avg([OrificePresActual])

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-136

-------
Field ID Field Description Field Calculations

DeltaHA Average Orifice Meter A Differential, inches of H2O IIf([NetTravPtsA]>0,[OrificePresActualA]/[NetTravPtsA],0)

DeltaHB Average Orifice Meter B Differential, inches of H2O IIf([NetTravPtsB]>0,[OrificePresActualB]/[NetTravPtsB],0)

Vm Dry Gas Meter Volume Sampled, cubic feet Format(Max([gasmeter])-Min([gasmeter])+Min([InitDGM])

Min([FinalDGM]),"#.000")

VmA Dry Gas Meter Volume Sampled, cubic feet - Sample A Format(([MaxGasMeterA]-[MinGasMeterA])*35.315,"#.000")

VmB Dry Gas Meter Volume Sampled, cubic feet - Sample B Format(([MaxGasMeterB]-[MinGasMeterB])*35.315,"#.000")

tm Average Dry Gas meter Temperature, °F Format((Avg(nz([DryGasInlet],0))+Avg(nz([DryGasOutlet],0)))/2,"#.0")

tmA Average Dry Gas meter Temperature, °F - Sample A Format(Avg([DryGasA]),"#,0")

tmB Average Dry Gas meter Temperature, °F - Sample B Format(Avg([DryGasB]) ,"#.0")

Vmstd Dry Gas Meter Volume Sampled, dscf IIf([vm]>0,FormatNumber([Vm]*[Y]*((Min([tstdhdr])+459.67)/

Min([pstdhdr])) *(([pb]+([deltah]/13.6))/([tm]+459.67)),3),0)

VmstdA Dry Gas Meter Volume Sampled, dscf - Sample A Format([VmA]*[YA]*(([tstd]+459.67)/[pstd])*(([pbA]+([deltaha]/13.6))/

([tmA]+459.67)),"#.000")

VmstdB Dry Gas Meter Volume Sampled, dscf - Sample B Format([VmB]*[YB]*(([tstd]+459.67)/[pstd])*(([pbB]+([deltahb]/13.6))/

([tmB]+459.67)),"#.000")

Vic Total Moisture Liquid Collected, g FormatNumber(Min([vlc]),l)

VlcA Total Moisture Liquid Collected, g - Sample A FormatNumber([VlcComA],l)

VlcB Total Moisture Liquid Collected, g - Sample B FormatNumber([VlcComB],l)

Percl Percent Isokinetic of Sampling Rate, % Iif(len([vs])>0,FormatNumber((144*100*Min([PstdHDR])*(459.67+[ts])

*[Vmstd])/((60*3.141592653 58979/4)*(459.67+Min([tstdHDR]))*[Ps]*
[Vs] * [Mfd] * [NetRunTime] *([Dn]A2)), 1,-1),"")

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-137

-------
Stack Gas

Field ID Field Description

PercH20 Moisture Content of Stack Gas, %

PercH20sat Moisture Saturation at Stack Gas Temperature,

Mfd Dry Mole Fraction

PercC02 Carbon Dioxide, %

Perc02 Oxygen, %

PercCOplus N2 Carbon Monoxide & Nitrogen, %

Fo Fuel Factor

Md Dry Molecular Weight, lb/lb-Mole

Ms Wet Molecular Weight, lb/lb-mole

Pg Flue Gas Static Pressure, inches of water

Ps Absolute Flue Gas Pressure, inches of water

Vwstd Volume of Water Vapor, standard cubic feet

VwstdA Volume of Water Vapor, standard cubic feet Sample A

VwstdB Volume of Water Vapor, standard cubic feet Sample B

ts Average Stack Gas Temperature, °F

Field Calculations

IIf(Val([vmstd])+Val([vwstd])>0,FormatNumber((100*Val
([Vwstd]))/(Val([Vws td])+Val([Vmstd])),2, -1), 0)

PercH20sat: IIf(Val([ps])>0,FormatNumber(IIf([ts]<213,(10A(6.6911-
(3144/([ts]+390.86))))*100/[Ps],100),2),0)

Format(l-(IIf(Val([PercH20])>Val([PercH20sat]),[PercH20sat],
[PercH20])/100),2)

Min(Nz([PercCO2HDR],0))

Min(Nz([PercO2HDR],0))

100-[Perc02]-[PercC02]

FormatNumber(IIf([percco2]>0,(20.9-[Perc02])/[PercC02],0),2,-l)

Format((0.44*[PercC02])+(0.32*[Perc02])+(0.28*(100-[PercC02]-
[PercO2])),"#.00")

Format(([Md] * [Mfd])+18.015 *((IIf(Val([PercH20)>Val([PercH20sat]),
[PercH20sat],[PercH20]))/100),"#.00")

Min([PgHDR])

Format([Pb]+([Pg]/13.6,"#.00")

F ormatNumb er( [ VI c] * ((459.67+Min( [tstdHDR] ))*21.85/453.59)/
(Min([PstdHDR])* 18.015),2)

FormatNumber([VlcA]*((459.67+Min([tstd]))*21.85/453.59)/
([Pstd])*18.015),2)

FormatNumber([Vl cB] *((459.67+Min([tstd]))*21.85/453.59)/
([Pstd])*18.015),2)

Format(Avg([stacktemp]),"#.0")

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-138

-------
tsA Average Stack Gas Temperature, °F Sample A

Field ID Field Description

tsB Average Stack Gas Temperature, °F Sample B

DeltaPavg Average Velocity Head, inches of water
SqrtDeltaPavg Square Root of Average Velocity Head, inches of water

Vs Average Stack Gas Velocity, feet/second

Dstk Round Duct Diameter, inches

Dwdth Rectangular Duct Width, inches

Dlngth Rectangular Duct Length, inches

As Stack Cross-Sectional Area, square feet

Qsd Dry Volumetric Flow Rate, dry scfm

Qaw Actual Wet Volumetric Flue Gas Flow Rate, acfm

Format(Nz([tsHDR],0),"#.0"

Field Calculations

Nz([tsHDR],0)

FormatNumber((Avg([velocity]A0.5)A2),3)
Format(([DeltaPavg]A0.5),"#.000")

IIf(Val([ps])*Val([Ms])>0,FormatNumber(85.49*[Cp]*((459.67+[ts])*
[DeltaPavg]/([Ps]*[Ms]))A0.5,2,-l),"")

Min([DuctDiam])

Min([DuctWidth])

Min([DuctLength])

FormatNumber(IIf([dwdth]>0, [dwdth] *dlength,3.14159*
min( [DuctDi am] )A2/4/144,3,-1)

IIf(len([vs])>0,FormatNumber((60*[Mfd]*(Min([tstdHDR])+459.67)*[Ps
]* [Vs]*As])/(([ts]+459.67)*Min([PstdHDR])),l),"")

IIf(len([vs])>0,FormatNumber(60*[Vs]*[As],l),"")

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-139

-------
Appendix B: Methods

CARB Method 428 - Dioxin, Furan, PCB

CARB Method 429 - Poly cyclic Organic Matter (19 Compounds)

CTM - 027 - Procedure for Collection and Analysis of Ammonia in Stationary Sources

Custom - Select to enter custom method

Method 0010 - Modified Method 5 Sampling Train

Method 0011 - Sampling for Selected Aldehyde and Ketone Emissions from Stationary Sources

Method 0023A - Sampling Method for Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Polychlorinated
Dibenzofuran Emissions from Stationary Sources

Method 0061 - Determination of Hexavalent Chromium Emissions from Stationary Sources

Method 1 - 4 - Flowrate / Moisture

Method 10 - Carbon Monoxide-NDIR.

Method 101 - Mercury from Chi or-Alkali Plants (Air)

Method 101A - Mercury from Sewage Sludge Incinerators

Method 102 - Mercury from Chi or-Alkali Plants (Hydrogen Streams)

Method 103 - Beryllium Screening Method

Method 104 - Beryllium Emissions Determination

Method 108 -Particulate & Gaseous Arsenic emissions

Method 12 - Inorganic Lead

Method 13A - Total Fluoride (SPADNS Zirconium Lake)

Method 13B - Total Fluoride (Specific Ion Electrode)

Method 17 - In-Stack Particulate (PM)

Method 17/202 - Combination of Methods 17 and 202

Method 201A - Filterable PM10/PM2.5 (In stack CRS)

Method 201A/202 - Total PM10/PM2.5 (filterable and condensable)

Method 202 - Condensable Particulate Matter

Method 22 - Visual Determination of Fugitive Emissions from Material Sources and Smoke Emissions from Flares
(report in ERT only if required by regulation)

Method 23 - Dioxin and Furan (02/91 FR Copy).

Method 25A - Gaseous Organic Concentration (Flame Ionization)

Method 25B - Gaseous Organic Concentration (Infrared Analyzer)

Method 26 - Hydrogen Chloride, Halides, Halogens

Method 26A - Hydrogen Halide & Halogen-Isokinetic

Method 29 - Metals Emissions from Stationary Sources

Method 306 - Chromium Emissions Electroplating/Anodizing

Method 306A - Chromium Emissions Electroplating/Anodizing(Mason Jar Method)

Method 308 - Methanol Emissions (Appeared in Federal Register 11/14/97).

Method 30B - Method 30B Determination of Total vapor phase mercury emissions using carbon sorbent traps

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing Part 1-140

-------
Method 315 - PM and MCEM from Aluminum Production Facilities

Method 316 - Sample & Analysis for Formaldehyde emissions in the Mineral Wool & Wool Fiberglass Industries.

Method 326 - Determination of Isocyanates

Method 3 A C02 - C02 - Instrumental

Method 3 A 02 - 02 - Instrumental

Method 5 - Particulate Matter (PM)

Method 5/202 - Combination of Methods 5 and 2

Method 5@320F - Filterable Particulate (filter temperature of 320F)

Method 5@320F/202 - Combination of Methods 5 @320F and 202

Method 5 A - PM Asphalt Roofing (Particulate Matter)

Method 5B - PM Nonsulfuric Acid (Particulate Matter)

Method 5F - PM Fluid Catalytic Cracking Unit

Method 6C - S02 - Instrumental.

Method 7E - NOx - Instrumental.

Method 8 - Sulfuric Acid Mist

Mod. Method 26A Subpart S - Determination of Chlorine and Chlorine Dioxide

OTM - 29 - Sampling and Analysis for Hydrogen Cyanide Emissions from Stationary Sources

OTM - 45 - Measurement of Selected Per- and Polyfluorinated Alkyl Substances from Stationary Sources

OTM - 46 - Measurement of Polychorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins, Poly chlorinated Dibenzofurans, Poly chlorinated
Biphenyls and Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons

PST CO to PS4 - Performance Standard 4 for Carbon Monoxide
PST C02 to PS3 - Performance Standard 3 for Carbon Dioxide
PST Hg to PS12B - Performance Standard 12B for Mercury
PST NOx to PS2 - Performance Standard 2 for Nitrogen Oxides
PST 02 to PS3 - Performance Standard 3 for Oxygen
PST S02 to PS2 - Performance Standard 2 for Sulfur Dioxide
PST VOC to PS8 - Performance Standard 8 for VOC CEMS

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-141

-------
Appendix C: Frequently Asked Questions

FAQs are posted at: https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/electronic- reporting-
tool -ert-tip s-and-frequently -asked-que sti ons

1. How can I get the ERT to run on my computer?

Verify you have a version of Microsoft Access® that will run the ERT.

If you have Microsoft Access version 2007:

Verify that you have at least Service Pack 2 installed.

Open Microsoft Access, click on the MS circle in the upper left corner of the Access window,

Click on "Access Options" at the bottom of the window, Click on "Resources" in the left column.
At the bottom of the window just below the text "about Microsoft Office Access 2007" the software
(Microsoft Office Access 2007) and the Service Pack level is identified.

If Service Pack 2 is installed, the text "SP2 MSO" will be between two sets of numbers that are in
parentheses.

If you do not have Service Pack 2 installed, click on "Check for Updates" and follow the directions to
install the updates from Microsoft. Many corporate computers do not allow users to install software
and you will need to contact your Information Technology Center for them to update your software.

If you have Microsoft Access version 2010:

Any Service Pack level is acceptable in order to run the ERT Application. If you do NOT have
Microsoft Access or have an earlier version than 2007:

You will need to download and install the runtime version of Microsoft Access see Downloading and
Installing theERT in this manual.

After installing the runtime version of Microsoft Access, download the ERT ZIP file to your hard
drive and extract the manual and the database to a folder. Open the program with MS Access.

2. Is there a way I can stop the ERT security warnings?

If you have Microsoft Access 2007, to avoid these warnings every time you run ERT, make the ERT
directory and all subdirectories "Trusted Locations".

To make the ERT directory a Trusted location, close the ERT application, open Microsoft Access,
Click on the MS circle in the upper left corner of the Access window,

Click on "Access Options" at the bottom of the window,

Click on "Trust Center" in the left column,

Click on "Trust Center Settings",

Click on Trusted Locations",

Click on "Add new location".

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-142

-------
Browse for the location or directory where you saved the ERT application (the file ERT4.accdb).

Select this location and click on the box to the left of "Subfolders of this location are also trusted" to
enable these locations.

Click on "OK". Verify that the Path that you selected is one of the trusted locations.

Click "OK" to close the Trust Center window then the Access Options window.

Close Access. Reopen the ERT application.

3. Are the ERT calculations correct for the Volume of Water Vapor Collected and for the Dry Gas
Meter Volume? I get a different value when I use the EPA Method 5 calculations for those
parameters.

Neither the ERT nor your calculations are incorrect.

In EPA Method 5. options are available in the equations for calculating the volume of gas sample
measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions (Vm(std)) and the equation for
calculating the volume of water vapor in the gas sample, corrected to standard conditions (Vwiwi).

In both instances, there are two equations presented in Method 5 for each calculation. The first
equation presented in Section 12.3 and 12.4 are ones which present the variables associated with
the sampling equipment and test conditions and constants for standard conditions and gas
characteristics. The values for these constants are presented in Section 12.1 but are rounded to four
significant figures. K1 = 17.64 R/in Hg for English units. The ERT does not round and uses the
standard conditions of 68 F and 29.92 in Hg. This will cause a calculation difference.

The second equation presented in these sections of Method 5 use a single calculated value (K1 and
K2) replacing all these constants. The calculation uses four to five significant digits and then
rounds the result to four significant figures. When K1 and K2 are calculated with all the constants
rounded to four significant figures and the resulting value rounded to four significant figures, the
result is a different value than the K1 and K2 presented in Method 5.

The ERT calculations use the procedures used to generate the second equations. Since the ERT
allows for different standard temperatures and pressures to accommodate State and local agency
rules, the values used are the values used to calculate the K1 and K2 in the method. Prior to
rounding, these values may differ at the third to fifth significant digit. But when the policy to
round the final results to two significant digits is followed there is no difference. For emissions
limits expressed to three significant digits, the values using the published K1 and K2 do not
introduce calculation errors due to multiple rounding.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-143

-------
4.

How do I submit my files electronically to EPA?

You must first register with the CDX. See the CDX webpage for registration instructions.

Only files generated by the ERT program can be submitted electronically to EPA via the CDX.

Detailed instructions for uploading ERT files are included in the CDX/CEDRI Guide and on the CEDRI
submission webpage.

The ERT Submission File will be in the format of a Zip file. This Zip file contains two files: one Zip and
one XML file. Your file must be in the proper format for a successful submittal. Please do not change
the file name that was generated by the ERT software.

How do I submit my files to EPA if I can't use ERT files? (For instance, the test data includes
5. methods not supported by the ERT).

Only data collected using the test methods listed on the ERT website

('http://www.epa.aov/ttn/chief/ert/ert info.pdfi should be submitted electronically to WebFIRE. If you have
used non ERT supported test methods, data should be submitted as described by your state/local agency.

How do I submit my ERT files to EPA if the data includes confidential business information
6. (CBI)?

Sources who claim that some of the information being submitted in their performance tests is
confidential business information (CBI) must mail a completed ERT file including the CBI on a compact
disk or other commonly used electronic storage media clearly marked as CBI to U.S.
EPA/OAPQS/CORE CBI Office, Attention: WebFIRE Administrator, MD C404-02, 4930 Old Page
Rd., Durham, NC 27703. In addition, the same ERT file with the CBI omitted must be submitted to EPA
via CDX.

My CDX registration has been approved, and my ERT files are in the correct format. I keep
7. getting the message that my submission to CEDRI was not successful. Why is this?

Recently the CDX Help Desk verified that this is happening because of the java cache on the user's
desktop. Complete instructions for clearing the cache can be found on page 2 of the CDXACEDRI user
Guide. (PDF, 81pp4M).

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-144

-------
I am already registered to submit TRI-ME (or TSCA, RCRA, CEDRI etc.) data through EPA's
8. CDX. Can I extend my authorization to other data systems?

At present, three CDX data flows support Electronic Signature Agreement (ESA) reuse functionality:
CEDRI, TSCA, and TRI. CEDRI users can re-use TSCA's ESAs - this is already in place and doesn't
require any changes on the CDX side. A TSCA user can simply add a CEDRI dataflow to their dataflow
list and electronically sign their ESA without a need to go through LexisNexis or paper validation
process.

However, CEDRI users cannot reuse TRI's ESAs, because TRI's identity proofing threshold is set at a
lower level than that of CEDRI's. CEDRI requires a wet ink signature and a phone call, whereas TRI
only requires a wet ink signature. Due to these slightly more stringent requirements, CEDRI users
cannot re-use TRI's ESAs.

eGGRT dataflow doesn't currently support ESA reuse, so eGGRT users that register for CEDRI will
have to go through standard identity proofing process prior to getting access.

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-145

-------
Appendix D: SCC Tree

see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

101XXXXX

External Combustion Boilers

Electric Generation

AnthraciteCoal,Pulverized

Anthracite Coal

Bituminous Coal, Pulverized

Bituminous Coal

Subbituminous Coal, Pulverized

Subbituminous Coal

Pulverized Lignite

Lignite

Residual Oil - Grade 6

Residual Oil

Distillate Oil - Grades 1 and 2

Distillate Oil - Grade 4

Natural Gas

Petroleum Refinery Gas

Petroleum Coke

Wood/Bark Waste

Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)

Bagasse

Solid Waste

Biomass Solids

Liquid Waste

Biomass Liquids

Geothermal Power Plants

Methanol

Hydrogen

Coal-based Synfuel

Waste Coal

Other Oil

102XXXXX

External Combustion Boilers

Industrial

Anthracite Coal

Bituminous Coal

Subbituminous Coal

Lignite

Residual Oil

Distillate Oil - Grades 1 and 2

Natural Gas

Process Gas

Petroleum Coke

Wood/Bark Waste

Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)

Bagasse

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-146

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

102XXXXX

External Combustion Boilers

Industrial

Solid Waste

Liquid Waste

Tire-derived Fuel

Methanol

Gasoline

Kiln-dried biomass

Wood Residuals

103XXXXX

External Combustion Boilers

Commercial/Institutional

Anthracite Coal

Bituminous Coal

Subbituminous Coal

Lignite

Residual Oil - Grade 6

Residual Oil

Distillate Oil - Grades 1 and 2

Distillate Oil

Natural Gas

Process Gas

Landfill Gas

Wood/Bark Waste

Liquified Petroleum Gas(LPG)

Biomass

Solid Waste

Liquid Waste

105XXXXX

External Combustion

Space Heaters

Industrial

Commercial/Institutional

201XXXXX

Internal Combustion Engines

Electric Generation

Distillate Oil (Diesel)

Natural Gas

Gasified Coal

Process Gas

Landfill Gas

Kerosene/Naphtha (Jet Fuel)

Liquid Waste

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Flares

202XXXXX

Internal Combustion Engines

Industrial

Distillate Oil (Diesel)

Natural Gas

Diesel

Dual Fuel (Oil/Gas)

Dual Fuel

All Fuels

Residual/Crude Oil

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-147

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

202XXXXX

Internal Combustion Engines

Industrial

Process Gas

Kerosene/Naphtha (Jet Fuel)

Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)

Methanol

Gasoline

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

203XXXXX

Internal Combustion Engines

Commercial/Institutional

Distillate Oil (Diesel)

Natural Gas

Gasoline

Diesel

Digester Gas

Landfill Gas

Kerosene/Naphtha (Jet Fuel)

Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

204XXXXX

Internal Combustion Engines

Engine Testing

Aircraft Engine Testing

Rocket Engine Testing

Turbine

Reciprocating Engine

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

260XXXXX

Off-highway 2-stroke Gasoline
Engines

Industrial Equipment

265XXXXX

Off-highway 4-stroke Gasoline
Engines

Industrial Equipment

270XXXXX

Off-highway Diesel Engines

Industrial Equipment

273XXXXX

Off-highway LPG-fueled Engines

Industrial Equipment

285XXXXX

Railroad Equipment

Diesel

288XXXXXX

Fugitive Emissions

Other Not Classified

301XXXXX

Chemical Manufacturing

301XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Chemical Manufacturing

Adipic Acid

Ammonia Production

Carbon Black Production

Charcoal Manufacturing

Chlorine

Chloro-alkali Production

Cleaning Chemicals

Explosives (Trinitrotoluene)

Hydrochloric Acid

Nitric Acid

Paint Manufacture

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-148

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Varnish Manufacturing

Phosphoric Acid

301XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Chemical Manufacturing

Plastics Production

Phthalic Anhydride

Printing Ink Manufacture

Sodium Carbonate

Sulfuric Acid

Synthetic Organic Fiber

Cellulosic Fiber Production

Synthetic Rubber (Manufacturing Only)

Ammonium Nitrate Production

Normal Superphosphates

Triple Superphosphate

Ammonium Phosphates

Terephthalic Acid/Dimethyl Terephthalate

Elemental Sulfur Production

Pesticides

Aniline/Ethanolamines

Inorganic Pigments

Chromic Acid Manufacturing

Sodium Bicarbonate

Hydrogen Cyanide

Urea Production

Nitrocellulose

Lead Alkyl Manufacturing (Electrolytic Process)

Organic Fertilizer

Butyl rubber production

Epichlorohydrin Elastomer Production

Adhesives

Animal Adhesives

Casein

Ethylene Propylene Rubber Production

HypalonTM Production

Neoprene Production

Nitrile Butadiene Rubber Production

Polybutadiene Rubber Production

Polysulfide Rubber Production

Styrene Butadiene Rubber and Latex Production

Pharmaceutical Production

Polyether Polyols Production

Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene Resin Production

Methyl Methacrylate Butadiene Styrene Resin Production

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-149

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Polyethylene Terephthalate Resin Production

Polystyrene Resin Production

301XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Chemical Manufacturing

Styrene Acrylonitrile Resin Production

Maleic Anhydride Copolymers Production

Alkyd Resin Production

Inorganic Chemical Manufacturing (General)

Hydrogen

Acetal Resins

Amino/Phenolic Resin Production

Polycarbonate Production

Polyvinyl Chloride and Copolymers Production

Epoxy Resin Production

Non-nylon Polyamide Production

Polypropylene Production

Polymethyl Methacrylate Production

Cellophane Manufacturing

Cellulose Ethers Production

Polymerized Vinylidene Chloride Production

Polyvinyl Acetate Emulsions Production

Polyvinyl Alcohol Production

Acetone/Ketone Production

Maleic Anhydride

Asbestos Chemical

Elemental Phosphorous

Boric Acid

Potassium Chloride

Aluminum Sulfate Manufacturing

Formaldahyde, Acrolein, Acetaldehyde, Butyraldehyde

Organic Dyes/Pigments

Chloroprene

Chlorine Derivatives

Brominated Organics

Fluorocarbons/Chlorofluorocarbons

Chlorinated Paraffins Production

Ammonium Sulfate

Organic Acid Manufacturing

Acetic Anhydride

Esters Production

Acetylene Producion

Hydrazine Production

Phthalate Plasticizers Production

Bisphenol A

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-150

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Butadiene

Cumene

301XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Chemical Manufacturing

Cyclohexane

Cyclohexanone/Cyclohexanol

Vinyl Acetate

Ethyl Benzene

Ethylene Oxide

Glycerin (Glycerol)

Toluene Diisocyanate

Methyl Methacrylate

Nitrobenzene

Butylene, Ethylene, Propylene, Olefin Production

Phenol

Propylene Oxide

Styrene

Caprolactum (Use 3-01-130 for Ammonium Sulfate By-
product Production)

Linear Alkylbenzene

Ethylidene Norbornene Production

Methanol/Alcohol Production

Ethylene Glycol

Etherene Production

Glycol Ethers

Nitriles, Acrylonitrile, Adiponitrile Production

Benzene/Toluene/Aromatics/Xylenes

Inorganic Chemical Manufacturing: Antimony Oxides

Inorganic Chemical Manufacturing: Fumed Silica

Inorganic Chemical Manufacturing: Quaternary Ammonium
Compounds

Inorganic Chemical Manufacturing: Sodium Cyanide

Inorganic Chemical Manufacturing: Uranium Hexafluoride

Chlorobenzene

Carbon Tetrachloride

Ally 1 Chloride

Ally 1 Alcohol

Epichlorohydrin

Nitroglycerin Production

Explosives Manufacture - Pentaerythritol Tetranitrate
(PETN)

Explosives Manufacture - RDX/HMX Production

General Processes

Equipment Leaks

General Processes

Wastewater Treatment

ERT User Manual

- Stack Testing

Part 1-151

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Inorganic Chemical Storage: Fixed Roof Tanks

Inorganic Chemical Storage: Floating Roof Tanks

301XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Chemical Manufacturing

Inorganic Chemical Storage: Pressure Tanks

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

Other Not Classified

302XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Food and Agriculture

Alfalfa Dehydration

Coffee Roasting

Instant Coffee Products

Cotton Ginning

Feed and Grain Country Elevators

Grain Millings

Feed Manufacture

Beer Production

Distilled Spirits

Wines, Brandy, and Brandy Spirits

Fish Processing

Meat Smokehouses

Starch Manufacturing

Sugar Cane Refining

Sugar Beet Processing

Peanut Processing

Candy Manufacturing

Vegetable Oil Processing

Beef Cattle Feedlots

Range Cattle

Dairy Cattle

Feedlot Cattle

Silage pile - AFO

Silage TMR-AFO

Eggs and Poultry Production

Broilers

Layers

Turkeys

Swine

Sheep

Horses

Other Livestock

Cotton Seed Delinting

Seed Products and Processing

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-152

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Mushroom Growing

Dairy Products

Export Grain Elevators

302XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Food and Agriculture

Bakeries

Tobacco Processing

Bakers Yeast Manufacturing - Dry Yeast

Bakers Yeast Manufacturing - Compressed Yeast

Deep Fat Frying

Animal/Poultry Rendering

Carob Kibble

Cereal

Vinegar Manufacturing

Cellulose Food Casing Manufacture

Ethanol Production

Biodiesel Production

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

Other Not Specified

303XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Primary Metal Production

Bauxite Ore Processing

Alumina Electrolytic Reduction

Aluminum Hydroxide Calcining

Metallurgical Coke Manufacturing

Primary Copper Smelting

Ferroalloy Production

Lead Production

Magnesium

Molybdenum

Titanium

Gold Processing

Barium Ore Processing

Integrated Iron and Steel Manufacturing

Taconite Iron Ore Processing

Metal Mining (General Processes)

Zinc Production

Leadbearing Ore Crushing and Grinding

Alumina Processing - Bayer Process

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-153

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

Other Not Classified

304XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Secondary Metal Production

Aluminum

Copper

Grey Iron Foundries

Lead

Lead Battery Manufacture

Magnesium

Steel Foundries

Zinc

Malleable Iron

Nickel

Steel Manufacturing

Furnace Electrode Manufacture

Metal Heat Treating

Lead Cable Coating

Miscellaneous Casting and Fabricating

Miscellaneous Casting Fabricating

Metallic Lead Products

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

Other Not Classified

305XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Mineral Products

Asphalt Roofing Manufacture

Asphalt Concrete

Brick and Structural Clay Products Manufacture

Calcium Carbide

Castable Refractory

Cement Manufacturing (Dry Process)

Cement Manufacturing (Wet Process)

Clay Ceramics Manufacture

Clay and Fly Ash Sintering

Coal Mining, Cleaning, and Material Handling

Concrete Batching

Fiberglass Manufacturing

Frit Manufacture

Glass Manufacture

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-154

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Gypsum Manufacture

Lime Manufacture

Mineral Wool Manufacturing

305XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Mineral Products

Perlite Manufacturing

Phosphate Rock

Stone Quarrying - Processing (See also 305320)

Salt Mining

Potash Production

Magnesium Carbonate

Construction Sand and Gravel

Diatomaceous Earth

Industrial Sand and Gravel

Lightweight Aggregate Manufacture

Ceramic Electric Parts

Asbestos Mining

Vermiculite

Feldspar

Abrasive Grain Processing

Bonded Abrasives Manufacturing

Coated Abrasives Manufacturing

Pulverized Mineral Processing

Pyrrhotite

Mining and Quarrying of Nonmetallic Minerals

Clay processing: Kaolin

Clay processing: Ball clay

Clay processing: Fire clay

Clay processing: Bentonite

Clay processing: Fullers earth

Clay processing: Common clay and shale, NEC

Asphalt Processing (Blowing)

Talc Processing

Mica

Sandspar

Catalyst Manufacturing

Bulk Materials Elevators

Bulk Materials Conveyors

Bulk Materials Storage Bins

Bulk Materials Open Stockpiles

Bulk Materials Unloading Operation

Bulk Materials Loading Operation

Bulk Materials Screening/Size Classification

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-155

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Bulk Materials Separation: Cyclones

Bulk Materials: Grinding/Crushing

Calcining

305XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Mineral Products

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

Other Not Defined

306XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Petroleum Industry

Process Heater

Catalytic Cracking Unit

Blowdown Systems

Wastewater Treatment

Vacuum Distillation

Cooling Towers

Fugitive Emissions

Flares

Sludge Converter

Asphalt/Bitumen Production

Fluid Coking Unit

Coke Handling System

Petroleum Coke Calcining

Catalytic Reforming Unit

Catalytic Hydrotreating Unit

Hydrogen Generation Unit

Merox Treating Unit

Crude Unit Atmospheric Distillation

Light Ends Fractionation Unit

Gasoline Blending Unit

Hydrocracking Unit

Alkylation Unit

Sour GasTreating Unit

Sulfur Recovery Unit

Incinerators

Lube Oil Refining

Remediation: Soil

Remediation: Vapor Extract

Remediation: Air Stripping

Re-refining of Lube Oils and Greases

Fugitive Emissions

Fugitive Dust

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-156

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Other Units/Processes

307XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Pulp and Paper and Wood
Products

Sulfate (Kraft) Pulping

Sulfite Pulping

307XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Pulp and Paper and Wood
Products

Neutral Sulfite Semichemical Pulping

Semi-chemical (non-sulfur)

Soda

Neutral Sulfite Semichemical Pulping

Paper and Paperboard Manufacture

Pulpboard Manufacture

Secondary Fiber Pulping

Paper and Paperboard Manufacture

Wood Pressure Treating

Particleboard Manufacture

Plywood Operations

Particleboard Manufacture

Plywood Operations

Sawmill Operations

Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) Manufacture

Oriented Strandboard (OSB) Manufacture

Paper Coating and Glazing

Miscellaneous Paper Processes

Mechanical Pulping Operations

Miscellaneous Paper Products

Hardboard (HB) Manufacture

Fiberboard (FB) Manufacture

Laminated Veneer Lumber Manufacture

l-Joist Manufacture

Glulam Manufacture

Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL) Manufacture

Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL) Manufacture

Furniture Manufacture

Miscellaneous Wood Working Operations

Bulk Handling and Storage - Wood/Bark

Fugitive Emissions

Other Not Classified

308XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Rubber and Miscellaneous
Plastics Products

Tire Manufacture

Tire Retreading

Other Fabricated Plastics

Fiberglass Resin Products

Foam Production

ERT User Manual

- Stack Testing

Part 1-157

-------

Plastic Products Manufacturing

Vinyl Floor Tile Manufacturing

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

308XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Rubber and Miscellaneous Plastics Products

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fuel Fired
Equipment

Other Not Specified

309XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Fabricated Metal Products

General Processes

Abrasive Blasting of Metal Parts

Abrasive Cleaning of Metal Parts

Welding

Electroplating Operations

Conversion Coating of Metal Products

Precious Metals Recovery

Chemical Milling of Metal Products

Metal Pipe Coating of Metal Parts

Other Not Classified

Drum Cleaning/Reclamation

Machining Operations

Powder Metallurgy Part Manufacturing (NAICS 332117)

Metal Deposition Processes

Resistance Welding

Brazing

Soldering

Oxyfuel Welding

Thermal Spraying

Oxyfuel Cutting

Arc Cutting

Arc Welding: General: Consummable and Non-consummable
Electrode

Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)

Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)

Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)

Electrostag Welding (ESW)

Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)

Plasma Arc Welding (PAW)

Porcelain Enamel/Ceramic Glaze Spraying

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-158

-------

Other Not Classified

310XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Oil and Gas Production

Crude Oil Production

Natural Gas Processing

Process Heaters

Liquid Waste Treatment

Fugitive Emissions

311XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Building Construction

Construction: Building Contractors

Demolitions/Special Trade Contracts

312XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Machinery, Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous Machinery

313XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Electrical Equipment

Electrical Switch Manufacture

Light Bulb Manufacture

Fluorescent Lamp Manufacture

Fluorescent Lamp Recycling

Mercury Oxide Battery Manufacture

Manufacturing - General

Manufacturing - General Processes

Semiconductor Manufacturing

Electrical Windings Reclamation

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Process Heaters

Other Not Classified

314XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Transportation Equipment

Automobiles/Truck Assembly Operations

Brake Shoe Debonding

Auto Body Shredding

Welding/Soldering Automotive Repair

Boat Manufacturing

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Point of Generation

Other Not Classified

315XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Photo Equip/Health Care/Labs/Air
Condit/SwimPools

Photocopying Equipment Manufacturing

Health Care - Hospitals

Health Care - Crematoriums

Dental Alloy (Mercury Amalgams) Production

Thermometer Manufacture

Laboratories

X-rays

Commercial Swimming Pools - Chlorination-Chloroform

Air-conditioning/Refrigeration

316XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Photographic Film Manufacturing

Product Manufacturing - Chemical Preparation

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-159

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Product Manufacturing - Surface Treatments

Product Manufacturing - Finishing Operations

Support Activities - Cleaning Operations

Support Activities - Storage Operations

Support Activities - Material Transfer Operations

Support Activities - Separation Processes

Support Activities - Other Operations

317XXXXX

Industrial Processes

NGTS

Natural Gas Transmission and Storage Facilities

320XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Leather and Leather Products

Other Not Classified

330XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Textile Products

Miscellaneous

Carpet Operations

Fabric Finishing

Fugitive Emissions

360XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Printing and Publishing

Typesetting (Lead Remelting)

Flexographic

Rotogravure

Lithographic

385XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Cooling Tower

Process Cooling

390XXXXX

Industrial Processes

In-process Fuel Use

Anthracite Coal

Bituminous Coal

Lignite

Residual Oil

Distillate Oil

Natural Gas

Process Gas

Coke

Wood

Liquified Petroleum Gas

Solid Waste

Liquid Waste

Fuel Storage - Fixed Roof Tanks

Fuel Storage - Floating Roof Tanks

Fuel Storage - Pressure Tanks

399XXXXX

Industrial Processes

Miscellaneous Manufacturing Industries

Process Heater/Furnace

Paint Stripping: Non-chemical

Miscellaneous Manufacturing Industries

Miscellaneous Industrial Processes

401XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Organic Solvent Evaporation

Dry Cleaning

Degreasing

Cold Solvent Cleaning/Stripping

Knit Fabric Scouring with Chlorinated Solvent

Solvent Storage

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-160

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Fugitive Emissions

402XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Surface Coating Operations

Surface Coating Application - General

Coating Oven - General

Coating Oven Heater

402XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Surface Coating Operations

Fabric Coating/Printing

Fabric Dyeing

Paper Coating

Large Appliances

Magnet Wire Surface Coating

Automobiles and Light Trucks

Metal Can Coating

Metal Coil Coating

Wood Furniture Surface Coating

Metal Furniture Operations

Flatwood: Wood Building Products

Plastic Parts

Large Ships

Aerospace

Miscellaneous Metal Parts

Steel Drums

Glass Mirrors

Glass Optical Fibers

Semiconductors

Fabric Printing

Fabric Coating, Knife Coating

Fabric Coating, Roller Coating

Fabric Coating, Dip Coating

Fabric Coating, Transfer Coating

Fabric Coating, Extrusion Coating

Fabric Coating, Melt Roll Coating

Fabric Coating, Coagulation Coating

Fabric Dyeing

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

Fugitive Emissions

Fuel Fired Equipment

Miscellaneous

403XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Petroleum Product Storage at Refineries

Fixed Roof Tanks (Varying Sizes)

Floating Roof Tanks (Varying Sizes)

Variable Vapor Space

Fugitive Emissions

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-161

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Other Not Classified

404XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Petroleum Liquids Storage (non-Refinery)

BulkTerminals

Bulk Plants

Oil and Gas Field Storage and Working Tanks

404XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Petroleum Liquids Storage (non-Refinery)

Petroleum Products - Underground Tanks

405XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Printing and Publishing

Letter Press

Flexographic

Lithographic

Rotogravure

Screen Printing

Digital Printing

406XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Transportation and Marketing of Petroleum
Products

Tank Cars and Trucks

Marine Vessels

Gasoline Retail Operations - Stage 1

Filling Vehicle Gas Tanks - Stage II

Pipeline Petroleum Transport - General - All Products

Consumer (Corporate) Fleet Refueling - Stage II

Consumer (Corporate) Fleet Refueling - Stage 1

Fugitive Emissions

407XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Organic Chemical Storage

Fixed Roof Tanks - Anhydrides

Fixed Roof Tanks - Alcohols

Fixed Roof Tanks - Alkanes

Fixed Roof Tanks - Alkenes

Fixed Roof Tanks - Amides

Fixed Roof Tanks - Amines

Fixed Roof Tanks - Aromatics

Fixed Roof Tanks - Carboxylic Acids

Fixed Roof Tanks - Esters

Fixed Roof Tanks - Ethers

Fixed Roof Tanks - Glycol Ethers

Fixed Roof Tanks - Glycols

Fixed Roof Tanks - Halogenated Organics

Fixed Roof Tanks - Isocyanates

Fixed Roof Tanks - Ketones

Fixed Roof Tanks - Mercaptans

Fixed Roof Tanks - Nitriles

Fixed Roof Tanks - Nitro Compounds

Fixed Roof Tanks - Phenols

Fixed Roof Tanks - Miscellaneous

Floating Roof Tanks - Acid Anhydrides

Floating Roof Tanks - Alcohols

Floating Roof Tanks - Aldehydes

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-162

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Floating Roof Tanks - Alkanes

Floating Roof Tanks - Alkenes

Floating Roof Tanks - Amides

Floating Roof Tanks - Amines

407XXXXX

Chemical Evaporation

Organic Chemical Storage

Floating Roof Tanks - Aromatics

Floating Roof Tanks - Carboxylic Acids

Floating Roof Tanks - Esters

Floating Roof Tanks - Ethers

Floating Roof Tanks - Glycol Ethers

Floating Roof Tanks - Glycols

Floating Roof Tanks - Halogenated Organics

Floating Roof Tanks - Ketones

Floating Roof Tanks - Mercaptans

Floating Roof Tanks - Nitriles

Floating Roof Tanks - Phenols

Floating Roof Tanks - Miscellaneous

Underground Storage Tanks

Pressure Tanks - Anhydrides

Pressure Tanks - Alcohols

Pressure Tanks - Aldehydes

Pressure Tanks - Alkanes

Pressure Tanks - Alkenes

Pressure Tanks - Alkynes

Pressure Tanks - Amines

Pressure Tanks - Aromatics

Pressure Tanks - Ethers

Pressure Tanks - Halogenated Organics

Pressure Tanks - Isocyanates

Pressure Tanks - Ketones

Pressure Tanks - Mercaptans (Thiols)

Pressure Tanks - Phenols

Pressure Tanks - Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous Chemicals

40xxxxx

Chemical Evaporation

Organic Chemical Transportation

Equipment Leaks

Organic Chemicals

410xxxxx

Chemical Evaporation

Dry Cleaning

Petroleum Solvent - Industrial

Petroleum Solvent - Commercial

Petroleum Solvent - Equipment Leaks

Petroleum Solvent - Wastewater, Aggregate

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-163

-------

Petroleum Solvent - Wastewater, Points of Generation

411xxxxx

Chemical Evaporation

Aerosol Cans

Filling Facilities

425xxxxx

Chemical Evaporation

unknown

490xxxxx

Chemical Evaporation

Organic Solvent Evaporation

Solvent Extraction Process

see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

490xxxxx

Chemical Evaporation

Organic Solvent Evaporation

Waste Solvent Recovery Operations

Rail Car Cleaning

TankTruck Cleaning

Air Stripping Tower

Freon Recovery/Recycling Operations

Fuel Fired Equipment

Miscellaneous Volatile Organic Compound Evaporation

Municipal Waste Incineration

Open Burning Dump

Hospital/Medical/lnfectious Waste Incineration (HMIWI)

501XXXXX

Waste Disposal

Solid Waste Disposal - Government

Municipal Solid Waste Landfill

Landfill Dump

Municipal Solid Waste Landfill

Other Incineration

Fire Fighting

Publicly Owned Treatment Works

Sewage Sludge Incineration

Equipment Leaks

Auxiliary Fuel/No Emissions

502XXXXX

Waste Disposal

Solid Waste Disposal - Commercial/Institutional

Open Burning

Incineration: Special Purpose

Asbestos Removal

Equipment Leaks

Auxiliary Fuel/No Emissions

503XXXXX

Waste Disposal

Solid Waste Disposal - Industrial

Incineration

Open Burning

Municipal Waste Incineration

Incineration

Landfill Dump

Municipal Solid Waste Landfill

Wastewater T reatment

Treatment, Storage, Disposal/TSDF

Asbestos Removal

Municipal Solid Waste Landfill

Sewage Sludge Incineration

Equipment Leaks

Auxiliary Fuel/No Emissions

504XXXXX

Waste Disposal

Site Remediation

General Processes

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-164

-------
see

sccl desc

scc3 desc

scc6 desc

Excavation/Soils Handling

Stabilization/Solidification

Capping

In Situ Venting/Venting of Soils

504XXXXX

Waste Disposal

Site Remediation

Air Stripping of Groundwater

Thermal Desorption

Biological Treatment

Equipment Leaks

Wastewater, Aggregate

Wastewater, Points of Generation

General Processes

Incineration

Hospital/Medical/lnfectious Waste Incineration (HMIWI)

Apartment Complex Incineration

Municipal Solid Waste Landfill

Sewage Sludge Incineration

Wastewater T reatment

507XXXXX

Waste Disposal

Solid Waste Disposal - Institutional

Hospital/Medical/lnfectious Waste Incineration (HMIWI)

Municipal Solid Waste Landfill

Sewage Sludge Incineration

Wastewater T reatment

ERT User Manual - Stack Testing

Part 1-165

-------
ELECTRONIC REPORTING TOOL (ERT)

USER'S GUIDE FOR
WOOD HEATER CERTIFICATION FOR
COMPLIANCE APPLICATION AND
LABORATORYTEST DATA

Version 6
March 2021

Developed by Wood
For U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

-------
ERT - Main Menu

Setup / Test Pian

Test Plan

Quick Jumps

Rot Onto

Regulatory Agency
Review

Tesf Plan Rc'vfey

Printed Reports

Wood Heaters

see

Process Info

Locations/Methods

BmjggfBflBf

Administration

Help /Sys. Reports

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Select Project Data Set

Create New Project Data Set

Save Project Data Set As

Compact Project Data Set

Current Project
Data Set:

ERT Main Menu Screen shot

-------
Table of Contents Part 2

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 1

What is the ERT? 1

ERT Main Parts 1

ERT Application 1

Project Data Set 1

Excel Spreadsheet 2

Basic Workflow 2

CHAPTER 2: GETTING STARTED 3

Verify that you have a Version of Microsoft Access that will Run the ERT 3

Downloading and Installing theERT 3

Example Data 4

Starting the ERT 4

Project Data Sets 5

Create New Project Data Set 5

Select Project Data Set 6

Save Project Data Set As 6

CHAPTER 3: CREATING A WOOD HEATER APPLICATION 8

Navigating and Using the Tool 9

Data Entry Process 9

Screen Navigation 9

Screen Help Tips 9

General Information 10

Manufacturer's Information 11

EPA-Approved Test Laboratory 12

EPA-Approved Third-Party Certifier 13

Compliance Statements Acknowledgements 14

Compliance Statements Cont 14

Signatures 16

CHAPTER4: WOOD HEATER LAB DATA ENTRY 17

Run Data 17

Add New Run Data 17

-------
Add New Run Data - Spreadsheet Import 19

Delete Run Data 21

Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) 22

Header Data 22

Point Data 24

Show Calculations 25

Show Results 26

PM Data (E2515-11) 27

Preburn 27

Box A, Box B and Box C 28

Box B 29

Box C - 1-hour Option 31

Hydronic Heater 31

Ambient 32

Results / Efficiency 34

Show Results 35

Show Efficiency Calcs 36

CHAPTER 5: WOOD HEATER SUMMARY TABLES 37

Hydronic Heaters 37

Data Summary Part A 37

Data Summary Part B 38

Additional Information 38

Annual Weighting 38

Adjustable Burn Rate 39

Data Summary 39

Annual Weighting 39

Additional Information 40

Single Burn Rate 41

Data Summary 41

Annual Weighting 41

Additional Information 41

Pellet Stove 42

Summary Results - Pellet Stoves 42

Summary Results - CSAB415.1 42

Summary Results - Totals 42

Forced Air Furnace 43

Data Summary 43

Data Summary Part B 43

Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage 44

Data Summary Part A 44

Data Summary Part B 44

Data Summary Part C 45

Data Summary Part D 45

Additional Summary Information Part E 45

Annual Weighting 46

ill

-------
CHAPTER 6: WOOD HEATER CHECKLIST 47

General and General Information 47

Checklist 47

CHAPTER 7: WOOD HEATER ATTACHMENTS 48

CHAPTER 8: ADMINISTRATION 50

Help/ SystemReports 50

-------
ERT USER MANUAL FOR WOOD HEATER CERTIFICATION LIST OF FIGURES

Security Warning 4

- ERT Main Menu 5

- Project Data Set of the ERT Main Menu 5

- Creating a Project Data Set 6

- Select Project Data Set Browse Window 7

- Save Project Data Set as Template 7

l Manufacturer's Information 11

l EPA-Approved Test Laboratory 12

l EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier 13

i Compliance Statement Acknowledgements 14

i Compliance Statements Cont. 15

i to each compliance statement. 16

l Signatures 16

ntry on ERT Main Menu 17

;ncy Data (B415.1-10) 18

;o be completed. 19

ata (E2515-11) 19

:rent Worksheets in a Workbook 20

21
21

-10) Header Data 24

-10) Point Data 25

-10) Show Calculations and Show Results Buttons 25

-10) Show Calculations 26

-10) Show Results 26

E2515-11) Preburn 28

32515-11) Box A 29

32515-11) Box B 30

t C - 1 Hour Option 31

5-11) Hydronic Heater 32

bient 33

ults / Efficiency 34

E2515-11) Show Results 35

>w Efficiency Calculations 36

rable Menu 37

Summary Part A 37

Summary Part B 38

tional Information 38

Figure

99 -

Figure

100

Figure

101

Figure

102

Figure

103

Figure

104

Figure

105

Figure

106

Figure

107

Figure

108

Figure

109

Figure

110

Figure

111

Figure

112

Figure

113

Figure

114

Figure

115

Figure

116

Figure

117

Figure

118

Figure

119

Figure

120

Figure

121

Figure

122

Figure

123

Figure

124

Figure

125

Figure

126

Figure

127

Figure

128

Figure

129

Figure

130

Figure

131

Figure

132

Figure

133

Figure

134

Figure

135

Figure

136

Figure

137

Figure

138

Figure

139

Figure

140

Figure

141

Figure

142

Figure

143

Figure

144

Figure

145

-------
Figure 146 - Hydronic Heaters - Annual Weighting 38

Figure 147 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Data Summary 39

Figure 148 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Annual Weighting 39

Figure 149 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Additional Information 40

Figure 150 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Data Summary 41

Figure 151 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Annual Weighting 41

Figure 152 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Additional Information 41

Figure 153 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results 42

Figure 154 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results (CSA B415.1) 42

Figure 155 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results - Totals 42

Figure 156 - Forced Air Furnace - Data Summary 43

Figure 157 - Forced Air Furnace - Data Summary Part B 43

Figure 158 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part A 44

Figure 159 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part B 44

Figure 160 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part C 45

Figure 161 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part D 45

Figure 162 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage - Additional Summary Information 45

Figure 163 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage - Annual Weighting 46

Figure 164 - Wood Heater Checklist Menu 47

Figure 165 - Wood Heater Checklist - General Information 47

Figure 166 - Wood Heater Checklist 48

Figure 167 - Heater Attachment Menu 48

Figure 168 - Wood Heater Attachments list 49

Figure 169 - The ERT Help/Adminstration Screen 50

-------
Chapter 1: Introduction

Thank you for using this version of EPA's Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT). Please keep checking Electronic
Reporting Tool (ERT) Webpage for the latest version of ERT and the user's manual.

What is the ERT?

The ERT is a Microsoft Access application used to electronically create wood heater certification for
compliance application package, calculate results and submit (or resubmit) the test results as an electronic
report to the EPA. Additionally, the ERT provides a means for individuals to review and comment on the
submitted certification for compliance application package. Users can then send the application package
file to the EPA via email to WoodHeaterReports@epa.gov.

ERT Main Parts

When you open the ERT for the first time, you will see the Microsoft Access Application. The
application, which consists of the main screen, internal screens and menu buttons, allows one to create a
Project Data Set (PDS). The PDS contains all information required, plus any attachments. The Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet upload is an optional part of the ERT. You can use the completed spreadsheet template
to import data into the ERT for ASTM Method 2515.

ERT Application

The ERT Application is a Microsoft Access Database. To run the ERT, you must have Microsoft Access
2010, 2013, 2016 or the runtime version of Microsoft Access. The runtime version is available for free
from the Microsoft Access Download Center. Before running the ERT for the first time, please refer to
Chapter 2: Getting Started for instructions.

Project Data Set

The Project Data Set (PDS) is a Microsoft Access Database file generated by the ERT Application which,
depending on the stage of completion, may contain the wood heater application, wood heater lab data,
wood heater summary tables, wood heater checklist and wood heater attachments. This is the file that
will be exchanged between the manufacturer, laboratory, third party reviewer, and the EPA. Each PDS
contains information for test reports from one wood heater firebox design. When you create a new PDS,
you are prompted for a file name for the PDS that is created. The file is created automatically in a
"ProjectData" directory by the ERT. You may change the location of the "ProjectData" directory if you
wish. The last PDS used is remembered by the ERT when restarted. There is no limit on the number of
PDS files, but only one PDS can be opened at a time.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 1

-------
Excel Spreadsheet

The Excel spreadsheet can be used as an option for entering test data for ASTM 2515-11 into the ERT.

There is a template spreadsheet available that is prepared for import. Test data can be added to the
spreadsheet and then imported into the ERT. Users have the option of incorporating this spreadsheet into
their legacy spreadsheets and then importing the data into the ERT.

Basic Workflow

The basic work flow is as follows (though other work flows are possible):

• Manufacturer

Creates a project data set and begins providing information in the wood heater application about the
wood heater being tested.

Emails the ERT PDS to laboratory for Lab data entry to be completed.

• Laboratory Testing Company

Creates the test report containing data and supporting documentation for ASTM E2515-11 and
CSA B415.1-10

• Third party reviewer

Reviews test report and completes the wood heater checklist to ensure the application package
is complete.

Sends the certification for compliance application package to the manufacturer for completion.

• Manufacturer

Submits the completed certification for compliance application package to EPA at
WoodHeaterReports@epa.gov.

• EPA

Reviews the completed certification for compliance application.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 2

-------
Chapter 2: Getting Started

Verify that you have a Version of Microsoft Access that will Run the ERT

If you have Microsoft Access version 2007:

Verify that you have at least Service Pack 2 installed. Open Microsoft Access, click on the MS
circle in the upper left corner of the Access window, click on "Access Options" at the bottom of the
window, click on "Resources" in the left column. At the bottom of the window just below the text
"about Microsoft Office Access 2007" the software (Microsoft Office Access 2007) and the Service
Pack level is identified. If Service Pack 2 is installed, the text "SP2 MSO" will be between two sets
of numbers that are in parentheses. If you do not have Service Pack 2 installed, click on "Check for
Updates" and follow the directions to install the updates from Microsoft. Many corporate computers
do not allow users to install software and you will need to contact your information technology
center and have them update your software.

If you have Microsoft Access version 2010, 2013, 2016, or 2019: Any Service Pack level is acceptable in
order to run the ERT Application.

If you do NOT have Microsoft Access:

You will need to download and install the runtime version of Microsoft Access from the Microsoft
Access Download Center. A link to the download center is provided on the EPA ERT website.
Please download a version that is the version of office you have installed on your computer.

MS Access 2010 Runtime.

MS Access 2013 Runtime.

MS Access 2016 Runtime.

After installing the Runtime version of Microsoft Access, follow the instructions below to install and run the
ERT.

If you have Windows 10, only 1 Office version can be on the computer. The operating system is
incompatible with two versions of the same program. For instance, if a computer has Access 2010 and
2013 on it, they will not work and one version will need to be removed.

Downloading and Installing the ERT

The EPA Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) Webpage contains the latest versions of the ERT, the
spreadsheet, the user's guide, and example data sets.

Once you've determined that you are running a version of MS Access which is capable of running the
ERT Application, follow these two steps.

3. Download the latest versions program files. This file includes the latest version of the ERT and the
user's guide.

4. To run the ERT, right click on the downloaded zip file and select "Open". Select a destination for
the extracted files. Go to the destination folder and double click on ERTv6.accdb file. It is

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 3

-------
recommended that the ERT program file and the data set files be located on a local drive (ie. C: or
desktop). Some functionality of the ERT is lost across servers.

Example Data

The EPA's website also contains example data for use with the ERT. Download the files from the ERT
Project Data Set example link. This file includes an example Project Data Set (PDS) and the associated
spreadsheet. Unzip the files to your hard drive and use the ERT to select the ERT WHATEST-
PDS.accdb file. See the Selectins a Project Data Set section for more information on selecting a PDS.

Starting the ERT

To start the ERT, double click ERTv6.accdb file from the location where you've installed the ERT
application.

Depending on how your version of Access is configured, you may see a "Security Warning" window (as
shown below) when you try to start the ERT.

When the ERT is first opened, the following screenshot may be seen (Figure 99):

5 ERTvDev 12/6/2019 1

File

Home

Create

External Data

Database Tools

Help ,0 Tell me what you want to do

I SECURITY WARNING Some active rontent has been disabled. Click for more details. I Enable Content

|| ERT

DoStartQ

Wplrnmp f-n thp

Macro Single Step
Macro Name:

| Continue""]

Figure 99 - Security Warning

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 4

-------
Select "Stop all Macros" and the red X in the upper right-hand corner of the Macro Single Step box.
Once the Macro box is closed, enable all macros in the yellow Security Warning banner. This should
enable the program torun. Once continue is selected, the ERT - Main Menu will be displayed (Figure
100).

Create External Data Database Tools 0 Tell me what you want to do

View Paste

(31 frmMainMenu\

Z1 Ascending Y Selection -
A J, Descending (3 Advanced -
z,* Remove Sort T Toggle Filter
Sort & Filter

,l=J Save
Refresh
All* X Delete

X Totals
t/ Spelling

-» Go To *
Select*

Figure 100 - ERT Main Menu

Project Data Sets

Select Project Data Set

Create New Project Data Set

Save Project Data Set As

Compact Project Data Set

Current Project
Data Set:

Figure 101 - Project Data Set of the ERT Main Menu

The Project Data Set (PDS) is a Microsoft Access file that contains the information for all the tests
performed on a single firebox. This includes the application, run data, test report, test review and any
supporting documentation that has been included as attachments. When the PDS is sent to the EPA, the
agency can use the ERT to review and approve the PDS.

You can select, create, save as, or compact a PDS from the "ERT Main Menu" (Figure 101). The first
time you create a PDS, you will select "Create New Project Data Set" (Figure 102). Thereafter, you
can select the project data set and click on "Save Project Data Set As" to save the entire PDS with
another name.

Create New Project Data Set

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 5

-------
Pal New Project Data Set Information
Project Data Set Folder:

Project Data Set File Name:

Create New Project Data Set

Close without creating Project Data Set

Figure 102 - Creating a Project Data Set

• Click "Create New Project Data Set" from the "Project Data Set" area of the ERT main menu.

• Browse for the location of the folder to store the PDS or let it stay in the default folder.

• Enter a name for the PDS file in the "Project Data Set File Name"box.

• Click "Create New Project Data Set" to create a PDS with the name you entered in the folder you
created.

• If you receive a "Could not use'C:\(location of file and file name).accdb'; file already in use error,
check the folder where you saved the file, and select the project data set as described below.

Select Project Data Set

• Click "Select Project Data Set" from the project data set area of the ERT Main Menu. A "Browse"
menu like shown in Figure 103 will appear.

• Select the PDS from the default folder (ProjectData) or browse to the folder containing the desired
PDS and select the file and click"Open".

Save Project Data Set As

Tests for similar fireboxes may contain some of the same information. To keep from having to enter the
same application information for similar tests, the ERT can save the currently selected PDS as a different
name. When "Save Project Data Set As" is selected, a pop-up asks "Save this Project Data Set as a Template?
A Template saves only the Test Plan information and Wood heater Application (if applicable)" If "Yes" is
selected, a new file name is entered and the PDS will be created saving the Wood Heater Application but
deleting all the data in the Wood Heater Lab Data Entry portion of the Wood heater module. If "No" is
selected, a new file name will be entered and the PDS will be created with the new name and will
contain all the data in the original file.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 6

-------
m Browse
Organize ~

^ > This PC > OSDisk (C:) > Users > tlowe > Desktop > pellet
New folder

Search pellet

- n

p
©

.matplotlib

Name

Date modified

Type

Size

3D Objects

[§j3 Database.mdb

7/23/2019 11:06 AM

Microsoft Access...

20,084 KB

> AppData

9/23/201912:36 PM

Microsoft Access...

20,728 KB

v Desktop

&§1 R. pellet stove.accdb

12/10/2019 4:16 P M

Microsoft Access...

2,240 KB

adjustable

tSip Pellet stove.accdb

12/10/20194:15 PM

Microsoft Access...

1,984 KB

> [ desktop

~ faf

> ~ hh

pellet

> [ ProjectData

RTCs

Shortcuts

single burn rate

Time cards

> Wood Heaters non

> 1

> ~

Documents
Downloads
Favorites
Links
Music
i OneDrive - Environn _

File name: Pellet stove.accdb

Project Data Set (*.mdb;*.accdfc ^

Tools ~

Figure 103 - Select Project Data Set Browse Window

• Click "Save Project Data Set As" from the ERT main menu. The window shown in Figure 104 will
appear.

• Click "Yes" to save the current PDS as a Template. (Saves the Test Plan and Wood Heater
Application information only)

• Click "No" to save the current PDS (saving all data).

• Click "Cancel" to cancel the operation.

Microsoft Access

Save this Project Data Set as a Template? A Template saves only the Test
Plan information and Wood Heater Application (if applicable).

Yes

Cancel

Figure 104 - Save Project Data Set as Template

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-7

-------
Chapter 3: Creating a Wood Heater Application

Setup / Test Plan

Quick Jumps

ERT - Main Menu

Regulatory Agency
Review

Printed Reports

Locations/Methods

Tester 0t? Assessment

Atfeifimeriffe

Tesipl/i-ijtewew

R^atoyRpr

issess'ncitof
gOgairf^tabri

ifirffsSpttsgEail'a:

Administration

Help / Sys. Reports

Wood Heaters

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Select Project Data Set

Create New Project Data Set

Save Project Data Set As

Compact Project Data Set

Current Project
Data Set:

Project Submittal History:

Create ERT Submission Package File

Action

SubmitDate ~ SubmittetfTo T Submitte-dFr T

Comment

Pkg Name

No Filter Search

Figure 105 - ERT Main Menu, Wood Heater Section

The different sections of the Wood Heater module are accessed from the corresponding main menu
buttons (Figure 105 and 106).

Wood Heaters

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Figure 106 - Wood Heater
Module on Main Menu

Wood Heater Application button allows user access to view General
Information, Manufacturer Information, EPA-Approved Testing
Laboratory, EPA-Approved Third-Party Certifier, Compliance Statements,
and authorized party Signatures.

Wood Heater Lab Data Entry provides access to testing method run
datasets, both Efficiency (B415.1-10) and PM (E2515-11) data. Test runs
can be added or deleted here.

Wood Heater Summary Tables are tables generated to provide a summary
of the results.

Wood Heater Checklist button accesses the checklist for Wood Fleater
Manufacturer Information, General Information, Testing Methods and data
used.

The Wood Heater Attachments option allows the user to view the
documents that have been added for the wood heater firebox that has been
tested. Warranty, Engineering Drawings, and Manufacturer Statements can

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-8

-------
be added here. This is an attachment summary of the documents from the
Compliance Statem ents Section of the Wood Heater Application.

Navigating and Using the Tool

EH Wood Heater Application

- ~

NCE PURSUA

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those
provisions or requlations, nor is it a regulation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 50 Subparts AAA AND QQQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 50.5475(b).
This document may be revised without public notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-564-7028 or via email at sanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

Red font indicates information or values outside the range of the method or the regulatory requirements

OMB Control Number: 2060-0161; 2060-0693
Approval expires 3/31/2022; 3/31/2022

General Information Manufacturer's Information EPA-Approved Test Laboratory EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier Compliance Statements .Acknowledgements Compliance Statements Cont. Signatures

Manufacturer's Name:

Model(s)/Serial
Number(s):

Catalyst

Heater/Appliance:

Method(s):

ASTM E2515-11

CSA B415.1-10

ASTM E2779-10

ASTM E871-82

ASTM E2780-10

28WHH-PTS

ASTM E2618-13

Type:

~ Full Storage

~ Partial Storage

~ Indoor

~ Outdoor

~ Other

Alternate
Test Method
Used?
(specify)

Physical Address
(Street number and
Address, not P.O.

Mailing Address:

City:

State/

Provinrp;

ZIP Code:

Country:

Date of Submission of 30-Days Notice to EPA:

Attach 30 Day Letter

Date Application
Submitted:

Proposed Test Date:

Actual Test Date:

Manufacturer Instructions to Lab

Was the compliance test postponed or suspended?:

Figure 107 - General Information

Data Entry Process

To begin the data entry process, click "Wood Heater Application" in the "Wood Heaters" column on the
ERT main menu. The screen shown in Figure 107 will appear. This screen contains a series of data entry tabs
that cover the information required for an Application for a Certification of Compliance.

There are 7 tabs or sections in the Wood Heater Application section: "General Information," "Manufacturer's
Information," "EPA-Approved Test Laboratory," "EPA-Approved Third-Party Certifier," "Compliance
Statements_Acknowledgements," "Compliance Statements Cont.," and"Signatures."

Screen Navigation

Move from one section to the next by clicking on the desired tab of the data entry form. You will generally
have two options for entering data in the form, either typing in the spaces provided or using the copy and
paste method to extract information from other electronic documents.

Screen Help Tips

Moving the cursor over the blue circled question mark displays a "pop up" help tip window that provides a
detailed description of what is needed for that field.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2- 9

-------
General Information

Enter information about the manufacturer of the wood heater appliance, the appliance and the proposed testing
of the appliance. The fields are as follows:

Manufacturer's Name:

Model(s)/Serial Number(s):
Catalyst (check box):

The public or commercial name of the manufacturer (i.e., the full name that
commonly appears on invoices, signs, or other business documents).

A list of models and serial numbers that will use the firebox being tested.

Is a catalyst used during testing and use of the appliance? Check, if answer is
yes.

Heater/Appliance (dropdown): Select from the dropdown list the type of appliance being tested (Adjustable

Burn Rate Stove, Pellet Stove, Single Burn Rate Stove, Forced Air Furnace,
Hydronic Heater or Other).

Hydronic Heater Type:
Forced Air Furnace Type:
Fuel Tested (dropdown):
Method(s):

Physical Address:

Mailing Address:

City:

State/Zip:

Country:

Phone:

Email:

Website:

If appliance is Hydronic Heater, select one (Full Storage, Partial Storage,
Indoor, Outdoor or Other)

If appliance is Forced Air Furnace, select one (Small, >65,000 BTU/hr heat
output or Large, >65,000 BTU/hr heat output)

Select from the dropdown list the type of fuel tested (Crib, Pellet, Cordwood,
Wood Chips or Other)

Select all appropriated methods used during the testing (CSA 415.1-10 and
ASTM E 2515-11 must be selected). If you used an alternative test method,
you must attach the Approval letter from the Measurement Technology Group.
If you are using a broadly applicable alternative test method, you must attach
the appropriate approval letter.

The address that describes the physical (geographical) location of the front
door or main entrance of a manufacturer.

The mailing address of a manufacturer.

The city in which the manufacturer resides.

The two-letter State or Province and mailing zip code in which the
manufacturer resides. Use the drop-down menu to select the two-letter postal
code for the State/Province.

The country in which the facility is located.

The phone number of the contact or the manufacturer.

A working email address of the contact which can be used to assist the
reviewers.

Manufacturer's website where tests will be posted according to the
regulations

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-10

-------
Date of Submission of
30-Days Notice to EPA:

Attach 30 Day letter:

Proposed Test Date:

Actual Test Date:

Manufacturer Instructions
To lab:

Was the Compliance test
Postponed or suspended:

Date of EPA notification:

Reason for postponement
or suspension:

Date of submission of 30-day notice.

Select Attach 30 Day letter to add the letter attachment.

Date testing is proposed to occur.

Date when testing actually occurred.

Attachment of instructions the Manufacturer provided to the lab for the
test.

Select No or Yes. If yes, complete Date of EPA notification
Date when EPA was notified of test postponement or suspension

Explanation of why test was postponed or suspended.

Manufacturer's Information

The Manufacturer's Information section of the Wood Heater Application contains information specific
to the wood heater manufacturer (Figure 108).

PHI Wood Heater Application

APPLICATION FOR A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE PURSUANT TO 40 CFR PART 60 SUBPARTS AAA AND

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or requlations,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 60 Subparts AAA AND QQQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-564-7028 or via email atsanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

General Information | Manufacturer's Information [ EPA-Approved Test Laboratory EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier | Compliance Statements .Acknowledgements Compliance Statements Cont. Signatures

Name of person authorized to
complete this application:

Address (if different from
Manufacturer's Address
entered before):

City:

State/
Province:

ZIP Code:

Country:

Phone:

Email:

Website:

Remarks:

Figure 998 - Wood Heater Application Manufacturer's Information
Name of person authorized

To complete the application: Name of manufacturer's authorized contact

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2-11

-------
Address:

City:
State/Zip:

Country:

Phone:

Email:

Website:

The address of a manufacturer person authorized to complete application (if
different from Manufacturer's Address on General Information Tab.

The city in which the manufacturer resides.

The two-letter State or Province and mailing zip code in which the
manufacturer resides. Use the drop-down menu to select the two-letter postal
code for the State/Province.

The country in which the manufacturer is located.

The phone number of the contact of the manufacturer.

A working email address of the contact which can be used to assist the
reviewers.

Manufacturer's website where tests will be posted according to the
regulations

Remarks:

Area for comments by manufacturer.

EPA-Approved Test Laboratory

The EPA-Approved Test Laboratory section of the Wood Heater Application contains information
specific to the Approved EPA Test Laboratory. Name of the Laboratory, Authorized party for the
compliance testing, and contact information are located here (Figure 109).

Pil Wood Heater Application

APPLICATION FOR A CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE PURSUANT TO 40 CFR PART 60 SUBPARTS AAA AND

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or requlations,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 60 Subparts AAA AND QGQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-564-7028 or via email atsanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

General Information | Manufacturer's Information EPA-Approved Test Laboratory | EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier | Compliance Statements .Acknowledgements Compliance Statements Cont. | Signatures

Name of Test Laboratory:

Name of person Authorized arid/or Responsible
for Conducting Compliance Test:

Position/Title:

Address:

City:

State/
Province:

ZIP Code: Country:

Phone:

Email:

Website:

Remarks:

Figure 100 - Wood Heater Application EPA-Approved Test Laboratory

Name of person authorized
And/or responsible for

Conducting the test: Name of laboratory' s authorized contact.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 12

-------
Position/Title:

Position or title of authorized person conducting the test.

Address:

City:

State/Zip:

The address of a laboratory's person authorized to conduct the test.

The city in which the laboratory resides.

The two-letter State or Province and mailing zip code in which the laboratory
resides. Use the drop-down menu to select the two-letter postal code for the
State/Province.

Country:

Phone:

Email:

The country in which the laboratory is located.

The phone number of the contact of the laboratory.

A working email address of the contact which can be used to assist the
reviewers.

EPA-Approved Third-Party Certifier

The EPA-Approved Third-Party Certifier section of the Wood Heater Application contains information
specific to the Approved Third-Party Certifier. The name of the Certifier and information about the
authorized party issuing the conformity statement / reviewing the test reports can be found here (Figure
110).

El Wood Heater Application

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or requlations,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 60 Subparts AAA AND QQQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-564-7028 or via email at sanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

Name of third-party Certifier:

Name of Person Authorized and/or Responsible for Reviewing
Test Report and/or Issuing Certification of Conformity:

Position/Title:

Address:

City:

State/
Province:

ZIP Code: Country:

Phone:

Email:

Website:

Remarks:

A
V

Figure 101 - Wood Heater Application EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier

Name of person authorized
And/or responsible for

reviewing the test report: Name of third-party certifier
Position/Title: Position or title of third-party certifier.

Address: The address of a third-party certifier.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2- 13

-------
City:
State/Zip:

The city in which the third-party certifier resides.

The two-letter State or Province and mailing zip code in which the third-party
certifier resides. Use the drop-down menu to select the two-letter postal code
for the State/Province.

Country:

The country where the third-party certifier is located.

Phone:

The phone number of the third-party certifier.

Email:

A working email address of the third-party certifier.

Compliance Statements Acknowledgements

The Compliance Statements section of the Wood Heater Application provides the manufacturer the
location to upload documents related to their product. Each statement of acknowledgement has the
option to certify or not certify. Based on the requirements for the statement (Figure 111).

m Wood Heater Applicatioi

TEglffT

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or requlations,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 60 Subparts AAA AND QQGQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-564-7028 or via email at sanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

General Information | Manufacturer's Information J EPA-Approved Test Laboratory EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier | Compliance Statements .Acknowledgements [ Compliance Statements Cont. J Signatures

1. Engineering Drawings Statement

Engineering drawings and specifications of components that may affect emissions (including specifications for each component listed in paragraphs (k)(2), (3) and (4) of
60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). Manufacturers may use assembly or design drawings that have been prepared for other purposes, but must designate on the drawings the dimensions
of each component listed in paragraph (k) of this section. Manufacturers must identify tolerances of components listed in paragraph (k)(2) of 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b) that are
different from those specified in that paragraph, and show that such tolerances cannot reasonably be anticipated to cause wood heaters in the model line to exceed the
applicable emission limits. The drawings must identify how the emission-critical parts, such as air tubes and catalyst, can be readily inspected and replaced.

7]| Initials: || || | Attach Drawings Statement

2.Firebox Statement Requirement

A statement whether the firebox or any firebox component (including the materials listed in paragraph (k)(3) of 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b) will be composed of material different
from the material used for the firebox or firebox component in the wood heater on which certification testing was performed, a description of any such differences and
demonstration that any such differences may not reasonably be anticipated to adversely affect emissions or efficience.

- Select Statement -

Initials:

Attach Firebox Statement

3.CBI

Clear identification of any claimed confidential business information (CBI). Submit such information under separate cover to the EPA CBI Office; Attn: Residential Wood Heater
Compliance Program Lead, 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Room 7149-D, MS:2227A, Washington, DC 20460. Note that all emissions data, including all information necessary to
determine emission rates in the format of the standard, cannot be claimed as CBI.

Select Statement -

jv initials: Attach CBI Statement

4.Valid Certification Statement

All documentation pertaining to a valid certification test, including the complete test report and, for all test runs: Raw data sheets, laboratory technician notes, calculations and
test results. Documentation must include the items specified in the applicable test methods. Documentation must include discussion of each test run and its appropriateness
and validity, and must include detailed discussion of all anomalies, whether all burn rate categories were achieved, any data not used in the calculations and, for any test runs
not completed, the data collected during the test run and the reason(s) that the test run was not completed and why. The burn rate for the low burn rate category must be no
greater than the rate that an operator can achieve in home use and no greater than is advertised by the manufacturer or retailer. The test report must include a summary table
that clearly presents the individual and overall emission rates, efficiencies and heat outputs. Submit the test report and all associated required information, according to the
procedures for electronic reporting specified in § 60.537(f) and 60.5475(f).

- Select Statement -

- Initials: Attach Certification Statement

S.Warranties

A copy of the warranties for the model line, which must include a statement that the warranties are void if the unit is used to burn materials for which the unit is not certified by
the EPA and void if not operated according to the owner's manual.

11 certify the submission of the above requirements.

11 do not certify the submission of the above requirements.

Figure 111 - Wood Heater Application Compliance Statement Acknowledgements

Compliance Statements Cont.

This is a continuation of the Compliance Statement section (Figure 112). The ability to add to the Wood
Heater Attachment(s) is/are show cased here (Figure 113).

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 14

-------
tU Wood Heater Application

\ND QQQQ

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or regulations,,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 60 Subparts AAA AND QGQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-564-7028 or via email at sanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

General Information

Manufacturer's Information EPA-Approved Test Laboratory EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier Compliance Statements .Acknowledgements | Compliance Statements Cont. f Signatures

6.Q/A Statement

A statement that the manufacturer will conduct a quality assurance program for the model line that satisfies the requirements of paragraph (m) of this section.

Attach Q/A Statement

7.Laboratory Sealing of Unit

A statement describing how the tested unit was sealed by the laboratory after the completion of certification testing and asserting that such unit will be stored by the
manufacturer in the sealed state until 5 years after the certification test.

Attach Lab Sealing
Statement

8.Statements that the wood heaters manufactured under this certificate will be:

(i) Similar in all material respects that would affect emissions as defined in § 60.531 to the wood heater submitted for certification testing, and labeleds prescribed i§ 60.536
and 60.5478.

(ii) Accompanied by an owner's manual that meets the requirements in § 60.536 and 60.5478. In addition, a copy of the owner's manual must be submitted to the
Administrator and be available to the public on the manufacturer's web site.

Attach Statements

9.Third Party Certification Statement

A statement that the manufacturer has entered into contracts with an approved laboratory and an approved third-party certifier that satisfy the requirements of paragraph (f) of
this section.

Attach 3rd Party
Certification Statement

lO.Approved laboratory/third party Statement

A statement that the approved laboratory and approved third-party certifier are allowed to submit information on behalf of the manufacturer, including any claimed to be CBI.

Attach Apporved Lab/3rd
Party Statement

ll.Manufacturer's Website Certification Test Reports Availability Statement

A statement that the manufacturer will place a copy of the certification test report and summary on the manufacturer's web site available to the public within 30 days after the
Administrator issues a certificate of compliance.

Website URL:

Attach Website
Certification Statement

12.Transferability Acknowledgement Statement

A statement of acknowledgment that the certificate of compliance cannot be transferred to another manufacturer or model line without written approval by the Administrator.

Attach Transferability
Acknowledge Statement

13.Statement about Selling Wood Heaters without an EPA Certificate

A statement acknowledging that it is unlawful to sell, distribute or offer to sell or distribute an affected wood heater without a valid certificate of compliance.

Attach Selling Statement

nil

Figure 112- Wood Heater Application Compliance Statements Cont.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-15

-------
£§] Vood Heater

Application

CERTIFICATE O

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or requlations,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 50 Subparts AAA AND QQQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 50.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-554-7028 or via email atsanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

8.Statements that the wood heaters manufactured under this certificate will be:

(i) Similar in all material respects that would affect emissions as defined in § 60.531 to the wood heater submitted for certification testing, and labeleds prescribed i§ 60.536
and 60.5478.

(ii) Accompanied by an owner's manual that meets the requirements in § 60.536 and 60.5478. In addition, a copy of the.pwner's manual must be su mitted to the
Administrator and be available to the public on the manufacturer's web site.

Q.Third Party Certification Stat J gg W(Jod ctove Attachments

A statement that the manufactfl

this section.

lO.Approved laboratory/third p
A statement that the approved

Attach Statements

~ X

Attach Statements

ements of paragraph (f) of

ll.Manufacturer's Website Cei
A statement that the manufact
Administrator issues a certifica

Website URL:

^.Transferability Acknowledge
A statement of acknowledgme

Attachments

P Wood Heater Manufactured Statement (optional)

~ Show All Attachments

t0(i)

i9(o)

To add or view an attachment:

- double click on the "paper clip" symbol

- select "add" to add a file

- select "view" to view a file

To add more attachment items, enter the description of the attachment in the
bottom row of the attachdesc column. Then add your attachment.

Tips to reduce the PDF file size:

- Create PDF directly from application,

- Attach individual components not compiled material

-Use descriptive file names (i.e. M29-field-data_ll-ll-ll.pdf)

- Attach compressed image files (JPG, GIF, PNG) or CGM

- Scan paper documents at 200 dpi

Attach 3rd Party
Certification Statement

ng any claimed to be CBI.

Attach Apporved Lab/3rd
Party Statement

c within 30 days after the

Attach Website
Certification Statement

oval by the Administrator.

Attach Transferability
Acknowledge Statement

13.Statement about Selling Wood Heaters without an EPA Certificate

A statement acknowledging that it is unlawful to sell, distribute or offer to sell or distribute an affected wood heater without a valid certificate of compliance.

Attach Selling Statement

Figure 113 Attach documents related to each compliance statement.

Signatures

The signature section of the Wood Heater Application. This signature designates the responsible party
who certifies the manufacturer complied with the requirements (Figure 114).

S3 Wood Heater Application

IskJAU I

Disclaimer: The statutory provisions and the EPA regulations described in this document contain legally binding requirements. This document is not a substitute for those provisions or requlations,
nor is it a requlation itself. In the event of a discrepancy, please refer to 40 CFR PART 50 Subparts AAA AND QQQQ, Sections 60.533(b) and 60.5475(b). This document may be revised without public
notice. If you have additional questions, please contact Rafael Sanchez at 202-554-7028 or via email atsanchez.rafael@epa.gov.

General Information Manufacturer's Information EPA-Approved Test Laboratory EPA-Approved Third Party Certifier Compliance Statements .Acknowledgements Compliance Statements Cont, Signatures

The authorized or responsible party whose signature is above is certifying that the manufacturer has complied with and will continue to comply with all requirements of the
2015 NSPS for compliance certification and that the manufacturer remains responsible for compliance regardless of any error by the test laboratory or third-party certifier.

_eS

Figure 102 - Wood Heater Application Signatures

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-16

-------
Chapter 4: Wood Heater Lab Data Entry

Wood Heaters

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Figure 115 Wood Heater Lab Data Entry on ERTMain Menu

Run Data

Run Data Details

[Manufacturer's Name

Model/ Serial Number

Forced Air Furnace

Open Expanded

Add New Run Data

Delete Run Data

Figure 116 - Run Data Details

The ERT has two methods for the wood heater module in the dropdown of "Select Method": Efficiency
Data (B415.1-10) and PM Data (E2515-11) (Figure 116). For the Efficiency Data, the data can be copy
and pasted from a spreadsheet to the ERT. For Method 2515-11, the data should be imported from the
spreadsheet template into the ERT.

Add New Run Data

Only one run for a method can be added at a time. To begin entering the Efficiency Data (B415.1-10),
select the method from the dropdown menu and add a run number and a date the run was conducted,
then select Add Run Data (Figure 117 and 118). A box will pop-up and say "Run has been added. Go
to the different tabs and add the run data." Select "OK".

pg| Enter New Run Key Data

Add New Run Data Key Information

Method:

Add Run Data

RiunNumber:

Exit without Adding Run

RunDate:

Figure 117 - Add New Run Data
ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 17

-------
pg] Enter New Run Key Data

~ X

Add New Run Data Key Information

Method: *

Add Run Data

RunNumber: *

RunDate:

Exit without Adding Run

Figure 118 - Add New Run for Efficiency Data (B415.1-10)
Go to the Select Method: drop down and select the ran (Figure 119).

Run Data Details

Figure 119 - Select Run Added
This will open a form to the tabs (Header Data and Point Data) to enter the data (Figure 120).

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-18

-------
EU Kun Data Details

Header Data Point Data

Run Number: jl

ID (optional):
Test Duration:
Burn Category:

Run Date: 1/16/2019

Appliance Type:

i—

Temp. Units:

Category / Load Capacity:

Weight Units:

Wood Moisture (% dry):

0.00

Fuel Type:

Wood Moisture (% wet):

0.00

HHV (kJ/kg):

Load Weight (lb wet):

0.00

%C:

0.00

Burn Rate (dry kg/h):

0.00

% H:

0.00

Target Load (BTU/hr):

% 02:

0.00

Total Particulate Emissions (g):

0.00

% Ash:

0.00

Overrides:

Heat Input (Qin):

0 (Btu/h)

Heat Output (Qout):

0 (Btu/h)

Delivered Efficiency (Ndel):

0 (Btu/h)

Stack Loss Efficiency (Nstl):

0 (Btu/h)

Show Calculations Show Results

Source: Annex F, B415.1-10 (R2015) - Performance testing of solid-fuel-burning heating appliances. (C) 2010 Canadian Standards Association With permission of Canadian Standards
Association (operating as *CSA Group*) 178 Rexdale Blvd, Toronto, ON M9W 1R3 CANADA, material is reproduced from CSA Group's standard B415.1-10 (R2015) - Performance testing
of solid-fuel-burning heating appliances. This material is not the complete and official position of CSA Group on the referenced subject, which is represented solely by the standard in its
entirety. While use of the material had been authorized, CSA Group is not responsible for the manner in which the data is presented, not for any representations and interpretations.

No further reproduction is permitted. For more information or to purchase standard(s) from CSA Group, please visit http://shop.csa.ca/ or call (1-800-463-6727)

Figure 120 - Method B415.1 -10 tabs to be completed.

Add New Run Data - Spreadsheet Import

To begin entering the PM Data (E2515-11), select the method from the dropdown menu and add a run number
and a date the run was conducted, then select Import from Spreadsheet (Figure 121).

3 Enter New Run Key Data

Add Hew Run Data Key Information

Method: *

PM Data (E2515-11)

Add Run Data

RjunNumber: *

RunDate: *

1/21/161

Import from Spreadsheet

Exit without Adding Run

, Import one run of PM Data (2515) from spreadsheet

Figure 121 - Add New Run for PM Data (E2515-11)

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 19

-------
Ql 0 " C* " » Wood heater 2515 import sheet 1:2-Excel ? 53 — ~ Wood heater 2515 import sheet!:'

FILE

1 HOME INSERT PAGE LAYOUT

FORMULAS DATA REVIEW VIEW ADD-INS ACROBAT TEAM

A Reed Ross... " ^ !||

FILE

I HOME INSERT PAGE LAYOUT FORMULAS DATA

REVIEW VIEV

Normal

[si Page Layout

Page Break ^ Custom Views
Preview

Workbook Views

iq-
Show

Q. [|

Zoom 100%
Zoo

Zoom to
Selection

New Window E
0 Arrange All
W Freeze Panes '

Wind

m E3

[Ql

Switch
Windows'

Macros
Macros

| ¦ i j [b| Page Layout

Normal Page Break ng Custom Views
Preview

Workbook Views

She

^ ^ H

W Zoom 100% Zoom to
Selection

Zoom

CnNew
0 Arrar

S Freei

T\ '• | X */ fx II

Calculations !A2

A2 - ¦ X ~ fx

=Calculations!A2

GAS METER VOLUME

DELTA P

DELTA H

FILTER VAC

Scale Weight

Calc
ulat
ion
s!

17
29

jol [

~ Calculations PREBURN

Box A |

Box B

- ©

: az

~ E

~ Calculations PREBURN Box A Box

Box C- 1 I

POINT

m e

—

-1—

+ 100%

POINT

Figure 122 - Import Spreadsheet

The spreadsheet import template is used to import Method 2515 data into the ERT. The spreadsheet import
template contains the tables of data that are in the ERT. This data can be linked to the company customized
spreadsheets. Company customized spreadsheets can be dragged to the template (like Calculations sheet in
Figure 122) and the data can be linked to the specific company data cells. For example, Box A can be
completed by linking the first row to the appropriate cell to the company spreadsheet. Then the formula can be
dragged down to include the complete elapsed time, as in Figure 123.

Normal

Page B
Previe

[e] Page Layout

eak !~] Custom Views
*w

Show

^ 2

Zoom 100%

Zoom to
Selection

New Window F""1
0 Arrange All f"™
S Freeze Panes " _

Switch
Windows "

Macros

Normal

3age Break
Preview

Workbook Views

Zoom

Window

Macros

Workboc

H : L?

GAS MET

01 I

Figure 123 - Linking Data From Different Worksheets in a Workbook

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2- 20

-------
The data for Box A and Box B are pulled from the Calculations sheet in this example. Once the spreadsheet is
completed and ready for import, select the file using ing the browse box that opens when "Import from
Spreadsheet" button is selected (Figure 121). Once the import is complete, a pop-up box will be displayed as
seen in Figure 124.

Import was successful! Please go the run, enter the header information
and click Update Table on each tab to update the calculated fields.

Figure 124 - Import Successful

nil Run Data Details

1 1 v 11 Add New Run Data

Method

Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) -1 - 3/31/2016
Efficiency Data [B415,1-10) - 2 - 4/1/2016

Efficiency Data 0415.1-10) - 3 - 4/5/2018
Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) - 4 - 4/5/2016
PM Data (E2515-11) - 1 - 3/28/2016
PM Data (E2515-11) - 2 - 3/29/2016
PM Data (E2515-11) - 3 - 3/30/2016
PM Data (E2515-11) -4-3/31/2016

Figure 125 - Select Run Data

To view the data for the different runs when you are on the Run Data Detail screens:

• Select the "Select Method-Run" from the list.

This will open a form to the tabs for the selected method and run to enter and edit the data (Figure 125).

Delete Run Data

Figure 126 - Delete Run Data Menu
Run data can be deleted using the Delete Run Data button (Figure 126).

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-21

-------
PI] Delete Run

x |

Delete Run Data

Select Method - Run to Delete:

(press Shift or Ctrl to select multiples)

Delete Run Data | Exit without Deleting Run

Figure 127 - Delete Rim

Deleting the run data will delete all data for the selected run.

• Click the "Delete Run Data" button from the "Run Data Details Screen" (Figure 126). The list of
method-runs contained in the ERT file be displayed.

• Select the "Method — Run" that is to be deleted from the list.

• Click the "Delete Run Data" button to permanently delete the data and return to the "Run Data
Details" screen. There will be no warning to confirm the run is to be deleted; if Delete Run Data is
selected, the data will be removed (Figure 127).

• Click on "Exit without Deleting Run" to keep the data and return to the "Run Data Details" screen.

Efficiency Data (B415.1-10)

As stated previously, there are two tabs for the Efficiency Data: Header Data and Point Data.

To access or enter efficiency data:

• Select the Wood Heater Lab Data entry button on the main menu.

• Select the method and run number of the efficiency run or add a new run as described above.

• Header tab is displayed.

Header Data

Enter the Header data for the efficiency testing method (Figure 128). The fields are as follows:
ID (optional): Identification number or code assigned for test program

Test Duration: Length of duration of test

Burn Rate Category: Depending on the appliance type, one of 4 categories ranges of burn rate at

which test fuel is consumed in a wood appliance. Measured in kilograms or lbs
of wood (dry basis) per hour (kg/hr or lb/hr)

Appliance Type: Wood burning appliance capable of and intended for space heating or domestic

water heating, as defined in the applicable regulation: single burn rate wood
stove, adjustable burn rate wood stove, pellet stove, forced air furnace, hydronic
heater- full storage, or hydronic heater - partial thermal storage.

Temp. Units: Fahrenheit or Celsius

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2- 22

-------
Weight Units:

Pounds (lb) or kilogram - must use lbs on load wt.

Category/Load Capacity: Select appropriate Category for test from dropdown list

Wood Moisture (% dry): The weight of water in wood divided by the weight of the dry wood only (oven-

dry weight) expressed as a percentage.

Wood Moisture (% wet): Calculated value - The weight of water in wood divided by the combined weight

of the water and the wood (green weight), expressed as a percentage.

Load Weight (lb wet): Weight of wood on scale.

Burn Rate (dry kg/h): Calculated value

Target Load (BTU/hr): Maximum load target value - actual BTU/hr must be within 5% of stated Target

Load

Total Particulate Emissions (g): Total PM from Method 2515 that was run concurrent with Method CSA

415.1

Fuel Type:

When a fuel type is selected, the HHV (kJ/kg), %C, %H, %02, and %Ash will
be populated. These values can be changed manually if they do not match your
values.

Override values:

Values that can be entered for Heat Input (Qin Btu/hr), Heat Output (Qout
Btu/hr), Delivered Efficiency (Ndel BTU/hr) or Stack Loss Efficiency (Nstl
Btu/hr)

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-23

-------
J Pwn D *» Oft mh

rCMU »orflOM

IO(optto«ul) 004'Ml*1

f rt* Duration: 142

Bum ( ate-jory 4

Wood Motttute (% dry): 23.30
Wood Moisture (% wet): 91:

load WrifM |«>**t): 79 10
Bum Rote (dry kg/h): 1::

T«|#« Iimm* (RTU/hf) 184^0?

Total Particulate Emissions (f): )4 71

Aw&oaWrfwaanc as XS* |

0* h*Jntrcn Th»»*
envetf. P« water*hadfetan*

IW^IWQVMUWSNmtM Fwmfift

Appfemce Type:
Imp, Unitv
Wcigtit Units:

fiwl Iff)*:
HHV (kl/kf)
%C
*M:

*02:
* Ash

¦BMVMMH
»j CAHIO*. »**nal « rwrodUC«d CSA Gr*U>f
irttieconvifcmnde^&pMtCTo'CSAGraihptnff'eretertnccc s>ctKi. 9 > tar mute «o»
CSA Gtcmj « not '«por«We ft* t* »*"? r Jh? d»t» n dwW, -"•« for ar>,

«r to (tsifvee jardarafcJ CSa>-*jp. c*e*te -«ti»ttp .'Wxfat/ or at Ci dCO-*W7Z7)

Category / load Capacity:

10,00
1^60
42-90

(Bm/h)

Heal Input (Q*i>:

UP4JM-I5F2015)

Figure 128 - Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Header Data

Point Data

Once the header data is completed, select the Point Data Tab (Figure 129). The following data will
need to be entered. The columns can be copied from the spreadsheet and pasted to this table in the
same manner you copy and paste in excel.

Elapsed Time:

Fuel Wt. Remaining (in lbs):

Flue Gas Temp:

Room Temp:

FG % 02:

FG % CO2:

FG % CO:

Time of test recorded in minute (recorded at least every 10 minutes)
Weight of wood on scale.

Gas sample temperature taken from chimney during test.
Air temperature in the test room during test.

Percent oxygen in flue gas during test.

Percent carbon dioxide in flue gas during test.

Percent carbon monoxide in flue gas during test.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 24

-------
Open Expanded

~^*l Run Details

ftunNifniwr: [t RwOate: [ 3/31i®16

Elapsed Time -

Fuel Wt. Remain (II -

Flue Gas Temp.

Room Temp.

FG % 02

FG %C02

FG%CO

79.1

436

12.14

$.49

0.68

79,1

444

13.55

6.82

1.02

78.1

447

9.79

9.87

0,3

77.1

451

7.05

13.59

0.09

Figure 129 - Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Point Data

Show Calculations

Once the point data is completed, go to the Header tab and you can select show calculations or show
results (Figure 130, 131 and 132).

Run

Run(X»t*:

10 (optional): XH MM
1ml Duration: 142
Burn Cjtfjory: J

Appluncr Type:
Imp, Unilv
Wright Unilv

(4): 12. JO
Twfrl laid (BTU/hr): 1S4SM
Iot.il PjUmuUK- I cnt«iom ((): >4 rt

fwrllypr
HHV(kl/kg|
NC
%H

%or.

X A»h:

198S7

tfl

OvmMn:
(Qin): C
(Qout): k
(Nd«l): ~C

5wtf: Annn F. MIS. 1 10 0*2015) ^ iofcs hc-dtrq QQ »» Canadtn Standvdft Aaooa&or MM! pcmsson of Canada* Standard

AMOOAton (occraang « XSA Ore***)!* fte^daie 0M3, T^anto, ON WW *3 CAfiACU. ^ «teorcXcrd from CSA Crxct tundard &415-110 0UOI5) P»- ¦ not 'etponatta for Vw wanna r tie Ml • priaw*6, no! tor an* #nreeentabpre a*d r«w»c*rU©or*
*•> me*» or lapi/d^eee landardCi) M CSACrowp. plmr «wt h«tp;«r
-------
EH B514 Calculations — ~ X

RunNur-Y

GP_CO

MB_k

EL_CH4

CalcPerc02

MCwb

EL_C02

LoadWtkg

0.08

323.81

11.53

18.89699918897

319.77

35.89

6.60

27.62

0.13

595.29

13.16

18.89699918897

306.06

35.89

6.60

12.69

0.03

98.85

10.34

18.89699918897

348.16

35.89

6.60

1.28

0.00

7.15

6.52

18.89699918897

361.33

35.89

6.60

1.90

0.01

18.88

6.57

18.89699918897

368.58

35.89

6.60

6.22

0.03

62.39

4.20

18.89699918897

373.17

35.89

6.60

6.25

0.03

68.71

2.85

18.89699918897

379.04

35.89

6.60

6.01

0.03

62.47

2.74

18.89699918897

38L77

35.89

6.60

5.13

0.04

83.82

2.44

18.89699918897

383.02

35.89

6.60

5.92

0.05

98.68

2.27

18.89699918897

383.00

35.89

6.60

6.21

0.04

83.77

2.38

18.89699918897

387.11

35.89

6.60

12.87

0.08

164.62

1.78

18.89699918897

379.84

35.89

6.60

17.57

0.07

151.22

2.01

18.89699918897

381.75

35.89

6.60

7.92

0.05

108.42

2.57

18.89699918897

387.19

35.89

6.60

18.47

0.11

226.08

1.94

18.89699918897

378.51

35.89

6.60

28.30

0.12

239.57

1.85

18.89699918897

379.24

35.89

6.60

10.26

0.11

228.54

1.89

18.89699918897

379.16

35.89

6.60

8.16

0.10

198.44

2.10

18.89699918897

380.64

35.89

6.60

15.19

0.07

138.50

2.51

18.89699918897

385.55

35.89

6.60

6.23

0.06

133.18

2.70

18.89699918897

384.07

35.89

6.60

2.21

0.06

129.99

2.66

18.89699918897

381.32

35.89

6.60

Figure 131 - Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Show Calculations

Show Results

Run Number

Overall Efficiency
Combustion Efficiency
Heat Transfer Efficiency

HHV Basis

LHV Basis

76.0%

81.9%

98.5%

77.1%

83.1%

Run Date

3/31/2016

HHV Output Rate (kJ/h)

185,913.84

176,359.36

(Btu/h)

Burn Rate (kg/h)

12.30

27.11

(lb/h)

Input (kJ/h)

244,587.35

232,017.52

(Btu/h)

Test Load Weight (kJ/h)

29.11

MC wet (%)

18.90

MC dry {%)

23.30

Particulate (g)

24.78

co(g)

659.41

Test Duration (h)

2.37

64.15

dry lb

Emissions
g/MJ Output
g/kg Dry Fuel
g/h

Ib/MM Btu Output

Particulate

0.06

1.50

0.85

22.65

10.47

278.63

0.13

3.48

Air/Fuel Ratio (A/F)

9.33

Figure 132- Efficiency Data (B415.1-10) Show Results
ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-26

-------
PM Data (E2515-11)

Preburn

Some of this data can be entered into the spreadsheet and imported - Tunnel Traverse information
and Temperatures (Figure 133).

The following header data will need to be hand-entered:

ID (optional): Identification number or code assigned for test program

Reading Interval: The interval of recorded data in minutes.

Run time Pre Burn (min): Duration of the pre-burn test time.

Pitot Tube Initial (Cpi): Calibration of the Pitot tube, usually 0.99.

Pitot Tube Correction (Cpfc): Correction factor used for pitot tube.

Pitot Tube (Cp): This will be calculated from Cpi multiplied by Cpfc.

Dilution Tunnel MW (dry) lb/lb-mole: Dilution tunnel dry gas molecular weight (may be assumed ato

be 29 g/g mole (lb/lb mole).

Dilution Tunnel MW (wet) lb/lb-mole: This will be calculated (if using assumed values - 28.78).

Dilution Tunnel H2O (%): Water vapor in gas stream, proportion by volume (assumed to be 0.02 (2.0%))

Dilution Tunnel Static (in H2O): Static pressure in dilution tunnel in inches of water.

Tunnel Area (fta): Cross-sectional area of the dilution tunnel in square feet.

Tunnel Traverse Information:

Pt: Sampling point identification

dP: delta P - the velocity pressure measurement in the dilution tunnel as measured with the pitot

tube

Temp: Temperature of dilution tunnel in fahrenheit

calcsqrtdP: The calculated column (orange color) is the square root of the delta P.

The Temperature table:

ET: Elapsed Time - time reading at each recorded point in minutes

Scale Reading: Weight of the load by the scale recorded at each recorded point in pounds

Flue Draft: Temperature of the flue draft gas in fahrenheit

Left Side: Temperature of the left side of the firebox of the appliance in fahrenheit
Right Side: Temperature of the right side of the firebox of the appliance in fahrenheit
Back: Temperature of the back of the firebox of the appliance in fahrenheit

Top: Temperature of the top of the firebox of the appliance in fahrenheit

Bottom: Temperature of the bottom of the firebox of the appliance in fahrenheit
Stove T (average): This is a calculated average from the temperatures provided

Tunnel velocity, initial tunnel flow and average tunnel flow are calculated values. The barometric pressure
must be entered into Box A header and the update button on the preburn tab must be selected to complete the
calculation.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 27

-------
( 3 *u«Bat*

*oai»a) lb/M mo*e 29.Q0

'-'LI ' l . 1 MM

Run Date >'11/201*

Ottwtkm Tunnel MW (wH) lb/* mo4e n

ID (optional): 00*- whvv-060-1 1

Dilution Tunnel M20 (X^Z-OO

«*adinfMrrrel: ID

Dilution Tunnel Walk (In M20^' 0.400

(tun Tim# Ml (min*): JMS , .Matt

funnelAi>e*4ftJ|i o 7834

1 Pilot Tube Initial (tpl) Ktot Tub* CoriMlkm (Cpk) Pttot Tube (Cp): Q.99

I Tunnel Trwww Information:

IrmpiKjtuiM

P» •

OP - re

mp - cokaqrtd

0.045

100 0.212H2C

0 045

iooHMI

111

004

ioo H

0044

0.045

100 0.232112C

0.0*2

0.2019)*

0.044

ioo aaoimu

0 0*0

100 &2144*

Jft

00*6

100 0 21*4*

0.042

100 6J09939C

0.045

100 0.212132C

0 040

n .n*4M

SCALE HEADIHG • F

U1€D LIFTS

JD€ . KtGh

~TSADC • SACK • T

OP • E

OTTO - SXOve T (*yf •

9fJ

0.041

€022

602) 0025

6022

602) 602)

29J

0.054

€022

6022 OC-24

6022

e>!23 6022-9

0.0)4

9021

9022 6024

602 i | 90224

26.1

¦0.019

9021

6022 9024

6022

602 i 9022-4

2iil

*021

9022 9024

9022

2*1

•0.017

9021

0022 9024

6022

602J11 60222

23,1

0.0)3

9021

9021 6024

6022 60214

211

0.0)4

9021

9021 602)

9021

«a| H

a»

111

0.0)6

9021

9021 602)

9021

602. r 18114

14-1

0.012

tax

9021 902)

1 MM

100

•ft.623

8020

60221 cnU

1 ot *$ • « »

$~»«*

m*4 Velocity 1) 7t£2

Initial Iu*w»e4 tlomr. *21727
Avera«e Tunnel ftovr 90U01

Figure 133 - Particulate Matter Data (E2515-I1) Preburn
Box A, Box B and Box C

Box A, Box B and Box C general header data elements are similar. Box A is the only box that has the
barometric pressure and the ambient train leak check information. The data needs to be entered
according to the information for each box. The spreadsheet template should be used to import the point
data.

Box A

The header data elements for Box A tab (Figure 134) are as follows:

Reading Interval: The interval of recorded data, in minutes

Sample Box: Sample box identification

Front Filter #: Sample identification number of front filter

Final Leak Rate (cfm): Leak rate on Box A front filter sample train in cubic foot per minute

Test Start Time:
Room Temp (F):
Meter Y Factor:

Rear filter #:

Final leak Rate CFM:
Run time (min):
Barometric Pressure:

Clock test start time

Room temperature of test location, in fahrenheit
Gamma calibration factor of meter box
Sample identification number of rear filter

Leak rate on Box A rear filter sample train in cubic foot per minute
Duration of test run, in minutes

Barometric pressure at sampling site recorded at the beginning, middle and end
of the test, in inches of m ercury

Probe Material:
Ambient Filter#:

Probed material used to sample flue gas
Sample identification number of ambient filter
Filter Final Leak Rate: Leak rate on ambient sample train in cubic foot per minute
ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 28

-------
Fuel Moisture DB (%

Volume:

The Box A Point data
ET:

Gas Meter Volume:
Delta P:

Delta H:

Filter Vacuum:

Scale Weight:

Tunnel Temp:

Flue Temp:

Filter Temp:

FB Rear Temp:
Impinger Temp:
Meter Temp:

Ambient Temp:

The weight of water in wood divided by the weight of the dry wood only

(oven-dry weight) expressed as a percentage.

Volume of ambient sample collected, in liters

(Figure 36) is as follows:

Elapsed Time - time reading at each recorded point in minutes

Volume reading at each recorded point dry cubic meter

Velocity pressure in dilution tunnel as measured with the pitot tube at each
recorded point of the test in inches of water

Average differential pressure across the orifice meter, if used, in inches of
water

Vacuum across the filter at each recorded point
The weight of the fuel on scale at each recorded point, in pounds
Dilution tunnel temperature at each recorded point, in fahrenheit
Flue gas temperature at each recorded point, in fahrenheit
Filter temperature at each recorded point - must be below 90°F
Firebox rear temperature at each recorded point, in fahrenheit
Impinger temperature at each recorded point, in fahrenheit
Meter temperature at each recorded point, in fahrenheit
Ambient temperature at each recorded point, in fahrenheit

~H Rvn

Bn9 Bo* C - L hoir cpt Wyframc Meeter Apfrent 3esjfB ,i E^cency

Run Number: 2

ROOM TEMP (F): bl7

Biramelrk Pressure KEG

MID END

Run Dites 3/31/201®

j30.ll Jjfl.ll ]»¦"

Re«Hnf Interval: 1

SAMPLE BOX: A

METEH Y FACTDB : 11,002

PROBE MATERIAL: |ss

FRONT FILTER*: >}734»2739

REAR FILTERS: |j735

AMBIENT FILTER* [j7»

VOlUM£: [ J4I33.3

FINA1 LEAK RATE (CFM|: jO.Hl

FINAl LEAK RATE(CFM): |a.01

FIETER FINM LEAK RATE: |o.ai

TEST START TIME: f3:31:DO PM

RUN TIME jinana): |2S9

Jp&Alf-

FUEL MOISTURE Ijifi

Box A Point Data

Update

9w# Tomd V&xst-f Prapo/ttnai Haw

£T -

GASVOERVO -

c*lcSAMf -

DELTA P -

DELTA H -

FILTER VAC -

Scale Weigl >¦

€a»cWeig '

TUNNEL T£PV»f -

FlLTEfi - FBftEAHTEMP '*

1/ 0

~.04?

0.03

-0.03

77.1

73 1

0.131

0.042

1-99

-1.22

77.1

¦1

329

n H

0.272

0.141

0.041

1.99

-1,17

76.9

0.2

i47

74 t

Figure 134 - Particulate Matter Data (E2515-11) Box A

Box B

The header data elements for Box B tab (Figure 135) are as follows:

Reading Interval: The interval of recorded data, in minutes

Sample Box: Sample box identification

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 29

-------
Front Filter #: Sample identification number of front filter

Final Leak Rate (cfm): Leak rate on Box B front filter sample train in cubic foot per minute

Clock test start time

Room temperature of test location, in fahrenheit
Gamma calibration factor of meter box
Sample identification number of rear filter

Leak rate on Box B rear filter sample train in cubic foot per minute
Duration of test run, in minutes
Probed material used to sample flue gas
The Box B Point data (Figure 37) is as follows:

ET: Elapsed Time - time reading at each recorded point in minutes

Gas Meter Volume:

Test Start Time:
Room Temp (F):
Meter Y Factor:

Rear filter #:

Final leak Rate CFM:
Run time (min):
Probe Material:

Flue Draft:

Orifice Delta H:

Filter Vacuum:
Left Side:

Right Side:
Filter Temp:
FB Rear Temp:
FB Bot Temp:
Meter Temp:

Volume reading at each recorded point dry cubic meter

delta P - Velocity pressure of the flue gas as measured with the pitot tube at
each recorded point of the test in inches of water

Average differential pressure across the orifice meter, if used, in inches of
water

Vacuum across the filter at each recorded point

Temperature of the left side of the firebox of the appliance at each recorded
point in fahrenheit

Temperature of the right side of the firebox of the appliance, in fahrenheit
Filter temperature, in fahrenheit

Temperature of the back of the firebox of the appliance, in fahrenheit
Temperature of the bottom of the firebox of the appliance, in fahrenheit
Meter Temperature, in fahrenheit

- GAS METER V0LUM - CakSAMPLE RA . FLUE DRAFT

OfllFlCE DELTA M

ILTEII VAC • LEFT SIDE TEMP - RIGHT SIDE TEMP

FILTER TEMP M

6019

6020

0.12$ C

0,128

-0.M

1.99

LSI

6019

6020

D-26S

0.14

•0.04

1.9®

1.52

6020

0.411 ¦

0,113

-0.04

147

6020

Figure 135 - Particulate Matter Data (E2515-11) Box B
ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 30

-------
Box C - 1-hour Option

Data elements for the Box C - 1-Hour Option (Figure 136) tab are the same as Box B

ZD Run DsIj Detaii

Figure 136- PM Data (E2515-J1) Box C I Hour Option

Hydronic Heater

The Hydronic Heater tab (Figure 137) contains information only about the Hydronic Heater testing
parameters. If this appliance is not a hydronic heater, this tab can be skipped. The data elements are:

ET: Elapsed Time - time reading at each recorded point in minutes

APPL GPM: Volumetric flow rate of water in heat exchange system in gallons per minute

APPL Tin: T6 - Temperature of return water as it enters the heater/boiler in fahrenheit.

APPL Tout: T5 - Temperature of hot water supply as it leaves the heater/boiler in fahrenheit.

LOAD GPM: Vfi - total water volume at the beginning of the test time interval in gallons per
minute

LOAD Tin: T3 - Temperature of cooling water at the inlet of the load side of the heat exchange in
fahrenheit

LOAD Tout: T4 - Temperature of cooling water at the outlet of the load side of the heat exchange in
fahrenheit

T PILE: The thermopile reading the differential water temperature at each recorded point

LD BTU/hr: The average heat output rate on the load side of the heat exchanger based on water
temperature and flow rate

Appl Dry: Weight of appliance without water

Appl Water: Weight of the appliance and water

From this data, Hydronic Heater Summary Calculations will be conducted for temperature average at
the beginning and ending of the run, Appliance weight and water weight, Appliance average change in
temperature, total minutes of run, total BTU, Total BTU with water, Total BTU with water and steel,
BTU/hr.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-

-------
3 Run C*u Crtj li

* B»l» (RiJS-11} ¦ 4 - yHt/M It

IWt '-ijT p«J

=£WL.»h fcr. A rto.n S?»c-S tw «B KJwrt*"" I^TT^II Sfoitf /ff&HMTl
iummiry CjIctfUtkHH

*J>Pt W»i»h« 1350
tvim WCJjJh! 1463.
M'PL KLTA Tjwg 17,12
Cp J.Ml,'
Cpj l.MKSifiST
icrtal Mintrt« 259

n iwgin uj

fT*liit 259
Tm 324-i?
IllfjI BTU wrilh UTJtM 25445
Totjl BTU wMh WO and Steel )]«.'

BTU/Hr mil
Update C.jkun:tcr - *y[:4 Wj'h. - :a\: ilnr .'l'^

e| 10-616 144 US IM M ISI^n MWO IW nit^M tl»

1 10.564 14S.fi ICLS9 1.433 56. IB 159.31 94J42 G7929.432 IBM S3i| IBS

Figure 137 - Temperature Data (K25J5-I I) Hydremic Heater

Ambient

The Ambient tab (Figure
Meter Y Factor:

Sample volume (L) start:
Sample volume (L) end:
Meter Temp (F) start:
Meter Temp (F) end:
Delta H start:

Delta FI end:

Delta P start:

Delta P end:

Total particulates (mg):

138) contains the following data elements for the ambient train:

Gamma calibration factor of ambient meter box

Volume recorded at the start of the test

Volume recorded at the end of the test

Temperature of the meter box at the start of the test

Temperature of the meter box at the end of the test

Differential pressure across the orifice meter, if used, in inches of water
at the start of the test

Differential pressure across the orifice meter, if used, in inches of water
at the end of the test

Velocity pressure for ambient probe in inches of water at start of test

Velocity pressure for ambient probe in inches of water at end of test

Total mass of particulate matter collected on filter, filter gasket, and
probe assembly from ambient train in mg

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 32

-------
3 ftw" 0«t» Ortrt

Toli! Sample Volume (ft J]: J 45,553

Average Sample Rale (ftJ/min]; j 0.191

i«ampN* Timr (mint]:

259

Average Meter Temperature (FJ:

sa,9

Figure 138 - PMData (E2515-11) Ambient

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 33

-------
Results / Efficiency

This tab (Figure 139) displays the results and efficiency information from the particulate matter
testing method- ASTM 2515-11. The button Show Results and Show Efficiency Calcs open windows
showcasing this data (Figure 140 and 141). Each filter particulate mass needs to be entered, the train
(box) used for one-hour sampling and the mass collected on the one-hour filter and the FflTV and LFIV
for efficiencies. If this is a partial thermal storage unit, the start-up, steady state and end time needs to
be recorded and the mass on the filter for each section needs to be entered.

"si Run Data Details

Kjnufoctjrcr:
Modd/Senal*:

Results:

Efficiency:

Filter A Particulate:
(mg|

3,4

Filter B Particulate:

[me)

3,5

HHV:

3604

Show Efficiency Calcs
(may take a m(nute)

LHV:

7®a

Show Results
(may take a minute)

Partial Storage;

One Hour PM:
(™g)

0.5

Time (mini.) PM [gj

Start Up:P

Steady State:

EndTlme: I

Figure 139 - PM Data (E2515-11) Results / Efficiency

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 34

-------
Show Results

|] Results for Run Number: 4 Run Date: 3/31/2016

Burn Rate (Kg/Hr Dry): | 6.61

Sample A

Information

Total Sample Volume - Vm:

36.81

Average Gas Velocity in Dilution Tunnel - vs (ft/sec):

13.72

Average Gas Flow Rate in Dilution Tunnel - Qsd (dscf/hour):

36,528.04

Total Sample Volume (Standard Conditions) - Vmstd (dscf):

35.24

Average Tunnel Temperature (F):

92.4

Average Delta P:

0.041

Average Gas MeterTemperature (F):

Average Delta H (in-H20):

1.99

Total Time of Test (mins):

259

Total Particulates (mg):

3.4

Particulate Concentration (dry-standard) (grams/dscf):

0.000096469

Ambient Train (dry-standard) (grams/dscf):

0.000008346

Net (dry-standard) (grams/dscf):

0.000088122

Particulate Emission Rate (grams/hour):

3.22

Total PM Emissions (grams):

13.90

Average Total PM Emissions (grams):

AVERAGE PARTICULATE EMISSIONS RATE (grams/hour):

% OF AVERAGE:

97.7

Emissions Factor (g/kg-Dry):

0.487

Sample B
InformaTion

36.19

13.72

36,528.04

34.79
92.4

0.041
96

1.9S

259
3.5

0.000100596

0.00000S346

0.000092250

3.37

14.55

14.22

3.29

102.3

0.510

ONE HOUR PARTICULATE EMISSIONS RATE (grams/hour):

Select One HourTrain

ONE HOUR PM (grams):

0.500

ONE HOUR BOX USED:

Figure 140 - Particulate Matter Data (E2515-11) Show Results

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-35

-------
Show Efficiency Calcs

Show Efficiency Calculations opened from the Show Efficiency Calcs button (Figure 141).

I=H Results for Run Number: 4 Run Date: 3/31/2016 X

HeatOutput:

170082

Btu/hr

179.326

MJ/hr

Emissions:

0.1352

ib/MMBtu Out

0.05S2

g/MJ

0.8483

g/dry kg

10.4302

g/hr

Qin:

551,711

BTU

5S2

Qin LHV:

512,450

BTU

540

Delivered Efficiency:

72.96%

ndel

78.55%

ndel LHV

g/hr

Time (hrs)

Total Grams

ET:

10.43

2.37

24.68

Fuel Load:

79.1

Moisture Content:

23.30

Figure 141 -PM Data (E2515-11) Show Efficiency Calculations

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 36

-------
Chapter 5: Wood Heater Summary Tables

Figure 142 - Wood Heater Summary Table Menu

Summary tables are accessed in the wood heater model by selecting The "Wood Heater Summary
Tables" button (Figure 142). Summary tables are determined by the appliance, fuel type, loading and test
methods. These summaries are autogenerate from selection made in the application section and data
entered into the Wood Heater Lab Data Entry section.

Hydronic Heaters

Data Summary Part A

Hydronic Heaters Data Summary Part A data table (Figure 143).

i] Summary

Cstloadcapamy

* Run Numbei *

Target Load (6tu/hr|i *

Actual Load
-------
Data Summary Part B

Hydremic Heaters Data Summary Part B data table (Figure 144).

Sumirisiy

c«t_u«tiLapacKy - HunNumaer ¦ Ti- Min utajm water Temp IF) - E.T-Total Emissions - E - pm output Based (16/mmaTU Out) • E - pm output -used Ig/Mi out) •

Is < 1556 of max

154.04

24.32

1*: IB-24% of max

151.82

12.25

0.07

003

111: 25-5054 of max

143.26

14.2a

O.CS

0-0-2

IVSMatt capacity

125.5

24.73

E-PM Output Based (g/MJ Out) • E g/hr- PM fiats (g/hr) - Eg/kg-PM Factor (gAg> ¦ Ndel - Delivered Efficiency (%) » Nslm - Stack Loss Efficiency (W)

| 0.06

0.03
0.03
| 0.06

1.65

1.39
3.31
10.47

0,87

0.44

0.50
0.85

54.54%

62.33%
65.30%
72.96%

Figure 144 - Hydronic Heaters - Data Summary Part B
Additional Information

Hydronic Heaters Additional Information data table (Figure 145).

HI Summary

Cats Summary Par! A Data ¦ F

: aaatsnsl i"^rnab:r lj, ...I i'jri3ilj'iu

74.6%

73.5%
77.5%
716.0%

KamrfactLrer:

Modrf:

Hotel Nurrbe-

H&atef

Hll

PrtitSiifrm&rfcs

^iRed font 1raicitti infci .nafor a tsk.ci ajtaide Ttic range of :•:?

method or the i egubBoT' i

eesj

Maximum Output Rating- Qmax (Bty/hrji

Annual Efficiency Bating - Ntavg IHHWj

aamcxjlate Emissions Eavg {g/hr weighted a*?; - Cait>on MoooKide - CO (g/min) *

170,359

73,40%

15.W 039.41

Figure 145 - Hydronic Heaters - Additional Information

Annual Weighting

Hydronic Heaters Annual Weighting data table (Figure 146).

"^1 Summary

Dets Suinna y Pat A Data Suntrtary Pait B Addltonai

CatLoadCapacity
I: < 15% of max
111: 16-24% of max
III: 25-50% of max
IVzMax capacity

RunNurnber -

- NdelFl-Weighted Delivered Efficiency - EgMJFi-Weighted PM Output (g/MJ)

52.70%

0.238

29.12%

III

0.275

31.88%

0.05

5.91%

0.03

0.01
0.01
0.00

EgMJFI-Weighted PM Output (g/MJ) -

Egkgfi-PM Factor g/kg -

EgMMBtuFI-Weighted PM Output Ib/MMBtU -

EghrFi-Weighted PM Rate {g/hr} -

0.03

0.38

0.06

0.72

0.01

0.10

0.02

0,33

0.01

0.14

0.02

0.91

0.00

0.04

0.01

052

Figure 146 - Hydronic Heaters — Annual Weighting

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-38

-------
Adjustable Burn Rate
Data Summary

Displays a data summary of the Adjustable Burn Rate Stove testing (Figure 147).

E=1 Summary

irud iVeghbng AddSend JnfTjrTTeten

Cat LoadCapactt -

RunDate • RunNumber -

Emission Rate |'g/Hr) •

Burn Rate (ICg/hr) -

BTU/Ht (HHV) -

Overall Effciemcy (94) - CO Emissions (g/Mf Ol

¦t: 0,8-1,25 k&'h'H

2/16/2016 1

2.B3

0.86

10,4S2.76

0.7

It; as-1.25 k=/hr (1.

2/16/2019 2

4.19

1.00

12,141.39

0.6

Ill: 1.25-1,9 kg/hr 12

2/17/2016 S

4,9:3

1,65

19.651.tJJ

0.6

IV: Maximum

2/17/2016 4

7.19

1.89

21,899.09

0.6

Ove ra II Effcie n cy | %) -

CO Emissions (g/MJ Output) *

CO Emissions (g/kg Dry Fuel; -

CO Emission - ASTM E2515 Emissions - First Hour (g/hr) *

0.7

10.05

129.40

111.03 15.79

0.6

10.36

132.91

132.52 21.22

0.6

S.82

111,01

182.31 14.3:1

0.6

6.99

85,39

161.48 20.15

Figure 147 - Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Data Summary

Annual Weighting

Displays the Annual Weighting of the Adjustable Burn Rate Stove testing (Figure 148).

Summary

Cat_LoadCaflaclty - RunNw - Cat - Emission Rate (fi/PirJ Burn Rate IKg/hrJi Pi - Ki - NdelKi-Welghted Delivered Efficiency -

III: 0.8-1.25 kg/hr [1.76-2,76 lb/I* drybasiB

2.83

0-86

0.3d

0.38

52 5*

II: 0.8-1.25 fcg/hr (1.76-2.^ Ib/I* dry basis)

!¦

4.19

0.M

o.sa

72.495

II1:1.25-1,3 Kg/hr (2.7S-4.19 lb,'hr dry basis'

ill

4 S3

1.65

0.83

0.52

72.S&

IV: Maximum

7.13

L89

aso

0.1B

25.594

NdelKi-Weighled Delivered Efficiency •

EgMJKi-Weighted PMOutput (g/MJ) -

EgkgKi-P M Factor g/kg -

EgVlMBlu Ki- *

EghrKi-Weighted PM Rate {g/hr| -

.52.6%

0.097

1.Z51

0.226

1.074

713%

0.172

2.203

0.399

2.135

72.994

0.123

1.541

0.285

2.53S

25.554

0.054

0.665

0.127

1.258

Figure 148- Adjustable Burn Rate Stove - Annual Weighting

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2- 39

-------
Additional Information

Displays Additional Information for the Adjustable Burn Rate Stove testing (Figure 149).

SumPAnRate ' SumKi *

Weighted particulate emission average
-------
Single Burn Rate
Data Summary

Displays a data summary for the Single Burn Rate Stove testing (Figure 150).

31 Summary —

¦MililHH"

| Pnnt Sunmdnes relate; ri'Lj-Tvai-cfi or vstet cuQde srtc ofv- rTwlhod :• ths re^Jaba- :equre;

1 Data > jTrni'Sr v 1

unuaJ Weightna Add&ansi ln-fenTstnn

RunNumter - Bum Rale (KG/lhr) -

ASTO E2515 Emission (g/Hr) -

ASTM E25 IS Emissions- First Hour,(g/hr) - CSA B415 Overal Eff ciency (ft) -

CSA BJ15 CO Emissions (g/hr) -

1 2-74

3.40

4.05 W.4*

136,53

4 2.96

3.90 5,33 <>7A%

142.44

Figure 150 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Data Summary

Annual Weighting

Displays the Annual Weighting for the Single Burn Rate Stove testing (Figure 151).

Summary

Cat_LaadCapacity

- RunNumber

- Cat -

Fi - NdelFl-Weighted Delivered Efficiency - EgMJFi-WeigMed PM Output (g/MJ) -

IV; Mais capacity

0.1 0.14 0.01

IV: Ma* capacity

0.1 0.13 0.01

EgMJFI-Weighted PM output (g/MJ) -

EgkgFi-PM Factor g/kg -

EgMMEtuFi-Weighted PM Output Ib/MMEtu - EghrFi-Weighted PM Rate {g'hr) -

0.01

0.13

0.02 0.35

0.01

0.13

0.02 0.39

Figure 151 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Annual Weighting

Additional Information

Displays the Additional Information for the Single Burn Rate Stove testing (Figure 152).

H] Summary

W*mf*hjref:
Models

Data Summary Amjd WaghtinJ Addtonai info-maton

Overall average efficiency using HHV (%) - Total CO emission (g/min)

4.55

Figure 152 - Single Burn Rate Stove - Additional Information

PM weighted average (g/hr)

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-41

-------
Pellet Stove

Summary Results - Pellet Stoves

Displays the Summary Results from the Pellet Stove testing (Figure 153).

-^1 Summary

Cal_LoadCap •

fiutiNumbei *

Burn Rate (KQ/hr) »

Run Time (Mm; *

Heat Output (Btu/hrJ •

CO Emissi ons (g/rn in) »

Heating Effdency (?4 HHV)

una *

1.63

54)

20.963.94

0.QJ

68.3%

•-OW

1.01

180

11,637.12

0.0J

61.1%

]wiedlum

1.14

120

16,022.77

0.04

74.4%

Overall

10A

1.1ft

3&0

13,989.11

0.03

64.1%

Figure 153 - Pellet. Stoves - Summary Results

Summary Results - CSA B415.1

Displays the Summary Results from the Pellet Stove testing with the CSA B415.1 method (Figure 154).

f§] Summary

Manufacturer's Nierne

Model number
Print Summaries

IPeltet 5tcft/e

lR.ec xont testes information or values outside the range of the method cr the regulation requrementE
Surrmarv ResJts - Pelet Steves I SuTimory Results - CSA £H15. l| surnnary Results - Totals

Cat_LoadCapacity

* Bum Rate (KG/hr) *

CO Emissions (g/min *

Heating Effciency (% HHV)

Heat Output [Biu/hr] »

USE

1.63

0.03

es.3%

20,963.94

Low

1.01

0.03

61.1%

11.S37.12

Vledium

1.14

0 34

74.4%

16,022.77

Overall

1.16

0.03

54.1%

13,969.11

Figure 154 - Pellet Stoves — Summary Results (CSA B415.1)
Summary Results - Totals

Displays the Summary Result Totals from the Pellet Stove testing (Figure 155).

3] Summary

Summary Results - °cll;l Staves Sunrary Rcsulis -C3A E5415, ll Summary Results Totab

First Hour Emissions (g/hr)

Total PM Emissions {g/hr} »

Overall CO Emissions ({j'min} *

Overall EffciencY {% HHV) *

1.34558061293 70S

1.13

0.02S9229948654333

54.09%

Figure 155 - Pellet Stoves - Summary Results - Totals

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 42

-------
Forced Air Furnace
Data Summary

The data summary from Forced Air Furnace testing (Figure 156).

j i?| Summary

Manufacturer s t
-------
Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage
Data Summary Part A

The data summary Part A from Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage testing (Figure 158).

I-a) Summary

Cat_LaadCjparrry

r E>urt Nanrtboi -

Tar|;&TLoari>;Btu/hr) »

Actual Load ^atu/hr) «

Max Load

Actual Load of Max) »

Tcrt Durait?Qri^lnrj *

Wfua (Wood WorgM as-fircd la J •

- 2

27.676

26,737

176,559

i-5,16%

15,03

It 16-24% of m«

44.282

43,788

176,159

8.85

n IB:25-5ffiS»fm8S

92.254

36.699

175,559

54,83%

4.32

IVita capacity

lS4.3Cfi

UMOB

170,359

sqjafli

atijj

Wfuel (Wood Weight as-Fired lb) »¦

MCave (Wood Moisture (%DB) »¦ Qin Heat 1

Input (Biuj *

~.~u t H ea f Ou t put (Btu) ~

orQIn ¦*

~rQout »¦

22,40

538,793

446,755

23.50

527,068

430,726

22.60

537,914

463/945

23.30

548,734

463,910

Figure 158 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part A

Data Summary Part B

The data summary Part B from Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage testing (Figure 159).

Summary

Oofcs Surrmsry Pert

Cat_L0ddCapac5Ty

* RunNumber

T2- Min Return Water Temp (F)

* ET - Total PM Emissions {g)

E - PM Output Based (Ib/nnmBRl Out)

E - PM Output Based (g/MJ Out;. *

Mr.-:WT if'uTilL!

«[2

154.04

24.£2

| 0.06

ill: 16-24% of man

151J12

12.26

0JQ7

0.03

III: 25-50% q1 ma*

143.26

14.2S

Q.06

0.03

IV. Maj. capacity

125.6

24.76

| 0.06

E - pm output Based {g/MJ Out} - E g/hr - pm Rate (g/hr) - Eg/kg-PM Factor (gftg) - Nde! - Delivered Efficiency - W5lm-stack Loss Efficiency (%)

0.06 1.6S 0.37 54.S4SS 74.6%

0.03 1.39 0.44 62.33* 73.5*

0.03 3.31 0.50 65.30* 77.5*

0.06 10.47 0.&5 72.96* 76.0*

Figure 159 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part B

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 44

-------
Data Summary Part C

The data summary Part C from Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage testing (Figure 160).

EH Summary

Manufacture!:
Modri:

|H3njfe ctirer

PrnlSanmanw

Red fnrft incfcales mfornia&n a values oufcsde Ilia raroa o# tlis method or the regulation reaiirem

Data Summary Pat A Data Summary Pat B Atidtjcnal Enfor madon Annual WeiflhOna ¦>""'5 arrowy Port: c I Data Surrmar y Part D

CatLoadCapacity * RunNurnber - StarttlpTime * SteadyStateTrme

EndTime

Startup CO * Steady State CO

End CO

Total CO

^¦V: Max capacity^!

117

164.34

390,53

104.49

659.41

l: < 15% of max

245

279.16

262.20

lr619.19

2,160.55

II: 16-24% of max

501

243.74

995,10

52.76

1,291.59

III: 25-50% of max

234

145.32

SM.71

77.15

XQ27.18

Figure 160 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part C
Data Summary Part D

The data summary Part D from Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage testing (Figure 161).

it* tr* •¦yvfs of t'e » ly- -e-jLtofe't

v f"nr! B Add benml Irrfcrnatcri Ami J Ih'mghkyg Bota Sl

DaaSumafy PartQ

Cit_LojdCij-ci?y - RunNianbar • StarfUp&M * St*jeyvtattiPM - SvdPM » Startup PM envision Ir*3o* fuftJJ • Steady Stat® PWtirvrfss&nindiu (g/kgfu-i-lj • EndPM amissionfc"ids* |.gA£lij*l| *

IVifclax G»BCIty 1 &.73J 4.73 &.3 D.1D D.13 0.31

I:<13* ofHJBK 2 G.23 3.B C fcW D.M 0.M

It: 10-24% of max a C 3 G 0.00 D.OS 0.00

IE: 23-30% of man 4 Q.13;P 3.13 D D.C3 0.10 0.00

Figure 161 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage Data Summary Part D

Additional Summary Information Part E

Additional summary Information from Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage testing (Figure 162).

LrU Summary

Maufscturer:

Model:

| n»:<& 'Ufte

jHydrcric Heeler

I PtTU Sunrares

Li* tc i r 'uMvalw of '.'-si jes ~.

itsde the range of itcmelhcc ar the repJabor reqiirsnenh;

Data Surma y fori A Data Suwia> Part | Addttonal irformatior Wcightirc Data Suwusfv C Data Sur*narf Part D

Maximum Output Rating- Qjma* f Btu/hr)

Annual Efficiency Rating - Navg (HHV) - Particulate Emissions - Eavg (g/hr weighted ave] - Carbon Monoxide - CO (g/min] »

EhEUE

75.40% 19.04 659.41

Figure 162 - Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage - Additional Summary Information

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 45

-------
Annual Weighting

Annual weighting from Hydronic Heater - Partial Thermal Storage testing (Figure 163).

Summary

Manufacturer:

Mjnufacturer

Model:

rrodal number

^Bnydronic Heater

^^Red font nricaiB irrftitrnabcn or yahes aulsce ihe range of Ihe meihed cr the icgiiabon reaurc:nrni5^|

tola Summery Part A

Oata Summary Psri 0

Addtwrwl Sumwry Port C feta Summery Part D

Cat_LQadCapacitY

- RunNumber

cat

NdelFi-Weighted Dedvered Efficiency -

EgMJFl-weighted PM Output (g/MJ) -

- 2

0.437

52,70%

0.03

M: 16-24% of max

0.238

29.12%

0.01

111; 25-50% of man

0.275

31.88%

0.01

| IV:Max capacity

0.05

5.91%

0.00

•PortD

EglVUF!-Weighted PM Output (g/NUj -

EgkgFi-PMFactorg/kg -

EgMMBtuFi-weighted PM output Ib/MMBtu -

EghrFi-weighted Pf
-------
Chapter 6: Wood Heater Checklist

Wood Heaters

Wood Heater
Application

Wood Heater
Lab Data Entry

Wood Heater
Summary Tables

Wood Heater
Checklist

Wood Heater
Attachments

Figure 164 - Wood Heater Checklist Menu

General and General Information

Manufacturer and General Information certification checklist. The same checklist is utilized for
Wood/Pellet Stoves, Hydronic Heaters, and Forced Air Furnaces.

H frmWSCklist

Manufacturers' 2015/2020 Certification Checklist for
Wood/Pellet Stoves, Hydronic Heaters and Forced-Air Furnaces

General and General Information | cheddJst |

MANUFACTURER AND GENERAL INFORMATION

Manufacturer's Name:

Greentech Manufacturing Inc

Crown Royal Stoves RS7200E

Catalyst ^ |

Heater / Appliance:

Hydronic Heater

Type:

Full Storage
Partial Storage
Indoor
Outdoor
Other

Fuel Tested:

Crib

Method(s):

fcd

ASTM E2S1S-11

ASTM E2779-10

ASTM E2780-10

Alternate Test Method
Used? (specify)

28R

28WHH

28WHH-PTS

CSA B415.1-10

ASTM E871-82

ASTM E2618-13

Physical Address (Street
number and Address, not
P.O. Box):

2716 Cresent Drive

Mailing Address

PO Box 1237

City:

International Falls

State:

ZIP Code: 56649

Phone:

218-283-3416

Email:

ryan @gree n-tech. mfg

Website: crownroyalstoves.com

Date of Submission of 30-Days Notice to EPA:

2/15/2016

Attach 30 Day Letter

Certification Step

Proposed Test Date:

Actual Test Date:

Was the compliance test postponed or suspended?:

NO ,v

Figure 165 - Wood Heater Checklist - General Information

Checklist

Checklist of data for the Wood Heater. The same checklist is utilized for Wood/Pellet Stoves, Hydronic
Heaters, and Forced Air Furnaces.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 47

-------
H frmWSCkList

~ >

Manufacturers' 2015/2020 Certification Checklist for
Wood/Pellet Stoves, Hydronic Heaters and Forced Air Furnaces

General and General Information CheckList

CHECKLIST (for WOOD HEATERS, HYDRONIC HEATERS, FORCED-AIR FURNACES)

NSPS Requirement Meets NSPS? Comment

Click for
more

Wood heater description?

Pictures of wood heater?

Data summary tables included?

QA plan included?

Certificate of Conformity included in WH application?

Full CBI and non-CBI test report versions included in WH application?

Reported first hour emissions for each burn rate or for partial thermal
storage method?

Reported CO in g/Min?

Reported weighted average % efficiency (HHV)?

Weighted average emissions (in g/hr (WH) or Ib/mmBTU (HH/FAF))

Figure 166- Wood Heater Checklist

Chapter 7: Wood Heater Attachments

The attachments added to the Wood Heater are summarized in this section.
Additional Documents can also be added at this point in the process to ensure
documentation has been provided for each required test and certification.

Figure 167 - Heater
A ttachment Menu

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 48

-------
Q Wood Stove Attachments —

~ X

~ Show All Attachments

Attachments -

Alternate Method Request and Approval Letter (optional)! |

"£l(o)

30 Day Notice to EPA Letter
Engineering Drawings (optional)

Firebox Statement (optional)
CBI (optional)

Valid Certification Statement (optional)

$(0)

§(o)
i9(o)

${0)

$(o)

Warranties (optional)

i9(o)

Q/A Statement (optional)

(3(0)

Laboratory Sealing of Unit (optional)

Wood Heater Manufactured Statement (optional)

Third Party Certification Statement (optional)

$(0)
${0)
${0)

Approved Lab/Third Party Statement (optional)
Website Certification Statement (optional)

$(0)
10(0)

Transferability Acknowledgement Statement (optional)

lfil(0)

Statement about Selling Wood Heaters without an EPA Certificate (optional)

$(0)

Manufacturer Instructions to Lab

$(0)

§(o)

To add or view an attachment: To add more attachment items, enter the description of the att

- double click on the "paper clip" symbol bottom row of the attachdesc column. Then add your attachm?

- select "add" to add a file ^ps to redyce ^ pDF fi|e sjze;

-select View to View a file -Create PDF directly from application,

- Attach individual components not compiled material

- Use descriptive file names (i.e. M29-field-data_ll-ll-ll.pdf)

- Attach compressed image files (JPG, GIF, PNG) or CGM

- Scan paper documents at 200 dpi

Figure 168 - Wood Heater Attachments list

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2- 49

-------
Chapter 8: Administration

Help/ System Reports

m ERTADMIN

ERT Help / Administration Screen

ERT Version:
Release Date:
Release Date:

3/24/2021

Check for New ERT
0 Check Version on Startup

Access 2016 16.0.13127 32-bit

ERT Version History
Field Result Calculations
Em issi o n/Con ce ntrati o n Ca I cu I ati on s

ERT User Guide
ERT Methods and Target Parameters
ERT Data Dictionary

Web Links

EPA ERT Home Page

Industry NAICS Search
FRS Search
CAS Number Search
Method Information
CDX Home Page
Audit Sample Info.

ERT Support

Theresa Lowe

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Sector Policies
and Programs Division, Measurement Policy Group, D243-
05 RTP NC 27711 Tel. 919.541.4786 Fax 919.541.1039

Lo w e. Th e re sa ®e d a. oov

Figure 169 - The ERT Help,Mdminstration Screen

The administration area of the ERT includes a "Help /System (Sys) Reports"
button. Clicking on the button will open the LERTHelp /administration" screen.

The ERT version and release date are at the top. The ERT support names and
contact information is provided at the bottom. The two middle sections include
buttons that provide more information or help, and websites for more information
or help.

Buttons:

ERT Version Hi story The ERT Versions from oldest to

most current with a listing of the
descriptions of the updates.

Field Result Calculations Broken down per test run tabs, a

table of the field, field description,
and the formula used to calculate
the provided value.

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data Part 2- 50

-------
Emission/Concentration Calculations

A table providing the formula to
provide the calculated value of
emission/concentration. The table
provides the

emission/concentration, and the
formula used.

ERT User's Manual If the file "uman.pdf' is available

in the folder with the ERT;
the" Users Manual" will be
accessed for the user to read. If the
file is not available, an alert
reminds the user to download the
user's manual from the ERT
website.

ERT Methods and Target Parameters

ERT Data Dictionary

Clicking on this tab brings up a
table that lists all source test
methods which the ERT is capable
of documenting. The table
identifies the methods by number
with their associated description
and the compound(s) associated
with the test method

Web Links:

EPA ERT Home Page

Industry NAICS Search

FRS Search

CAS Number Search

Method Information

CDX Home Page Central
Data Exchange website:

The ERT home page within the CHIEF web pages.

https://www. epa. gov electronic-reportirm-air-emissions/

electronic-reporting-tool-ert

North American Industry Classification (NAICS)

website. http://www.census, gov/eos/www/naics/

Federal Registry System

(FRS).https: H'H'H'.epa.gov/enviro/frs-querv-page
Chemical Name search to get the Chemical Abstract
Service identifier associated with a gas or chemical.

http://webbook. nist. gov/chemistrv/name-ser. html
The main page for the Emissions Measurement Center
whichprovides information on test methods for
measuring pollutants from stationary sources and other
sources. https://www. epa. gov/emc/

https://cdx.epa.gov/epa_home.asp

ERT User Manual for Wood heater Certification for Compliance Application and Test Data

Part 2-51

-------